ML20209H820
| ML20209H820 | |
| Person / Time | |
|---|---|
| Site: | Fermi  |
| Issue date: | 11/06/1985 |
| From: | DETROIT EDISON CO. |
| To: | |
| Shared Package | |
| ML20209H799 | List: |
| References | |
| PROC-851106, NUDOCS 8511110233 | |
| Download: ML20209H820 (351) | |
Text
{{#Wiki_filter:E yg-- copylor tein5cisty isids n .. 'only per AP 12.000.07 SR
/ Safety Classification i
i < Thb copy for temporary issu6 ! cn'v r,2r AP 12.000.07, FERMI 2 PROCEDURE - I&C SURVEILLANCE TITLE: ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM CONDENSATE STORAGE TANK
' ' LEVEL CHANNEL ALIBRATION: C36-N404 AND C36-R405
,?"*
PROCEDURE NUMBER: 44.110.20 f f% %',7;3,*%n i *
- q'i:
REVISION: 0 // g ,I73 [ v /j, 3 , Name of preparer: D. K. Jones Technically , i reviewed by: - h Date: /d*28 W ' y //s
, Reviewed / concurred by: M _
Date: M [ Supv - Operational Ass ance j-Approved by: i li ! I Responsible Section Head or OSRO Member / Alt Date:[ ib[ ! l Further Approval Required for Safety-Related or Superintendent-Designated 7.us.l...... Recommended by: m ,I Date: /O-7f -ff / OSRO Ch' airman / Alternate Approved by: ~
-/
Date: / Af!P.5~ St perintendent - Nuclear Production f The following approved Procedure Change Requests are incorporated in this revision: f This revision l l does l ldoes not constitute periodic review. f pnp ~ I F R k33851106 K 05000341 N PDR I o __ ___
, 44".110.20 Rev. 0 TABLE OF CONTENTS I. age 1.0 ' Purpose...................................... J 2.0 _ Reference.................................... I 3.0 ~ Required Equipment........................... 2 4.0 Precautions and. Limitations................... 2 5.0 Prerequisites................................ 2 6.0 Procedure.................................... 3 7.0 Acc e pt an c e Cri t e ria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Att achttent s Calibration Data Sheet (102485).............. Attachment 1 .,
Calib ra t ion Tes t Checkli s t (102485 ) . . . . . . . . . . Attachment 2 Independent Verification Checklist (102485).. Attachment 3 t Ml LM
- LBP/R485/8.0 102685 6% 4
_ u
44.110.20 Rev. 0
- Page 1 1.0 Purpose 1.1 When performed in its entirety this test will satisfy the once per 18 month CHANNEL CALIBRATION requirements of the Fermi 2
. Technical Specification section 4.3.10.1 Table 4.3.10, by verifying'the calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSIIM CONDENSATE STORAGE. TANK LEVEL instruments C36-N404 and C36-N405.
2.0 References 2.1 Use References 2.1.1 Plant Operations Manual (PDM) Procedure 12.000.13, ' Radiation Work Permit. 2.1.2 POM Procedure 12.000.18, Surveillance Program. 2.1.3 .POM Procedure 12.000.43 Verification of Correct Operating Activities. 2.1.4 POM Procedure 41.000.09, Process Instrumentation Removal From and Return to Service. 2.1.5 POM Procedure 41.000.11, Calibration of Process
. Ins t rumenta tion .
2.2 Source References 2.2.1 Fermi 2 Technical Specification 3/4.3.10 APPENDIX R Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls. 2.2.2 POM Procedure 12.000.15, PN-21 (Work Order Processing) . 2.2.3 - POM Procedure ~41.000.03, Instrumenta* ion Calibration Records . 2.2.4 FGM Procedure 46.000.04, Indicators and. Recorders. 2.2.5 Equipment History Folders for C36-N404 and C36-R405. 2.2.6 MI-1C-0207 Rosemount Alphaline Flow Transmitter Model 1151DP without Integral Square Root Extraction. 2.2.7 Edison Drawings': 61721-2785-2 Rev.
- LOOP DIAGRAM-DEDICATED SHUTDOWN CONTROL PANEL 1
H21-P623 INST.
- Drawing generated by EDP-1697 Item No. 19.00 Rev. O B11AF1
44".110.20 Rev. 0 Page'2 3.0 Required Equipment
. 3.1 Sound Powered Phones required for each person for section 5.5.
23.2 A pressure source capable of supplying 0 to 15' PSIG (Utility equipment).
. 3.3 A pressure'-gauge capable of measuring 0 to 15 PSIG with an accuracy of +/ '.0355 PSIG or better (Heise CM or equivalent).
-3.4 Assorted tubing and fittings for test set up. ,
4.0 Precautions and Limitations 4.1. If any discrepancy is encountered, or if any steps cannot be satisfactorily completed or if any instrument test data exceeds the Required Limits, immediately notify the Nuclear Shift Supervisor so that he can initiate any necessary corrective actions. 4.2. If a ~ change in testing personnel takes place during the course of this test, the prerequisites should be reverified. 4.3 Always read a step in its entirety before performing that step. 4.4 . Appropriate safety precautions shall be observed when working on energized equipment. 4.5 Because the process fluid is potentially contaminated, exercise care,-and adhere to all HP instructions, when connecting and
.U.i.uuu.ut*ng test equipment, operating valves, and pressurizing and venting the transmitter.
4.6 Safety precautions, unique to individual instruments, if any, will be described in the " REMARKS" section of the equipment specification sheet. ( . 4.7 Test tubing and fit' tings used for this test will be able to l withstand at least 50 PSIG. l l 5.0 Prerequisites 3.1 A radiation work permit has been obtained in accordance with
. Reference 2.1.1 (if not required, enter N/A).
5.2 Insure that the requirements of steps 4.3.1, through 4.3.9 of Reference 2.1.5, where applicable, are satisfied. 5.3 Inform the Nuclear Supervising Operator (NS0) that only the
. Condensate Storage Tank Level indication at panel H21-P623 will be affected during this test.
l . DRAF1
~i e 44.110.20 Rev. 0 Page 3
'~ '
5.4 The Nuclear Shift Supervisor (NSS) has given permission to perform this surveillance in accordance with Reference 2.1.2.
- 5.5 Establish consnunications between instrument rack H21-P492, Condensate Storage Tank-instrument cabinet, (El, 585'-0", YARD),
and ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM panel H21-P623 (El, 613'-6",
~
V-2-K16 ) .
~ '
6.0 Procedure
' 6.1 ' Locate Condensate' Storage Level Transmitter C36-N404 and remove from service in accordance with Reference 2.1.4.
6.2 Connect pressore source and test gauge to sensing line connection
~
of transmitter'.
~
6.3 Vary the input to the transmitter to obtain the values specified on Table 1 of Attachment 1, and record the As Found readings as indicated by level indicator',' C36-R405 at H21-P623. 6.4~ Perform steps 6.4.1 or 6.4.2 as required. Enter N/A for step not 4 being performed. 6.4.1 Compare the As Found readings in Table 1 to the As Found tolerances. If all As Found readings are within As Found tolerances, proceed to step 6.5. 6.4.2 If any of the As Found readings in Table 1 exceed the
- As Found tolerances, recalibrate the individual channel instrumenta in accordance with its respective Equipment History Folder. Following recalibration, repeat step
- e..s and record the As Left readings on Table 1 of Attachment 1, ensuring that the As Left data is within As Left tolerances.
6.5 Disconnect pressure source and test gauge, and restore sensing , line integrity. 6.6 Return C36*N404 to service in accordance with Reference 2.1.4. 7.0 Acceptance Criteria 7.1 The Calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUIDOWN SYSTEM CONDENSATE STORAGE TANK LEVEL channel instrumentation is acceptable if the data recorded in Table 1, of Attachment 1, is within the limits required. k
44.110.20 Attachment 1 Page 3 of I _ CALIBRATION DATA SHEET FOR ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM CONDENSATE STORAGE TANK LEVEL a .r. Instruments C36-N404.and C36-R405
., . CALIBRATION OF C36-N404/R405 INPUT TO OUTPUT
. INPUT 0 TO 14.2 PSIG SPAN = 14.20 PSIC OUTPUT 2 TO 35 FEET SPAN = 33.00 FEET
~ ~ LOOP ACCURACY = .75 %
AS FOUND/LEFT ACCURACY = 1.125 1 FOR A READING +/- 0.38 FEET I RQRD DESIRED l AS FOUND AS FOUND I AS LEFT AS LEFT 1 INPUT OUTPUT - TOL + READINGS - TOL + READING PSIG FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET FEET 0 0.00 ll 2.00 I 1.63 2.37 1.63 2.37 25 3.55 10.25 9.88 10.62 9.88 10.62 50 7.10 18.50 18.13 18.87 18.13 18.87 75 10.65 26.75 26.38 27.12 26.38 27.12 100 14.20 35.00 34.63 35.37 34.63 35.37 75 10.65 26.75 26.38 27.12 26.38 27.12 50 7.10 18.50 18.13 18.87 18.13 18.87 251 3.55 10.35 9.88 10.62 9.88 10.62 l 01 0.00 ' ' 2.00 1.63 2.37 1.63 2.37H yt. f.s s u n ae 102485
P e '
.-- 44.110.20 Attachment 2 s Page 1 of 2 CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST Step Number Initials Data
. 3.3 Pressure Cauge Test Equip. No.
Calib. Due Date 5.1 RWP obtained , 5.2 . -Requirements satisfied 5.3 NSO informed 5.4 NSS permission 5.5 Communications established 6.0 Procedure 6.1 Transmitter out of service 6.2 Test equipment connected 6.3 Data recorded 6.4 Compare data - 6.4.1 'As Found data within tolerance 6.4.2 As Found data outside tolerance As Left data within tolerance 6.) Test equipment disconnected 6.6 Returned to service 7.0 Acceptance Criteria
$7.1 D.i. assuad=J in Table 1 of Attachment 1 is within the limits required, and comparison of readings satisfactory. /
Initial Date
$ Denotes minimum requirements for Tech Spec acceptability 102485 OsAF)
, 44.110.20
' Attachment 2 Page 2 of 2
~
CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST
, Step Number Initials Data NOTE: The Calibration Data Sheet, Calibration Test
' Checklist, and' Independent Verification Sheet,
. constitute the necessary documentation to ensure satisfactory completion of this calibration, and should be maintained together.
REMARKS: Time Completed Date Completed Printed Names ' Initials Signatures (of test personnel) NOTE: Following completion of this test, ensure the requirements of steps '4.4.9 through 4.4.18 of Reference 2.1.5, and step 3.3 of Reference 2.1.3, where applicable are satisfied. Notify thd NSS this test is complete. DRAF1
44.110.20
/ Attachment 3 Page 1 of 1 INDEPENDENT VERIFICATION CHECKLIST Initials
. Verify at E21-P492:
- Icolation Valve for LXE-C36-N404
-is OPEN and there are NO leaks
. / /
Printed Name of: Signature of: Date Time Individual performing independent verification
.~
102485 END d $ g g g< .
. _ _ _ _ _ . . . }
. .. This copy for temporary usue on'y per AP 12.000.07
=
/
, SR
. Safety Classification This copy for temporary issud
,, only par AP 12.000.07.
FERMI 2 PROCEDURE - I&C SURVEILLANCE I TITLE: - ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM ST NDBY TEEDWATER FLOW i L
. ' , CHANNEL CALIBRATION: C36-N400. C36-K400, AND C36-R400
- PROCEDURE NUMBER: . 44.110.21 REVISION- O E f* - $
s O $ r Name of preparer: D. K. Jones
~
e e db: bf/k2 Date: /O*2125 V, /( Reviewed / concurred by: h Supv - Operational A urance Dat4:lt N h Approved by: Mi k PL Date: U. ! Responsible Section Head or OSRO Member / Alt { Furth:r .*.;;.r c.r.1 :'.::inired for Safety-Related or Superintendent-Designated ! Procedures: Recommended by: [/[ /u .a Date: /O-29-h - I OSRO Chaltman/AIternate
- Approvari hv- %h Superi'nte nde nt - Nuclear Production Da te
- /C, y ~
)
j The following approved Procedure Change Requests are incorporated in this ! revision: This revision l l does l l does not constitute periodic review. ilRAFT ? l I c_--w"N-, *-o--er.,i wT A --e? N wt...,-4,.$.. , , - ,w,- ,,,m.wv_ _ -__ _ -_
. s >
+ - . t
-, 44'.110.21 f - . Rev. O TABLE OF CONTEhTS
- 5 i t
.1.0 P ur p o se . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 .
, ., . 2. 0 . Re f e r e nc e s . . . . . . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 i
t
.3.O Required Equipsent........................... 2 s
4.0c Preca utions and Limita tions. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5.0 Pre r eq ui s i t e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 6.0 Procedure.................................... 3 t 7.0 Acc eptance Cri te ria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ; 1 i Enclosures l 1 5 Ins t rume nt Valve Dia gram (102585) . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure 1 ! k Attachments t
}
Calibration Data Sheet (102585).............. Attachment 1 Calibration Test Checklist (102585).......... ' Attachment 2 Independent Verification Checklist (102585).. At tachment 3 l I h f l l l J LBP/100/R484/5.0 undel 102685 I I p. A _,- , am_ , :__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
^
{ 44.110.21 f Rev. 0 Page 1 1.0 Purpose 1.1 When performed in its entirety this test will satisfy the once per 18 month CHANNEL CALIBRATION requirements of. the Fermi 2 Technical Specification Section 4.3.10.1, Table 4.3.10, by verifying the calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM STANDBY
. FEEDWATER FLOW instruments C36-N400, C36-K400, and C36-R400. l 2.0. References 2.1 Use References l
2.1.1 - Plant Operations Manual (POM) Procedure 12.000.13, { Rad'.M*.on Work Permit. 2.1.2 POM Procedure 12.000.18, Surveillance Program. I 2.1.3 POM Procedure 12.000.43, Verification of Correct I Operating Activities. 2.1.4 POM Procedure 41.000.09, Process Instrumentation Removal From and Return to Service. 2.1.5 POM Procedure 41.000.11, Calibration of Process Inst rume nta tion. ( 2.2 Source References 2.2.1 Permi 2 Technical Specification 3/4.3.10 APPENDIX R Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls. 2.2.2 POM Procedure 12.000.15. PN-21 (Work Order Processing). 2.2.3 POM Procedure 41.000.03, Instrumentation Calibration Records. i i- 2.2.4 POM Procedure 46.000.04, Indicators and Recorders. ! 2.2.5 Equipment Hi, story Folders for C36-M00, C36-K400, and
- C36-R402.
2.2.6 MI-IC-0207 Rcsemount Alphaline Flow Transmitter Model 1151DP Without Integral Square Root Extraction. j 2.2.7 Edison Drawings: 61721-2785-2 REV.* 1AOP DIAGRAM-DEDICATED , SHUTDOWN C0h'1'ROL PANEL , H21-P623 INST. l .i .
!
- Drawing generated by EDP-1697 Item No.19.00 Rev. O DRAFl
. ..L ...
. . 44.'110.21
/' Rev. 0
(
- Page 2 e
3.uf Required Equipment 3.1. . Sound Powered Phones required for each person -for Section 5.5. 3.2 A pressure source capable of *aupplying 0 to 800" w.c. (utility equipment). -
# 3.3 A pressure gauge capable of measuring 0 to 800" w.c. with an securacy of +/- 1.9?'w.c. or better (Ashcroit 7980 or , - equivale nt ).
3.4 Assorted. tubing and fittings-for test met up. 4.0 Precautions and Limitations 4.1. If any discrepancy is encountered, or lf any steps cannot be l satisfactorily completed or if any instrument test data exceeds the Required Limits. immediately notify the Nuclear Shif t Supervisor ao that he can initiate any necessary corrective ac tions.
.. 4.2 ' If a change in testing personnel takes place during the course of -
this test, the prerequisites should be reverified. 4.3 Always read a step in its entirety before performing that step. 4.4 . Appropriate safety precautions shall be observed when working on energized equipment.
. -4.5 Because the process fluid is.potentially contaminated, exercise c re, and adhere to.all HP instructions, when connecting and disconnecting test equipment, operating valves,~ and pressurizing and venting the transmitter.
- 4.6 Saf ety precautions, unique to individual instruments, if anf, will be described in the " REMARKS" section of the equipment apecification sheet.
4.7 Tubing and fittings used for this test will be capable of withstanding at least 50 PSIC. i
. . 5.0 Prerequisites 3.1 A radiation work permit has been obtained in accordance with .
. Ref erence 2.1.1 (if. not required, enter N/A).
5.2 Insure that the requirements of Steps 4.3.1 through 4.3.9 of Reference 2.1.5, where applicable, are satisfied. 5.3 Inform the Nuclear Supervising Operator (NS0) that only the STANDBY FEEDWATER FLOW indication at panel R21-P623 will be affected during this test. DRAFT
44.110.21
/ Rev. O 4 Page 3 5.4 The Nuclear Shif t Supervisor (NSS) has given permission to
.perf orm this aurveillance in accordance with Reference 2.1.2.
5.5 Establish communications between C36-N400 (E1. 564'-0",
;- V-8-V14), and ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM panel H21-P623 (El.
613'-6", V-2-K16). 6.0 Procedure NDTE: . Ref er to Enclosure 1 for the following. 6.1 Locate Standby Feedvater Flow Transmitter'C36-N400 and remove f rom service in accordance with Reference 2.1.4. 6.2 Connect pressure source and test gauge to fitting at valve V-7. 6.3 Vary the input to the transadtter to obtain the readings on FLOR INDICATOR C36-R400, at B21-P623, apecified on Table 1 of Attachment 1, and record the As Found readings. 6.4 Perf orm Steps 6.4.1 or 6.4.2 as required. Enter N/A for step not being performed. 6.4.1 Compare the As Found readings in Table 1 to the As Found tolerances. If all As Found readings are within As Found tolerances, proceed to Step 6.5. 6.4.2 If any of the As Found readings in Table 1 exceed the
. As Found tolerances, recalibrate the individual channel instruments in accordance with its respective Equipment History Folder. Following recalibration, repeat Step 6.3 and record the As Lef t readings on Table 1 of Attachment 1, ensuring that the As Lef t data is within As Lef t tolerances. ,
6.5 Close calibration Valve V-7 and disconnect pressure source and test cauge. 6.6 Return C36-N400 to service in accordance with Reference 2.1.4. 7.0 Acceptance Criteria 7.1 The calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM STANDBY FEEDWATER FLOW channel instrumentation is acceptable if the data recorded in Table 1, of Attachment 1, is within the limits required.
\ l i
HAFT
-_4
~
, 44.110.51
< Enclosure 1 e Page 1 of 1 INSTRUMEhT VALVE DIAGRAM
__FOR C36-N400
' HI < y 1.b 4 ) .
[V2 C36 N400 l V3} V$ V4} ]V5 V7 V4] O O VENT fAL 102585 DRAFT
44.110.'21
/ Attachment 1
, , Page 1 of 1 CALIBRATION DATA SHEET FOR
._ ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM STANDBY FEEDWATER FLOW
_ , , INSTRUAENTATION C36-N400, C36-K400 and C36-R400 CALIBRATION OF C36-N400/K400/R400 OUTPUT TO INPUT INPUT 0 TO 742.3 IN. WC SPAN = 742.30 IN. WC OUTPUT 0 TO 1750 GPM SPAN = 1750.0GPM LOOP ACCURACY = 2.51 AS FOUND/LEFT ACCURACY = 3.75% FOR A READING +/- 27.8 IN. WC RQRD DESIRED l AS FOUND AS FOUND AS LEFT AS LEFT
% OUTPUT INPUT -
TOL + READING - TOL + READING GPM IN. WC IN. WC IN. WC IN. WC IN. WC l IN. WC IN. WC 17 300.0 21.81 -5.97 49.60 -5.97 49.6U 34 600.0 87.26 59.47 115.04 59.47 115.04 31 900.0 196.33 168.54 224.12 168.54 224.12 69 120u.0 349.03 321.25 376.82 321.25 376.82 86 1500.0 545.36 517.58 573.15 517.58 573.15 100 1750.0 742.30 714.51 770.09 714.51 770.09 86 1500.0 545.36 517.58 573.15 517.58 573.15 69 1200.0 349.03 321.25 -376.82 321.25 376.82 51 9 .O. 0 100.23 158.54 224.12 168.54 224.12 34 600.0 87.26 59.47 115.04 59.47 115.04 17 , 300.0, 21.81 -5. 9 7 l 49.60. -5.97 49.60 202585
,;, 2, 1.4 .
, 44.110.21
/ -
Attachment 2 Page 1 of 2 CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST -
. Step Number
- Initials Data 3.3 Pressure Gauge Test Equip. No.
. Cal. Due Date 5.1 -
RWP Obtained - 5.2 Requirements satisfied ~^ 5.3 NSO informed ' 5.4 NSS permission 5.5 . Communications established , 6.0 Procedure 6.1 Transmitter out of service 6.2 Test equipment connected 6.3 Data recorded 6.4 Compare data 6.4.1 As Found data within tolerance , 6.4.2 As Found data outside tolerance As Lef t data within tolerance 6.5 Test equipment disconnected 6.6 Returned to service 7.0 Acceptance Criteria
$7.1 Data recorded in Table 1 of Attachment 1 is within the limits required.. /
Initial /Date
$ Denotes minimum requirements for Tech Spec acceptability NOTE: The Calibration Data Sheet, Calibration Test Checklist, and Independent Verification Checklist, constitute the necessary documentation to ensure satisf actory completion of this calibration, and should be maintained together, REMARKS DRAFT
e 44.110.21
' Attcchment 2 Page 2 of 2 CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST Step Number Initials Data Time completed _
Date completed - '
-., Printed Ahmes .
. . Initials Signatures (of Test Personnel)
NOTE: Following completion of this test, ensure the require-ments of Steps 4.4.9 through 4.4.18 of Reference 2.1.5, and Step 3.3 of Reference 2.1.3, where applicable, are satisfied. 1 Notify the NSS that this test is complete. 102585 - 0 &,, ,A,a F r- -
[ , 44.110.21
/- Attachment 3 Page 1 of 1
, INDEPENDENI VERIFICATION CHECKLIST INITIALS At Transmitter: FIE -C36-N400 verify:
> '.12 _ Instrumeat Drain Valves V-6 and -V-7 are CLOSED 2._ Instrument. Isolation Valves V-4 and V-5.are OPEN_
. 3. Instrument' Equalizing Valve V-1 is CLOSED
- 4. Rack Isolation valves V-2 and V-3 are OPEN *
/ /
Printed Name of: Signature 01: Date Time Individual performing independent verification 102385 END w I
)J; b'E sn i - l
- l
,' SR Orate W S:taty C1secificatica -n ;. Er AF 12.00107 This copy for temporary issue only, per AP, 12.000.07, FERMI 2 PROCEDURE - 1&C SURVEILLANCE
. TITLE: ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM REACTOR WATER LEVEL CHANNEL CALIBRATION: C36-N402, and C36-R402.
PROCEDURE NUMBER: 44.110.22 j g ,. ,
,3 g REVISION: 0 2 b )
Name of preparer: D. K. Jones Technically - reviewed by: ,, M Date: /O EP PT Q [ If Reviewed / concurred by: , A k SupV - Opera"tfonal Assdf ce Date: (O\d7 Approved by: !lIN ha Date: '/ ' ' Responsible Section Head or OSRO &mber/ Alt
- Further Approval Required for Safety-Related or Superintendent-Designated Procedures:
Recommended by: M f ,f- Date: /c 3y OSRO' Ch' air' man /Afternate Approved by: 19/P[ Ilate: / Superintendent - Nuclear Production The following approved Procedure Change Requests are incorporated in this revision: This revision l- l does l l does not constitute periodic review. b f DRAF1
. 24.110.22 Rev. O ?
TABLE OF CONTENTS Page
. 1. '0 - . P ur p o s e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ 1 2.0 Re f e r e nc e s . . . . . ............................1
. . 3.0 Re q ui re d Eq uipme n t. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4.0 Precautions and Limitations.................. 2 5.0 Prerequisites................................ 2 6.0 P r oc e d ur e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
- 7. 0 Ac c e p ta nc e C ri t e ri a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '. . . . . . . . . 3 Enclosures
.In s t ru me n t Valve Dia gram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure 1 Attachments Calibration Data Sheet....................... At tachment 1 Calibration Test Checklist................... Attachment 2
. Indepe ndent Verit ica tion Checklist. . . . . . .. . . . Attachment 3 LEP/100/R464/4.0 i ,
202465 gn FN
44.110.22 R2v. 0
/ Page 1 of 3 1.0 Purpose .
-1.1 When performed in its entirety this test will satisfy the once per 18 month CHANNEL CALIBRATION requirements of the Fermi 2 Technical Specification section 4.3.10.1, Table 4.3.10, by
. verifying the calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM REACTOR WATER 1.EVEL instruments C36-N402 and C36-R402.
. ,_ 2. 'O References
. '2.1 .Use References 2.1.1 Plant Operations Manual (POM Procedure 12.000.13, Radiation Work Peruit.
2.1.2 POM Procedure.32.000.16, Surveillance Program. 2.1.3 POM Procedure 12.000.43, Verification of Correct Operating Activities. 2.1.4 POM Procedure 41.000.09, Process Instrumentation Removal From and Return to Service.
. 2.1.5 POM Procedure 41.000.11, Calibration of Process Instrumentation.
2.2 Source References Fermi 2 Technical Specification 3/4.3.10 APPENDIX R
.2.2.1 Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls.
~2.2.2 POM Procedure 12.000.15, PN21 (Work Order Processing).
2.2.3 POM Procedure 41.000.03, Instrumentation Calibration Records. 2.2.4 POM Procedure 46.000.04, Indicators and Recorders. 2.2.5 Equipment History Folders for C36-N402 and C36-R402.
-.2.2.6 HI-IC-0207 Rosemount Alphaline Flow Transmitter Model 1151DP without Integral Square Root Extraction.
2.2.7 Edison ~ Drawings: 61721-2785-2 Rev.* LOOP DIAGRAM-DEDICATED SHUIDOWN C0hTROL PANEL H21-P623 INST.
- Drawing generated by EUP-1697 Item No.19.00 REV. 0
44.110.22
,- R;v. 0 Page 2 of 3
. 3.0 Required Equipment.
. 3.1. Sound Powered Phones required for each person for section 5.5.
^ _ 3.2 ' A' pressure source capable of supplying 0 to 220"w.c. (utility equipment ).
. e 3.3 A pressure gauge capable of measuring 0 to 220"w.c. with an
. accuracy of +/- 1.0"w.c. or better (Wallace and Tiernan 0 to 260"w.c. or equivilant ).
- 3.4 _ Assorted. tubing and . fittings for test set up.
4.0 Precautions and Limitations 4.1 /If any discrepancy is encountered, or if any steps cannot be satisf actorily completed or if any instrument test data exceeds the Required Limits, immediately notify the Nuclear Shift Supervisor so that he can initiate any necessary corrective actions. 4.2 If a change in testing personnel takes place during the course of this test, the prerequisites should be reverified.
. 4.3 Always read a step in its entirety before performing that step.
4.4 Appropriate safety precautions shall be observed when working on energized equipment. 4.5 Because the process fluid is potentially contaminated, exercise care, and adhere to all HP instructions, when connecting and disconnecting test equipment, operating valves, and pressurizing ano veuting the transmitter. 4.6 - Safety precautions, unique to individual instruments, if any, will be described in the " REMARKS" section of the equipment specification sheet. 4.7 Tc.: toti and fittings used for this test will be able to l withstand at least 50 PSIG. ! l 5.0 Prerequisites 5.1 A radiation work permit has been obtained in accordance with Reference 2.1.1 (if not required, enter N/A). 5.2 Insure that the requirements of steps 4.3.1. through 4.3.9 of Reference 2.1.5, where applicable, are satisfied. 5.3 Inform the Nuclear Supervising Operator (NS0) that only the Reactor Water Level indication at panel H21-P623 vill be affected during this test, u
, , ~ ,. .
= n
..:. __mm. -. _....-m .
44.110.22
, R:v. O e
. Page 3 of 3 5.4 The Nuclear Shift Supervisor (NSS) has given permission to
. psrform this surveillance in accordance with reference 2.1.2.
5.5 Establish communications between instrument rack H21-P004, (El,
. 613' -6", T-2-E13), and ALTERNATIVE SHUIDOWN SYSTEM panel H21-P623 (E. 613' -6", V-2-K16).
6.0 Procedure
~
( CAUIl0N:. SHARED SENSING I,1NES ]
- 1
. 6.1 Locate Reactor Level Transmitter C36-N402 and remove from service I
.in accordance with Reference 2.1.4.
6.2 Connect pressure source and test gauge to calibration valve V-3. 6.3 Vary the input to the transmitter to the values specified on ) Table 1 of Attachment 1, and record the AS Found level readings l 'as indicated by level indicator, C36-R402 at H21-P623. 6.4 Perform steps 6.4.1. or 6.4.2 as required. Enter N/A for step not l being performed. l l - 6.4.1 ' Compare the AS Found readings in Table I to the AS Found tolerances. If all AS Found readings are within ! } AS Found tolerances, proceed to step 6.5. 6.4.2 . Tf any of the AS Found readings in Table 1 exceed the AS Found tolerances, recalibrate the individual channel instruments in accordance with its respective Equipment History Folder. Following recalibration, repeat step I 6.3 and record the AS'Lef t readings on Table 1 of Attachment 1, ensuring that the AS Lef t data is within As Lef t tolerances. I 6.5 Close calibration valve V-3 and-disconnect pressure source and test gauge.
! CAUIl0N: SHARED SENSINO LINES ]
6.6 Return C36-N402 to service in accordance with Reference 2.1.4. 4 [. 7.0 Acceptance-Criteria l 7.1 The calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM REACTOR WATER LEVEL channel instrumentation is acceptable if the data recorded in Table 1, of Attachment 1, is within the limits required.
.. .a,
. 44.110.22 Enclosure 1
[ Page 1 of 1
. INSTRUMEhT VALVE DIAGRAM FOR C36-N402 VA R. e-A RE F. I
~
YS V9 V1 V3 LXE c36 1M02 H L Y\ X t
~
. L -
J~ \ o o j ng uome AE1 - m.,
* **--*-E - e , _ . , ,
6 .
. 44.110.22 Att:chment 1 p Page 1 of 1 CALIBRATION DATA !.HEET FOR ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM REACTOR WATER LEVEL instruments C36-N402 and C36-R402. CALIBRATION OF C36-N402/R402 INPUT TO OUTPUT INPUT 217.76 TO 68.36 IN.WC SPAN =%-149.4 OUTPUT 10 TO 220 IN.WC SPAN =210.00lN.WC LOOP ACCURACY = 1.16% AS FOUND/LEFT ACCURACY = 1.74% FOR A READING +/- 3.661N.WC RQRD DESIRED AS FOUND AS FOUND AS LEFT AS LEFT _% INPUT OUTPUT - TOL + READING - TOL + READING IN.WC IN.WC IN.WC IN.WC IN.WC IN.WC IN.WC C 217.76 10.00 6.35 13.56 6.35 13.65 25 180.41 62.50 58.85 66.15 58.85 66.15 50 143.06 115.00 111.35 118.65 111.35 118.65 75 105.71 167.50 163.85 171.15 163.85 171.15 1 00 68.36 220.00 216.35 223.65 216.35 223.65 75 105.71 167.50 163.85 171.15 163.85 171.15 50 143.06 115.00 111.35 118.65 111.35 118.65 25 180.41 62.50 58.85 66.15 58.85 66.15 0 217.76 10.00 6.35 13.65 6.35 ! 13.65 102485 D d kg O A.,r yC T-
44.110.22 Attach:ent 2 Page 1 of 2 CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST Step Number Initials Data
. 3.3 ' Pressure Cauge . Test Equip. No. -
Calib. Due Date 5.1 RWP Obtained ~ 5.2 Requirements satisfied 5.3 550 informed 5.4. NSS permission ~~ ~ 5.5 Communications. established ' 6.0 Procedure 6.1 Transmitter out of service 6.2 Test equipment connected 6.3 Data recorded ' . 6.4 Compare data 6.4.1 As Found data 6dthin tolerance
- 6.4.2 As Found data '
outside tolerance As Lef t data within tolerance 6.5 Test equipment disconnected 6.6 Returned to service _ 7.0 Acceptance Critera j7.1 Data recorded in Table 1 or Attachment 1 is within the limits required. / init ial/ date i
/ Denotes minimum requirements for Tech Spec acceptability EGIC. Tine calibration Data Sheet, Calibration Test Checklist, and
. Independent Verification Checklist, constitute the necessary documentation to ensure satisfactory completion of this calibration, and should be maintained together.
REMARKS: Time completed Date completed
44.110.22 Attschmant 2
-,' , Paga 2 of 2 CAI.IBRATION TEST CHECKLIST Printed k mes Initials Signatures (of test personnel)
. NOTE: - ,- Following completion of this test, ensure the requirements of steps 4.4.9 through 4.4.18 of Reference 2.1.3, and step 3.3 of Reference 2.1.3, where applicable, are -satisfied.
Notify the NSS'that this test is complete. 6 i D e
~ u A F T..
5i 102485 y,, w * + ,-+rymw r ow w e g, w ewepwc,* - - - - - e-e --
+- . 49 34- . ,-.,wgw.gwp~ ---
44.110.22
- Attschtsnt 3
, Pagu 1 cf I e
INDEPENDEhT VERIFICATION CHECKLIST
~
INITIALS
'At LIE C36-JE02 verify:
.- . 1. Calibration Valves V-2 and V-3 are. CLOSED ,
' ~
.c 1. . Equalizing Valve V-1 is CLOSED ,
- 3. Drain Valves V-6 and V-7 are 'CL'OSED _.
- 4. Instrument Isolation Valves V-4 and V-5 are OPEN
- 5. Rack Isolation Valves V-8 and V-9 are Open
/ /
Printed Name of; Signature of; Date Time Individual performing independent verification 1 i 102485 END i l DRAF1 . l j f
. Ins ccp, lor wmparug issue o::ty per AP 12.000.G7 e SR Safety cle*sification e-Jhis ' copy for temporary isstid
~
. nig por AP 12.00.0.07 o
., FERMI 2 PROCEDURE - I & C SURVEI1 LANCE
' TITLE: _
ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM REACTOR PRESSURE CHANNEL CALIB RATION: - C36-N401, C36-K401, and C36-R401. PROCEDURE NUMBER: 44.110.23 REVISION: 0 [ 4 kEIiSOIIllras{c o n 0' n(y Name of preparer: D. K. Jones Technically reviewed by: . Jh6s2.o Date:/# 2I.pf-u Reviewed / concurred by: k Supv'- Operational Assuran e Date: lC h Approved by: J 1[M J '. Date: N'I5 Responsible Section Head or OSRO Member / Alt Turther Approval Required for Safety-Related or Superintendent-Designated Prece d'.~e?: Recommended by: 8 - OSRO Chairma'n/ Alternate Date: /O -2>/ t)- Approved by: Date:4!2 P Superintendent - Nuclear Production 4 The following approved Procedure Change Requests are incorporated in this revision: This revision l l does l l does not constitute periodic review. t
44.110.23 Eev. 0 f
, TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1.0. Purpose...................................... I 2.0 References.......'............................ 1 3.0. Required Equipment. ......................... 2 4.0 . Preca ut ions a nd liniz a tion s. .. ... .. ... . .. . . . . 2 5.0 Prerequisites................................ 2 6.0 . Procedure.................................... 3 7.0 Acceptance Criteria.......................... 4 Attachments Calibration Data Sheet (102585).............. Attachment 1 Calibration Test Checklist (102585).......... Attachment 2 Independent Verification Checklist
~
(102585)........................... Attachment 3 a DRAP ,
. LEP/100/R482/3.0 '
102685 1 1 r . - -
+ 44.110.23
/ Riv. O Page I
- l 1.0 Purpose 1.1 When performed in its entirety this test will satisfy the once l
_- per 18 month CHANNEL CALIBRATION requirements of the Fermi 2 l
- Technical. Specification section 4.3.10.1 Table 4.3.10, by verifying the calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM REACTOR PRESSURE channel instruments C36-N401, C36-K401, and C36-R401.
2.0 References 2.1 Use References 2.1.1 Plant Operations Manual (POM) Procedure 12.000.13, Radiation Work Permit. 2.1.2 POM Procedure 12.000.18, Surveillance Program. 2.1.3 POM Procedure 12.000.43; verification of Correct Operating Activities. 2.1.4 POM Procedure 41.000.09,' Process Instrumentation
. Removal From and Return to Service. .
2.1.5 POM Procedure 41.000.11, Calibration of Process Instrumentation. 2.2 Source References 2.2.1 Fermi 2 Technical Specification 3/4.3.10 APPENDIX R Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls. 2.2.2 POM Procedure 12.000.15, PN21 (Work Order Processing). 2.2.3 POM Procedure 41.000.03, Instrumentation Calibration Records. 2.2.4 POM Procedure 46.000.04, Indicators and Recorders. 2.2.5- Equipment History Folders for C36-N401, C3'6-K401, and C36-R401. 2.2.6 MI-IC-0201 Rosemount Alphsline Pressure Transmitter Model 1151 AP, Model 1151GP, and Model 1153.
. -2.2.7 Edison Drawings:
61721-2785-2 REV.* LOOP DIAGRAM-DEDICATED SHUTDOWN CONTROL PANEL H21-P623 INST.
- Drawing generated by EDP-1697 Item No. 19.00 Rev. O
~
BRAFT w-mw -- -- --
*- e- rmv , e m - + ,, ,, .c- ,,., e ..- n- - ,-- ----- ---y
44.110.23
/ R2v. 0-Page 2 3.0 Required Equipment 3.1 Sound Powered Phones required for each person for section 5.5.
3.2 A pressore source capable of supplying 0 to 1500 PSIG (utility
. . equipment)-.
.. 3.3 A pressure gauge ca'pable of measuring 0 'to 1500 PSIG with an
, . accuracy of +/- 3.75 PSIG or better (Heise CMM or equivalent).
; . 3.4 Assorted tubing and . fittings for test set up.
,4.0 Precautions and Limitations 4.1 -If any discrepancy is encountered, or if any steps cannot be satisfactorily completed or if any instrument test data exceeds the Required Limits, immediately notify the Nuclear Shift Supervisor so that he can initiate any necessary corrective actions.
4.2 If a change in testing personnel takes place during the course of this test, the prerequisites abould be reverified. 4.3 Always read a step in its entirety before performing that step. 4.4 Appropriate safety precautions shall be observed when working on energized equipment. -
'4. 5 Because the process fluid is potentially contaminated, exercise care, and adhere to all HP instructions, when connecting and discannarring test equipment, operating valves, and pressurizing and venting the transmitter.
4.6 Safety precautions, unique to individual instruments, if any, will be described in the " REMARKS" section of the equipment specification sheet. 4.7 Test tubing and fittings used for this test must have a burst strength greater than 2000 PSIG. 5.0 Prerequisites , 5.1 A radiation work permit has been obtained in accordance with Reference 2.1.1 (if not required, enter N/A). 5.2 Insure that the requirements of steps 4.3.1 through 4.3.9 of Reference 2.1.5, where applicable, are satisfied. - DRAfl ! s .
,no-- -, .-- - , ~ , ~ - , - - . . . . . , , - , , - - - . , . - . . , , - . - - - - - -
44.110.23
/ Rsv. O Page 3 e
5.3 Inform the Nuclear Supervising Operator (NS0) that only the Reactor Pressure indication at panel H21-P623 will be affected during this test. 3 5.4 The Nuclear. Shift Supervisor has givent permission to perform this
. surveillance in accordance with Reference 2.1.2.
4_ 5.5. Establish communications between instrument rack H21-P004,
~
(E1. 613'-6", T-2-E13), and ALTERNATIVE SHUIDOWN SYSTDi panel
, . r. B21-P623 (El. 613 '-6", V-2-K16).
_ 6.0 Procedure
'l !
l CAUTION l l 1
-l SHARED SENSING LINE l l 1 6.1 Locate Reactor Pressure Transmitter C36-N401 and remove from service in accordance with Reference 2.1.4.
6.2 Connect. pressure source and test gauge to fitting at calibration valve. 4 6.3 Vary the input to-the transmitter to the values specified on
.- Table 1 of Attachment 1, and record the As Found readings as indicated by pressure indicator, C36-1401 at 221-P623.
6.4 , Perform steps 6.4.1 or. 6.4.2 as required. Enter N/A for step not being performed.
. 6.4.1 - Compare the As Found readings in Table I to the As Found tolerances. If all As Found readings are within As Found tolerances, proceed to step 6.5.
6.4.2 If any of the As Found readings in Table 1 exceed the
. As Found tolerances, recalibrate the individual channel instruments in accordance with its respective Equipment History Folder. Following rec'alibration, repeat step 6.3 and record the As Left readings on Table 1 of Attachment.1, ensuring that the As Left data is within As Left tolerances.
6.5 Close calibration valve and disconnect pressure source and test gauge. 5 8.l u= e - ~ e 9 o s- n .- mF - g- --werr ,q , , , . , , - - - y ,-, - - -- ----------w-- w--
e 44.110.23
' R v. 0 Page 4 g
l CAUTION I l I l SHARED SENSING LINES .I l I
.6.6 ;. Return C36-N401. to service in accordance, with_ Reference 2.1.4.
740 Acceptance Criteria 7.1 The calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM REACTOR PRESSURE channel instrumentation is acceptable if the data recorded in
. Table 1, of Attachment-1, is within the limits required.
e 9 f DRAFT
4 44.110.'23
/ AttechmInt l' Page 1 of I CALIBRATION DATA SHEET FOR ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM REACTOR PRESSURE Instruments C36-N401, C36-K401, and C36-R401
. . ; CALIBRATION OF C36-N401/K401/R401 INPUT TO OUTPUT INPUT 0 TO 1500 PSIG SPAN =1500.0PSIG OUTPUT 0 TO 1500 PSIG SPAN =1500.0PSIG LOOP ACCURACY = 1 2 AS FOUND/LEFT ACCURACY = 1.5 %
FOR A READING +/- 22.5PSIG l RQRD l DESIRED l AS FOUND l AS FOUND l AS LEFT l AS LEFT 1 l INPUT l0UTPUT l - TOL + l READING l - TOL + l READING lPSIG lPSIG lPSIG lPSIG l PSIG lPSIG lPSIG l PSIG 0l 0.01 0.0 l -22.5l 22.5l l -22.5 1 22.51
~ 25 l 375.0l 375.0 l 352.5 l 397.5 l l 352.5I 397.5l 50 l 750.0l 750.0 1 727.5l 772.5 l l 727.51 772.5l 75 l 1125.0 l 1125.0 11102.5l1147.5 I I1102.5 l1147.5 l 100l1500.0l1500.0 l1477.5l1522.5l l1477.5l1522.5 1 7511125.0l1125.0 l1102.5 l1147.5 l l 1102.5 l 1147.5 I 50l 750.01 750.0 l 727.5 l 772.5 l l 727.5l 772.5 l 25 l 375.0l 375.0 1 352.51 397.5 l l 352.5l 397.5l Ol 0.01 0.0 1 -22.5l 22.5l l -22.5l 22.5l
44.110.23
/ Attcchnent 2 Page 1 of 2 CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST l
,, Step Number Initials ,
Data
. 3.3 . Pressure Gauge '
Test Equip. No. Calib. Due Date 5.1 RWP obtained ,
~
. 5.2 Requirements satisfied 5.3 NSO informed .
5.4 NSS permission 5.5 Communications established 6.0' Procedure 6.1 " Transmitter out of service 6.2 Test equipment connected 6.3 Data recorded 6.4 . Compare data 6.4.1 As Found data within tolerance 6.4.2 As Found data outside tolerance
..: L:ft dets within tolerance 6.5 Test equipment disconnected 6.6 Returned to service 7.0 Acceptance Criteria
$7.1 Data recorded in Table 1 of Attachment I is within the limits required. /
Initial /Date
$ Denotes minimum requirements for Tech Spec acceptability 102585 DRAFT
44.110.23 e Attcchsant 2 Page 2 of 2 e CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST Step Number Initials _ Data
.' MOTE: . .The calibration : Data Sheet, Calibration Test Checklist, and Independeat verification Sheet, constitute the necessary documentation to ensure satisfactory completion
?- . of this calibration, and should be maintained together.
REMARKS:
, Time comple.ted Date completed Printed Names Initiala Signatures (of. test personnel)
NOTE: Following completion of this test, ensure the requirements of steps 4.4.9 through 4.4.18 of Reference 2.1.5, and step 3.3 of Reference 2.1.3, where applicable, are satisfied. Notify the NSS that this test is complete. 102585 w
- k U tf
44.110.23
/ Attachma,nt 3 Page 1 of I o.
INDEPENDENT VERIFICATION CliECKLIST Initials
- . - At. Transmitter PIE C36-N401, verify: ,
- l. Calibration Valve is CLOSED
- 2. . Isolation valve is OPEN _
~
/ /
Printed Name of; Signature of; Date Time Individual performing independent verification 102585 DRAfl END
A
... 'inis copy for temporary issue
.t- only per AP 12.000.07
, Safety Classification Thh copy for temporary bsue oi; ' ;;:r L;" ;:nno,07, PERMI 2 PROCEDURE - I&C SURVEILLANCE TITLE: ,
- ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM TORUS WATER TEMPERATURE CHANNEL CALIBRATION: C36-N403, C36-K403, AND C36-R404 PROCEDURE NUMBER: 44.110.24 REVISION: 0 SIN @I
.QQ v .f.i g Name of preparer: D. K. Jones Technically M revieved by: V, 44d[/Mt.b Date: /d 2814~
(/ 'c Peviewed/ concurred by: l Date:(Ob! SuKv - Operational A's rance Approved by: kdid f* Date: " - Responsible Seftion Head or OSRO Member / Alt Further Approval Required for Safety-Related or Superintendent-Designated Preceda-e**
-Recommended,by: [ ~
xd Date: /s' 29 -fr$- f OSR0' Chairman / Alternate ! Approved by: Date:N// / C { Superintendent - Nuclear Production The following approved Procedure Change Requests are incorporated in this l revision:
'This revision l j does ] j does not constitute periodic review.
~< .
l
.c 44.110.24 Rev. 0
~
TABLE OF CONTENTS
. $ES 1.0 Purpose...................................... 1 ,
.2.0 Referenes.................................... I
~
, 3.0 Required Equipment........................... 2
. :4.0 Precau ti ons and Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5.0 Prerequisites................................ 2 6.0 Procedure.................................... 3 7.0 Acceptance Criteria.......................... 4 Enclosures Test Equipment Connection Diagram (102585)... Enclosure 1 Attachments
. . Calibration Data Sheet (102585).............. Attachment 1 Calibration Test Checklist (102585).......... Attachment 2 r'
L I r LBP/R485/5.0 L 102685 8
- l-1
, ~---,es . ,- m , e _v.w,. r- r v. e e r ,- - - -= - - - - - - - - -- -
-s s 44.110.24
. Rev. O Page l es 4 1.0 Purpose ,
1.1 When performed in its_ entirety this test will satisfy the once per 18 month CHANNEL. CALIBRATION requirements of the Fermi 2 , Technical Specification section 4.3.10.1, Table 4.3.10, by
. verifying the calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM TORUS WATER.. TEMPERATURE instruments .C36-N403, _ C36-K403, and C36-R404. .
2.0 References 2.1 Use References 2.1.1 - Plant Operations Manual (POM) Procedure 12.000.13, Radiation Work Permit. , 2.1.2 POM Procedure 12.000.18, Surieillance Program. 2.1.3 POM Procedure 12,.000.32, Verification of Correct Operating Activities. 2.1.4 POM'Piocedure 41.000.11, Calibration of Process Ins trumentation . 2.2 Source References 2.2.1 Termi 2 Technical Specification 3/4.3.10 APPENDIX A Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls. 2.2.2 POM Procedure 12.000.15, PN-il- (Work Order Processing). 2.2.3 POM Procedure 41.000.03, Instrumentation Calibration - Records. 2.2.4 . POM Procedure 41.000.09, Process Instrumentation Removal From and Return to Service. 2.2.5 POM Procedure 46.000.04, Indicators and Recorders. 2.2.6 Equipment History Folders for C36-N403, C36-K403, and C36-R404. 2.2.7 Edison Drawings: 61721-2785-2 Rev.
- LOOP DIAGRAM-DEDICATED SHUTDOWN CONTROL PANEL H21-P623 INST.
- Drawing generated by EDP-1697 Item No.19.00 Fev. 0 DRAfl
- . . . - . . - . . - . . ~ . . - - .
44.110.24 Rev. 0 Page 2 v 4 3 . 0, Required Equipment 3.1 A millivolt source capable of simulating a Type "T" thermocouple temperature between 60 and 260 deg. f, (L&N Millivolt Pot 8686 or equivalent). 3.2 -Type "T" thermocouple compensator (Transmation-Thrice Cell 1013 or equivalent). 3.3 Deckde Box to simulate the T/C lead resistance (General Radio 1333T or equivalent). 3.4 Approximately 3 feet of type "T" thermocouple wire, and solid copper wire for test connection. 4.0 Precautions and Limitations
. 4 .1 If any discrepancy is encountered, or if any steps cannot be satisfactorily completed or if any instrument test data exceeds the Required Limits, immediately notify the Nuclear Shift Supervisor so that he can initiate any necessary corrective actions.
4.2 If a change.in testing personnel takes place during the course of this test, the prerequisites should be reverified. 4.3 Always read a step in its entirety before performing that step. 4.4 Appropriate safety precautions shall be observed when working on energiced equipment. 4.5 Safety precautions, unique to individual instruments, if any, will be described in the " REMARKS" section of the equipment specification sheet. 5.0 T.. .wl.h e. 5.1 A radiation work pereit has been obtained in accordance with Reference 2.1.1 (if not required , enter N/A). 5.2 Insure that the requirements of steps'4.3.1, through 4.3.9 of
. Reference 2.1.4, where applicable, are satisfied.
5.3 Inform the Nuclear Supervising Operator (NS0) that only the Torus Water Temperature indication at panel H21-P623 will be affected during this test. 5.4 The Nuclear Shift Supervisor-(NSS) has given permission to perform this surveillance in accordance with Reference 2.1.2. DRAF1
., 44.110.24 Rev. 0 .. Page 3 ,pq 6.0 Procedure 6.1 At ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM panel H21-P623 (El, 613'-6",
V-2-K16), locate TORUS WATER TEMPERATURE T/C Signal Conditioner s
-C36-K403, and disconnect thermocouple leads.
6.2 Refer; to Enclosure 1, and connect test equipment to T/C input terminals of C36-K403. 6.3 Adjust the decade box to the value specified for T/C loop
. resistance in the Equipment History Folder for C36-K403.
6.4 Adjust the output of the millivolt pot, in succession, to the values specified on Table 1 of Attachment I and record As Found temperature reading as indicated by temperature indicator C36-R404. 6.5' Perform steps 6.5.1 or 6.5.2 as required. Enter N/A for step not
. being performed.
6.5.1 Compare the As Found readings in Table 1 to the As Found tolerances. If all As Found readings are within As Found tolerances, proceed to step 6.6. 6.5.2 If any of the As Found readings in Table 1 exceed the As Found tolerances, recalibrate the instruments in accordance with its respective Equipment History Folder. Following recalibration, repeat step 6.4 and record the As Lef t readings on Table 1 of Attachment 1, ensuring that the As Left data is within As Left tolerances. 6.6 Disconnect the millivolt source, thrice cell, and decade box connected in step 6.2. 6.7 Observing correct polarity, reconnect the thermocouple leads disconnected in step 6.1. b 6.5. Record temperature as indicated by T50-R800/ pt 11 (Control Room Operating Panel Hil-P602), in the space provided on Attachment 2. 6.9 Record temperature as indicated by C36-R404 in the space provided on Attachment 2. 6.10 Verify that the readings taken in steps 6.8 and 6.9 are within
+/- 20 deg. f of each other.
DRAF1
44;110.24 ,
< Rev. 0
, Page 4 e* 4 7.0 Acceptance Criteria 7.1 The Calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM TORUS WATER TEMPERATURE channel instrumentation is acceptable if the data
. recorded in Table 1, of Attachment 1, is within the limits required, and comparison of readings indicates correlation between temperature elements.
i I o e DRAFT 3
l 44.110.24 l
/ Enclosure 1 l Page 1 of 1 TEST EQUIPMENT CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR C36-K403/C36-R404 l
l Millivelt Source Isothers.a1 o y Eeference Box Instrument y- S to be O e - - O !' l Calibrated 7C 8 e r~~~~~7 l 4
. . e s- ,
w/ _____s 4..-w Sim.:I s t e d The m couple' Copper Cable , Wire Wire Eesistance W 102585 9 AF1
- emp 5 y- f* pg'-" 2Y m' *
-vgw * *n "
gseq =,4p4-wen--&M vge-v"- 9
- 44.110.24
/ Attachment 1
., Page 1 of 1 CALIBRATION DATA SHEET FOR ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM TORU'S WATER TEMPERATURE Instruments C36-K403 and C36-R404
.,.-CALIBRATION OF C36-K403/R404
~
' INPUT TO OUTPUT INPUT .515 TO 5.461 MVDC SPAN =4.946 MVDC OUTPUT 60 TO 260 deg. f SPAN =200.0 deg. f LOOP ACCURACY = .b %
AS FOUND/LEFT ACCURACY = .9 % FOR A READING +/- 1.8 deg. f RQRD DESIRED i AS FOUND l AS FOUND l AS LEFT , AS LEFT
% INPUT OUTPUT -
TOL + READINGS - TOL + READING NVDC deg. f deg. f H deg. f deg. f deg. f deg. f' deg. f 0 0.515 60.0 58.2 61.8 58.2 1 61.8 l 25 1.752 110.0 108.2 111.8 108.2 111.8 50 2.988 160.0 158.2 ' 161.8 158.2 161.8 75 4.225 210.0 208.2 211.8 208.2 211.8 100 5.461 260.0 258.2 261.8 258.2 261.8 75 4.225 210.0 208.2 211.8 208.2 211.8 ~ 50 2.988 160.0 l 158.2 161.8 158.2 161.8 25 1.752 110.0 l108.2 111.8 108.2 111.8 01 0.515 , 60.0 l 58.2 61.8 58.2 , 61.8 ' l l l 102585 DRAF1 ! l 1
, 44.110.24 Attachment 2 ., Page 1 of 2 CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST Step Number . Initials Data 3.2 Millivolt Pot Test Equip. No.
Calib. Due Date
. 3.3. Thrice Cell -
Test Equip. No. ' Calib. Due Date 3.4 Decade Box Test Equip. No. Calib. Due Date 5.1 RWP Obtained 5.2 Requirements satisfied 5.3 NSO informed 5.4 NSS permission 6.0 Procedure 6.1 T/C disconnected 6.2 Test equipment connected
~
6.3 Decade box adjusted 6.4 Data recorded 6.5 Compare data fAne
- 6. 5.1 As Found data within tolerance ,"~'"
6.5.2 ' As Found data outside tolerance As Left data within tolerance 6.6 Test. equipment disconnected 6.7 Thermocouple reconnected B 6.8 T50-R800f reading deg. f 6.9 C36-R404~ reading deg. f . 6.10 Readings satisfactory
$ Denotes minimum requirements for Tech Spec acceptability 102585 DRAF1
44.110.24 Attachment 2
, Page 2 of 2 CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST Step Number Initials Data 7.0 -Acceptance Criteria f'7.1 . Data recorded in Table 1 of
' Attachment 1 is within the limits required, and comparison of readings satisfactory. /
Initia1 Date NOTE : The Calibration Data Sheet, and Calibration Test Checklist, constitute the necessary documentation to ensure satisfactory completion of this calibration, and should be maintained together. REMARKS: Time Completed Date,, Completed Printed Names Initials Signatures (of test personnel) NOTE: .To11owing completion of this test, ensure the requirements of steps 4.4.9 through 4.4.18 of Reference 2.1.4, where applicable are satisfied. Notify the NSS this test is complete. S h oles minimum requhemeds- for Teck Spec acceptability 102585 END DRAF1
Th cper orig copyAp for temporary issue - 12.000.07
/
V SR Safety Classification Thb copy for temporaq issue caly par AP 12fcio.0%
,, '7ERMI 2 PROCEDURE - I&C SURVEILLANCE
~ TITLE: -
ALTERNATIVE CHANNEL CALIBRATION: SHUTDOWN SYSTEM TORUS WA PROCEDURE NUMBER: 44.110.25 C36-N405 and C36-R406 REVISION: 0 f Elif05Y0F/G0?u lad 4),. fg l ' Name of preparer:_ D. K. Jones Technica11y' reviewed by: .
~
ff W Date: M 2Jer Reviewed / concurred by:_ Sufv - Oper
- i onal A Wu ance Date:]O Approved by: _
f#/th! #
*d Responsible Section Head or OSR0 Member Date: / Alt
~
Further Appretal Procedures: Required for Safety-Relat e d _ or Superintendent-Designated Recommended 'by: _
/[/ ,I OSRO Chairman / Alternate _ Date:_ @ ),7 Approved by: _
w_ Superintendent - Nuclear Production _ Da t e : / ff PS-The following app;oved Procenure Change Req revision: uests are incorporated in this - This revision l l does l l does not constitut e periodic review. L i DRAfl '
. ~,
.- 44.110.25 Rzv. 0 /
TABLE OF CONTENTS
?.
- E*
11 .0 Purpose...................................... 1
.- 2.0 -Referances................................... .1
. . 3.0 . Re qu ired Equ ipme nt . . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . 2 4.0 Precaut ions and Limi t a t ions . . . . .. . ... . . . . . . . . 2 5.0 Prerequisites....'............................ .2 6.0 Procedure.................................... 3 7.0. Acceptance Criteria.......................... 3 Enclosures Ins trument Valve Diagram (102585).. .. .. . . .... Enclosure 1 Attachments Calibration Data Sheet (102585).............. Attachment 1 Calibration Test Checklist (102585).......... Attachment 2 Independent-Verification Checklist (1025')).. Attachment 3 9
^
LBP/100/R485/6.0 102685 .. BRAF1
o .- . 44.110.25 Rsv. 0
/ Page 1 -p i
1 1.0 Purpose i 1.1 When performed in_its entirety-this test will satisfy the_once per 18 month CHANNEL CALIBRATION requirements of the Termi 2
-Technical Specification Section 4.3.10.1, Table 4.3.10, by >
. verifying the calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM TORUS WATER LEVEL instruments C36-N405 and C36-R406.
2.O_ References J2.1 Use References -
- 2.1.1 - Plant Operations Manual (POM) Procedure 12.000.13, Radiation Work Permit.
2.1.2 POM-Procedure 12.000.18, Surveillance Program. 2.1.3 - POM Procedure 12.000.43, Verification of Correct Operating Activities. 2.1.4 POM Procedure 41.000.09, Process Instrumentation Removal From and Return to Service. 2.1.5 POM Procedure 41.000.11, Calibration of Process Instrumentation. 2.2 Source References f 2.2.1 Fermi 2 Technical Specification 3/4.3.10 APPENDIX R ~ Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls. 2.2.2 POM Procedure 12.000.15, PN-21 (Work Order Processing). 2.2.3 POM Procedure 41.000.03, Instrumentation Calibration Records. l 2.2.4 POM Procedure 46.000.04 Indicators and Recorders. I l . 2.2.i Equipment History Folders for C36-N405 and C36-R406. i 2.2.6 MI-IC-0207 Rosemount Alphaline Flow Transmitter Model 1151DP Without Integral Square Root Extraction. 2.2.7 . Edison Drawings: 61721-2785-2 EEV.* Th0F DIAGRAM-DEDICATED l SHUTDOWN CONTROL PANEL H21-P623 INST. L
- Drawing generated by EDP-1697 Item No.19.00 Rev. n ilPAF1
.2
. 44.110.25 l R:v. 0 l Page 2 l b
3.0 Required Equipment 3.1 Sound Powered Phones required for each person for Section 3.5. 3.2 A pressure source capable of supplying 0 to 240" w.c.~(utility equipment).
., 3.3 A pressure gauge capable of measuring 0 to 240" w.c. with an accuracy of +/- 1.0" w.c. or better (Wallace and Tiernan 0 to 280" w.c. or equivalent).
. 3.4 Assorted tubing and fittings for test set up.
4.0 Precautions and Limitations 4.1. If any discrepancy is encountered, or if any steps cannot be satisfactorily completed or if any instrument test data exceeds the Required Limits, immediately notify the Nuclear Shif t Supervisor so that he can initiate any necessary corrective actions. 4.2 If a change in testing personnel takes place during the course of this test, the prerequisites should be reverified. 4.3 Always read a step in its entirety before performing that step. 4.4 Appropriate safety precautions shall be observed when working on energized equipment. 4.5' Because the process fluid is potentially contaminated, exercise care, and adhere to all EP instructions, when connecting and
~.**..ee eting test equipment, operating valves, and pressurizing and ver. ting the transmitter.
4.6 Safety precautions , unique to individual instruments , if any, will be described in the " REMARKS" section of the equipment specification sheet. l 4.7 ' Test tubing and fittings used for this test will be able to withstand at least 50 PSIG. - 5.0 Prerequisites l 5.1 A radiation work permit has been obtained in accordance with ! Reference 2.1.1 (if not required, enter N/A). 1
~
5.2 Insure that the requirements of Steps 4.3.1 through 4.3.9 of
. Reference 2.1.5, where applicable, are satisfied.
5.3 Inform the Nuclear Supervising Operator (N50) that only the Torus Water Level indication at panel H21-P623 will be af fected during this test. DRAFT !
.... 44.110.25 R2v. O j Page 3 5.4 The Nuclear Shift Supervisor'(NSS) has given permission to perform this surveillance in accordance with Reference 2.1.2. 5.5 Establish communications between instrument rack H21-P614A, (El, 540'-0", T-SB-A15), and ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM panel
. Ji21-P623 (E1. 413'-6", V-2-K16 ).
l 6.0 , Procedure NOTE: Refer to Enclosure 1 for the following. 6.1 Locate Torus Water Level Transmitter C36-N405 and remove from service in accordance with Reference 2.1.4.
.6.2 Connect pressure sou-ce and test gauge to calibration test fitting at valve V-2.
6.3 Vary the input to the transmitter to the values specified on Table 1 sof Attachment 1, and record the As Found lavel readings indicated by level indicator C36-R406. 6.4 Perform Steps 6.4.1 or 6.4.2 as required. . Enter N/A for step not
'being performed.
6.4.1 Compare the As Tound readings in Table 1 to the As Found tolerances. If all As Found readings are within As Found tolerances, proceed to Step 6.5. 6.4.2 If any of the As Found readings in Table 1 exceed the Jus Found tolerances,.recalibrate the individual channel
. instruments in accordance with its respective Equipment History Folder. Following recalibration, repeat Step 6.3 and record the As Left readings on Table 1 of Attachment 1, ensuring that the As Left data is within As Left tolerances.
6.5 Close calibration valve V-2, and disconnect pressure source and test gauge. 6.6 Return C36-N405 to service in accordance with Reference 2.1.4. 7.0 Acceptance Criteria 7.1 The calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDDWN SYSTEM TORUS WATER LEVEL channel instrumentation is acceptable if the data recorded in g Table 1, of Attachment 1, is within the limits required. DRAFT .
. 44.110.25 E:cissure 1 f Page 1 of 1 l, INSTRUMENT VALVE DIAGRAM FOR C36-N405
. ..- CAL . VENT -
O O ' ' y3 V2 V3[
@C36 l
, VAR- ( , y .
) REE V4 ,
V5 a w-. m 9 V6[ } V7
~
b 6 4 102585 ,
^
w llRAF1
. 44.110.25
, Attcchment 1 Page 1 of 1 CALIBRATION DATA SHEET FOR ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM TORUS WATER LEVEL INSTRUMENTS C36-N405 and C36-R406 CALIBRATION OF C36-N405/R406 INPUT TO OUTPUT INPUT 38.7 to 238.7 IN. WC SPAN = 200.0 IN. W .
OUTPUT -144 TO 56 IN. WC SPAN = 200.0 IN. WC LOOP ACCURACY = 1 1 AS FOUND/LEFT ACCURACY = 1.51 FOR A READING +/- 3.0 IN. WC _RQRD DESIRED AS FOUND H AS FOUND l AS LEFT AS LEFT 1 INPUT OUTPUT - TOL + l READING - TOL + READING IN. WCi IN. WC IN. WC l IN. WC l IN. WC IN. WC l IN. WC IN. WC 0 38.7 -144.0 -147.0 -141.0 -147.0 -141.0 l _ _25 88.7 l -94.0 -97.0 '
-91.0 l -97.0 -91.0' 50 138.7 l -44.0 -47.0 -41.0 l i -47.0! -41.0 75 188.7 6.0 4 3.0 9.0 l 3.0 9.0 100 238.7 56.0 53.0 59.0 H 53.0 1 59.0i 75 188.7 6.0 3.0 9.0 3.0 L 9.0 l 50 138.7 -44.0 -47.0 -41.0 -47.0 -41.01 25 88.7 -94.0 -97.0 1 -91.0 i -97.0 -91.0l 0l 38.7 -144.0 1 -147.0 1-141.0 l -147.0 -141.0l 102585 BRAF1 e 4
. 44.110.25
, Attcchment 2 Page 1 of 2
, CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST
' Step Number ,. Initials Data 3.3. Pressure Cauge .
Test Equip. No. Cal. Due Date
- 5. '1 ' RWE Obtained .
5 .'2 Requirements satisfied " 15.3 NSO informed 5.4
- NSS permissi'on '
3.5 c. . Communications established
, 6.0 Procedure 6.1 Transmitter out of service '
6.2 Test equipment connected 6.3 Data recorded ~ 6 .4 Cocpare data 6.4.1 As Found data within tolerance - 6.4.2 As Found data outside tolerance As Left data within tolerance 6.5 Test equipment disconnected 6.6 Returned to service 7.0 Acceptance Criteria
$7.1 Data recorded in Table 1 of Attachment 1 is within the limits required. /
Initial /Date
$ Denotes minimum requirements for Tech Spec acceptability NOTE: The Calibration Data Sheet, Calibration Test Checklist, and Independent Verifiestion Checklist, constitute the necessary documentation to ensure satisfactory completion. of this calibration, and knould be maintained together.
REMARKS D
' O G
9 102585
. . DRAFT -
. 44.110.25
, Attcchme t 2 Page 2 of 2 CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST Step Number Initials _ Vata Time completed Date completed
.Frinted Names ;, Initials- Signatures (of Test Personnel)
% 4 NOTE: Following completion of this test, ensure the require-ments of Steps 4.4.9 through 4.4.18 of Reference 2.1.5, and Step 3.3 of Reference 2.1.3, where applicable, are satisfied.
Notify the NSS that this test is complete. 102585
!) RAFT - -
44.110.25 l i, Attechaznt 3 l Page 1 of 1 . I .
' INDEPENDENT VERIFICATION CHECKLIST
. At Instrument Rack B21-P614, for IXE-C36-N405 l VERIFY: . INITIALS .
' *1. ' - Calibration and Vent' Valves V-2 and V-3 are CLOSED '
.2.- .
Equalizing Valve VI- la"CIDSED ,, , ..
- 3. Drain Valves V-6 and V-7 are CIDSED ,
- 4. .. Isolation Valves V-4 and V-5 are OPEN ,_
/ /
Printed Name of: Signature of: Date Time Individual performing independent verification O e 9 9 e 2 102585 END BRAfl
ir '; t- . : s ; c c ., n s .- e c: z t. , _n ' ;~- SR Satety Classification g gjl vide e p 12.000.07 FERMI 2 PROCEDURE - I&C SURVEILLANCE TITLE:
- ALTER!nTI E SHUTDOWN SYSTEM PRIMARY CONTAINiENT
, . TEMPERATURE CHANNEL CALIBRATION: T50-N407A, C36-K402, AND C36-R403 PROCEDURE NUMBER: 44.110.26 REVISION: 0 - er ? -
p Name of preparer: D. K. Jones Technically . reviewed by: . N Date: /a 28.E.5" Reviewed / concurred HO Date:[Ol:2C)ly Supy - ef a t'ional A urance Approved by: [dl d% 4' Responsible Section Head or OSR0 Member / Alt Late: I4 f Turther Approval Required for Safety-Related or Superintendent-Designated Procedures: Recommended by: ~g/- - Date: /O -2 7- R f OSRQ Chairman / Alternate Approved by: Date: /4/f ff Superintencent - Nuclear P.roduction The following approved Procedure Change Regtests are incorporated in this revision: This revision l l does l l does not constitute periodic review. DRAtl
- , , . . , . - , -c ' ' ' " -
, 44.110.26 Rev. 0 TABLE OF C0hTEhTS fage, 1.0 Purpose.......................................... I 2.0 Re f e r e nc e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3.0 Re q ui re d Eq uipme nt . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . 2 4.0 .Preca utions and :Limita tions. . . .. . .. . .. ... . . . . . . .~. 2
- 5. 0 . P r e r e q ui s i t e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 6.0 Procedure........................................ 3 7.0 Acceptance Criteria.............................. 4 Inclosures Test Equipment Connection Diagram (102585)..... .. .. .. . Enclosure 1 Attachments Calibration Data Sheet (102585)...................... Attachment 1 Calibration Test Checklist (102585). . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . At tachme nt 2 O
4 LBP/100/R485/7.0 102665 - e 'fl 9 d0 e ,
44.110.26 Rev. O Page 1 1.0 Purpose 1.1 When.perf ormed in its entirety, this test will satisfy the once
, per 18 month CHANNEL CALIBRATION requirements of the Fermi 2 Technical Specification section 4.3.10.1, Table 4.3.10, by verif ying the calibration of ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM PRIMARY
, C0hTAINdEhT TEMPERATURE instruments T50-N407A, C36-K402, and C36-R403.
. 2.0 References 2.1 Use References i
2.1.1 Plant Operations Manual (POM) Procedure 12.000.13, 2 Radiation Work Permit. 2.1.2 POM Procedure 12.000.18, Surveillance Program. 2.1.3 POM Procedure 12.000.43, verification of Correct Operating Activities.
~
2.1.4 P0M Procedure 41.000.11, Calibration of Process Instrumentation. 2.2 Source References 2.2.1. Fermi 2 Technical Specification 3/4.3.10 APPENDIX R Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls. 2.2.2 POM Procedure 12.000.15, PN21 (Work Order Processing).
- 2. 2.'3 POM Procedure 41.000.03, Instrumentation Calibration Records.
2.2.4 POM Procedure 41.000.09, Process Instrumentation Removal From and Return to Service. 2.2.5 POM Procedure 46.000.04, Indicators and Recorders.
, 2.2.6 Equipment History Folders for T50-N407A, C36-K402, and C36-R403.
2.2.7' Edison Drawings: 61721-2785-2 Rev.* IDOP DIAGRAM-1EDICATED SHUTDOWN C0h7ROL PANEL H21-P623 INST.
- Drawing generated by EDP-1697 Iten No.19.00 Rev. 0
. ox 44.110.26
' ~/ Rev. O
, Page 2
'3.0, Required Equipment 3.1 A'aillivolt source capablef of simulating a Type
. 'T" thermocouple
.. temperature between 0 and 400 deg.f +/ .4 deg.f, (L&N Millivolt Pot 8686 or equivalent).
~
3.2. Type "T"' thermocouple compensator.(Transaation Thrice' cell 1013
- or equivalent).
3.3 Decade Box to simulate the T/C lead resistance (General Radio 1333T or equivalent).
-3.4 Approximately 3 feet of type "T" thermocouple . wire, and solid copper wire for test connection.
4.0 Precautions and Limitations 4.1 - If any discrepancy is encountered, or if any steps cannot be satisfactorily completed or if any instrument test data exceeds f the Required Limits, immediately notif y the Nuclear Shif t Supervisor so that he can initiate any necessary corrective actions. 4.2~ If a change in testing personnel takes place during the course of
~
this test, the prerequisites should be reverified. 4.3 Always read a step in its entirety before performing that step.
- 4.4 Appropriate safety precautions shall be observed when working on energized equipment.
4.5 . Safety precautions, unique to individual instruments, if any, will be described in the " REMARKS" section of the equipment specification sheet. 5.0 pr.v.qnt.<e.. 3.1 A radiation work permit has been obtained in accordance with Reference 2.1.1 (if not required, enter N/A). 5.2 Insure that the requi.eaents of steps 4.3.1 through 4.3.9 of Reference 2.1.5, where applicable, are satisfied. 5.3 Inform the Nuclear Supervising Operator (NS0) that only the Primary Containment Temperature indication at panel H21-P623 will be affected during this test. 3.4 The ' Nuclear Shif t Supervisor (NSS) has given permission to perform this surveillance ,in accordance with Reference 2.1.2. ORAH
'* 44.110.26 Rev. 0
, Page 3 6.0 _ Procedure 6.1 At ALTERNATIVE SHUT 90WN SYSTEM panel H21-P623 (El. 613'-6**,
. , V-2-K16), -locate TORUS WATER TEMPERATURE T/C Signal. Conditioner C36-K402, and disconnect thermocouple leads.
. 6.2 Refer to Enclosure 1, and connect test equipment to T/C input terminals of C36-K402.
6.3 Adjust the de'cade box to the value specified for T/C loop resistance in the Equipment History Folder for C36-K402. 6.4 Adjust the output of the millivolt pot, in succession, to the
. values specified on Table 1 of Attachment 1, and record As Found Temperature readings as indicated by temperature indicator C36-R403.
6.5 Perform steps 6.5.1 or 6.5.2 as required. Enter N/A for step not
. being performed.
6.5.1 Compare the As Found readings in Table 1 to the As Found tolerances. If all As Found readings are within As Found tolerances, proceed to step 6.6. 6.5.2 If any of f.he As Found readings in Table 1 exceed the
. As Found tolerances, recalibrate the individual channel instruments in accordance with its respective Equipment History Folder. Following recalibration, repeat step 6.4 and record the As Lef t readings on Table 1 of Attachment 1, ensuring that the As Lef t data is within
'As Left tolerances.
6.6 Disconnect the millivolt source, thrice cell, and decade box connected in step 6.2. 6.7 Observing correct polarity, reconnect the thermocouple leads disconnected in step 6.1. 6.8 Record temperature as indicated by TSU-R800B, pt 2, (Control Room Operating Panel H11-P602), in the space provided on Attachment 2. 6.9 Record temperature as indicated by C36-R403 in the space provided on Attachment 2. 6.10 Verify that the readings taken in steps 6.8 and 6.9 are within
+/- 20 deg.f of each other.
i1 RAFT
44.'110.26 Rsv. O Page 4 i 7 . O_ Acceptance Criteria 7.1 The calibration of A1.ERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM PRIMARY CONTAINHEhT TEMPERATURE channel instrumentation :is acceptable if the data recorded in Table 1, of Attachment 1, is within the limits required, and comparison of readings indicates correlation between temperature elements. e 0 DRAF1 4
44.J10.26
' Enclosure 1
. Page 1 of 1 TEST EQUIPrEhT CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR C36-K402/C36-R403 9
Millivcit l Source
. - 1 Isothermal si e Eeference .
Sox 2ns t rument to be ' I N __) O Es3ibrated-I gg . 7---- S
,' 'S
^
f v v
- .._-__s L--e Sim:1sted Thermocouple Coppe r Cable -
Wire Wire Kesistance DRAF1 102585
.. - ~ ~ ~n r , - , - - , , , . , _ - _ , _ , _ , _ _ , , _ , _ _ _ ,
44.110.'26
?
Attachment 1 Page 1 of 1 CALIBRATION DATA SHEET FOR ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN SYSTEM TORUS WATER TEMPERATURE
. Anstruments C36-K402 and C36-R403.
CALIBRATION OF C36-K402/R403 INPUI TO OUTPUT INPUT -1.046 TO 9.211 MVDC SPAN = 10.257MVD OUTPUT O TO 400 deg.f SPAN = 400.0 deg.f LOOP ACCURACY = .6% AS FOUND/LEFI ACCURACY = .9% FOR A READING +/- 3.6 deg.f a RQRD ! DESIRED AS FOUND AS FOUND AS LEFT AS LEFI
% INPUT OUTPUT -
TOL + READI NG - TOL + READI NG MVDC deg.f deg.f degf deg.f deg.f deg.f deg.f 0 -1.046 U.0 -3.6 3.6 -3.6 3.6
~
25 1.518 100.0 96.4 103.6 96.4 103.6 50 4.083 200.0 196.4 203.6 196.4 203.6 75 6.6471300.0 296.4 303.6 296.4 303.6 __100 9.,211 400.0 396.4 403.6 396.4 403.6 75 6.647 300.0 296.4 303.6 296.4 303.6 50 4.083 200.0 196.4 203.6 196.4 203.6 25 1.518 100.0 96.4 103.6 96.4 103.6 0 -1.046 0.0 -3.6 3.6 -3.6 3.6 102585 tw 5.
, 44.110.26 Attachment 2
, Page 1 of 2 CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST STEP NUMBER INITIALS DATA
. 3.2 M1111 volt Pot -
Test Equip. No.
. Cal. Due Date
, ' 3.3 . Thrice Cell Test Equip. No.
Cal. Due Date
.3.4 Decade Eox ,
. Test Equip. No.
Cal. Due Date 5.1 R'n'P Obtained 5.2 Requirements satisfied J . 5.3 NSO Informed 5.4 LNSS permission - 6.0 Procedure - 6.1 T/C disconnected
~
6.2 Test equipment connected 6.3 Decade box adjusted 6.4 Data recorded ."~~" . 6.5 Compare data i....,... 6.5.1 As Found data within tolerance '*'* - 6.5.2 As Found data outside tolerance - As Lef t data within tolerance e 6.6 Test equipment disconnected . - 6.7 Thermocouple reconnected 6.8 T30-KG003 reading , 6.9 C36-R403 reading , , _ _ , deg.i 6.10 Readings satisfactory . deg.f 7.0 Acceptance criteria
$7.1 Data recorded in Table 1 of Attachment Iuis within the ,
limits required, and comparison of readings satisfactory. / dnitial/ date NDTE:. The Calibration Data Sheet, and Calibration Test
., Checkli st , constitute the,necessary. documentation to ensure satisfactory comp 1stina of this calibration, and abould be maintained together.
$ Denotes minimum requirements for Tech Spec acceptability 102585 DRhfi .
44.110.26
/ Attcchment 2 Page 2 of 2 CALIBRATION TEST CHECKLIST REMARKS
~
.-, Time Conipleted lktte Completed s Printed Names Initials Signatures (of test personnel)
NOTE: Following completion of this test, ensure the requirements of steps 4.4.9 through 4.4.18 of Reference 2.1.4, where applicable, are satisfied.
- Notify the NSS that this test is complete.
. \
i l 102585 l END URAF1 . . . . 4
,e - , -, ~,--y. - + - . a-,, - ---- -m e -+--4,, , - . - , - , , - - , , - , - , - - - , , - - , . . , ~ - - - - - - - - -
r s,
'<'- ARP llD61 REV. O SR X NSR
- SUP DEDICATED SilUTDOWN TRANSF PB ARMED AUTO ACTIONS ,
- 1. None IMMEDIATE OPERATOR ACTIONS NOTE: This alarm dierts the operator thct the Transfer Pushbutton on COP Hil-P811 has been armed to operate when pushed.
- 1. Verify that ~ the Dedicated Shutdown System Transfer Switch, llA102 (COP Hil-P811) has been armed intentionally.
- 2. If the Transfer Switch is not required to be armed, return the switch to DICARMED.
- 3. Notify the NSS of the event (s) and actions taken.
SUBSEQUENT ACTIONS
- 1. Comply with Technical Specifications, Section: Appendix R Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls - 3.3.10.
- 2. Determine if a circuit or mechanical malfunction exists and initiate corrective actions.
INITIATING DEVICE /SETPOINTS
- 1. Dedicated Shutdown System Transfer Switch IIA 102 ARMED position Approved by:
LBP/100/R346/13.0 Page 1 of 1 103185 END DRAF1
ARP llD53 REV. O SR X
- f. - NSR j SUP DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV CONTROL TROUBLE AUTO ACTIONS
- 1. None IMMEDIATE OPERATOR ACTIONS NOTE: This alarm is provided to monitor the condition of the Dedicated Shutdown Supervisory Control System under normal conditions and alert the operator in case the system requires repair. This equipment is maintained by the Relay Division.
- 1. Notify the Central System Supervisor of the condition.
- 2. Notify the NSS of the event (s) and actions taken.
SUBSEQUENT ACTIONS
- 1. Comply with Technical Specifications, Section:
- a. Appendix R Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls - 3.3.10.
- b. Appendix R Alternative Shutdown Auxiliary Systems - 3.7.9.
-2. Verify if there is a loss of power or' if communication paths have been disturbed at the MTU or RTU.
- 3. Determine if a circuit or mechanical malfunction exist and initiate corrective actions.
INITIATING DEVICE /SETPOINTS Internal to C3600P001 3L MTU Approved by: LBP/100/R346/12.0 Page 1 of 1 103185 BRAF1
,_,--s
.-- , , ,, - -.~,._me -e
. --e r,- .- --, - s
4RP llD57 REV. O SR X NSR SUP j 120KV UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME ABNORMAL AUTO ACTIONS l '. None IMMEDIATE OPERATOR ACTIONS NOTE: This alarm alerts the operator to an abnormal 120KV undervoltage relay scheme condition which requires attention.
- 1. Notify the Maintenance Department to verify which of the followirg has occurred:
- a. Loss of 120V DC Control Power
- b. Undervoltage Relays (indicators of LOP) not operating
- 2. Notify the NSS of the event (s) and actions taken.
SUBSEQUENT ACTIONS
- 1. Comply with Technical Specification, Sections:
- a. Appendix R Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls - 3.3.10.
- b. Appendix R Alternative Shutdown Auxiliary Systems - 3.7.9.
- 3. Determine if a circuit or mechanical malfunction exist and initiate corrective actions.
INITIATING DEVICE /SETPOINTS Undervoltage Relays 27-10lP (Fermi i Relay Roon) Deenergized 27-102P (Fermi'l Relay Room) Deenergized Approved by: LBP/100/R346/11.0 Page 1 of 1 103185 END DRAF1
ARP 11D49 REV. O SR X NSR SUP DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV CONTROL ACTIVATED AUTO ACTIONS 1; None IMMEDIATE OPERATOR ACTIONS NOTE: This alarm alerts the operator that Supervisory Control has been transferred to the Dedicated Shutdown Supervisory Control System.
- 1. Verify that Supervisory Control transfer was intentional.
- 2. Direct an operator to H21-P623 Dedicated Shutdown Panel (RW2-L16).
- 3. Notify the NSS of tho event (s) and actions taken.
SUBSEQUENT ACTIONS
- 1. Comply with Technical Specifications, Section: Appendix R Alternative Shutdown Instrumentation and Controls - 3.3.10.
- 2. At H21-P623 perform the following:
- a. Verify SUPV 00NT TRMiSF'D light is on.
- b. Attempt to return supervisory control to the Control Room, by momentarily placing the spring return Transfer Switch CONT RM.
- 3. Investigate cause of the inadverent transfer or malfunction.
- 4. Determine if a circuit or mechanical malfunction exist and initir.t-corrective actions.
INITIATING DEVICE /SETPOINTS CTG 11 Unit 1 START position
. Approved by:
I LBP/100/R346/14.0 Page 1 of 1 103185 END
~
BRAfl . .
SR i I Safety Classification l FERMI 2 PROCEDURE - OPERATIONS PROCEDURE --SURVEILLANCE TITLE: SBFW PUMP AND VALVE OPERABILITY AND VALVE LINEUP VERIFICATION TEST PROCEDURE NUMBER: 24.107.03 REVISION: 0 Name of preparer: A. Geschwind Technically reviewed by: Date: Reviewed / concurred by: Date: Supv - Operational Assurance Approved by: Date: Responsible Section Head or OSR0 Member / Alt Further Approval Required for Safety-Related or Superintendent-Designated Procedures: Recommended by: Date: OSRO Chairman / Alternate Approved by: Date: Superintendent - Nuclear Production The following approved Procedure Change Requests are incorporated in this revision: This revision l l does l l does not constitute periodic review. DRAF1
24.107.03 Rev. O i TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1.0 Purpose.................................. 1 2.0 Re f e r e n c e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3.0 Required Equipment..'..................... 2 4.0 Precautions and Limitations.............. 2 5.0 Prerequisites............................ 3 6.0 Procedure................................ 3 7.0 Acceptance Criteria...................... 4 Attachments SBFW Pump and Valve Operability and Valve Lineup Verification Test (110185)............ Attachment 1 Independent Position Verification Sheet (110185)............................... Attachment 2 LBP/100/R455/6.0 110185
nr j 24.107.03 Rev. O Paga 1 1.0 Purpose 1.1 To provide the detailed steps necessary to perform the required surveillance testing of the Standby Feedwater System (SBFW) Pumps and Valves in accordance with Technical Specifications, Section 4.7.9.1. 1.2 Required frequency is at least once per 92 days when in Condition 1, POWER OPERATION, or Condition 2, STARTUP. 2.0 Re ferences 2.1 Use References 2.1.1 Plant Operations Manual (POM) Procedure 23.107.01,
" Standby Feedwater System" 2.2.1 Fermi 2 Technical Specifications:
- 1. 3/4.7.9, Appendix R Alternative Shutdown Auxiliary Systems 2.2.2 POM Procedure 12.000.07, Plant Operations Manual 2.2.3 POM Procedure 12.000,13, Radiation Work Permit 2.2.4 POM Procedure 12.000.18, Surveillance Program 2.2.5 POM Procedure 12.000.43, Verification of Correct Performance of Operating Activities 2.2.6 POM Procedure 21.000.14, Locked Valve Guidelines 2.2.7 Drawings 6M721-5715-3 Standby Feedwater System (SBFW)
Functional Operating Sketch 6M721-5721-1 Condensate Storage and Transfer System Functional Operating Sketch 6I721-2311-35 Schematic Diagram - Standby Feedwater System - Pump ' A' 6I721-2311-36 Schematic Diagram - Standby Feedwater System - Pump 'B' DRAF1
24.107.03 Rrv. O Page 2 61721-2317-28 Schematic Diagram - SBFW System Isolation Valve (V8-4299) 6I721-2317-29 Schematic Diagram - SBFW System Flow Control Valve ' A' (V8-4304) 6I721-2317-30 Schematic Diagram - SBFW System Flow Control Valve 'B' (V8-4305) 2.2.8 Functional System Description, Standby Feedwater System, N21-03-SD 2.2.9 RC-LG-85-0051, September 27, 1985, "Reque s t for Ammend-ment to Technical Specifications for the Alternative Shutdown Program" 3.0 Required Equipment 3.1 Communication Equipment 4.0 Precautions and Limitations 4.1 The surveillance test should be terminated promptly upon indication of any test related abnormality. The Nuclear Shift Supervisor (NSS) should be notified before resuming. 4.2 Ensure that no other testing or maintenance is in progress that will adversely af fect the performance of this test. 4.3 Refer to applicable Technical Specification Limiting Conditions for Operation for required action if a pump is declared INOPERABLE. 4.4 If test results violate Technical Specification limits, notify the NSS immediately.
-4.5 For the SBFW pump motors, observe motor starting duty limits of no more than two successive starts from ambient motor temperature or one start from rated motor temperature. For subsequent starts, allow thirty (30) minutes running time or sixty (60) minutes idle time.
4.6 The SBFW System test line is equipped with restricting orifices to limit the test flow to the capacity of one pump (600 GPM). Therefore, only one (1) pump is to be operated at a time during the performance of this test. 4.7 Water level in the Condensate Storage Tank (CST) must remain greater than 9 feet, as indicated on CST level recorder LRE-PN-R801 (located on C0P H11-P805), to prevent loss of suction to the SBFW pumps. DRAF1
24.107.03-Rsv. O Page 3 4.8 If a valve is found in an incorrect position, do not reposition it without permission from the NSS. 5.0 Prerequisites 5.1 The NSS has given permission to perform this test on the Surveillance Performance Form. 5.2 Verify all radiation protection requirements are met, as listed on the Radiation Work Permit (RWP), if required. 5.3 Ensure water level in the CST is greater than 9 feet as indicated on CST level recorder P11-R801 (COP Hll-P805). 5.4 Verify that the SBFW System is aligned for standby operation in accordance with the applicable section(s) of System Operating Procedure 23.107.01, " Standby Feedwater System". 6.0 Procedure 6.1 General Instructions 6.1.1 All controls and indications for this test are located on COP Hil-P601, unless otherwise noted. 6.1.2 Compare all test results with the given acceptance criteria at all times throughout the test period. 6.1.3 All personnel whose initials appear on each attachment must sign in the space (s) provided at the end of each attachment. 6.1.4 All valve numbers in this procedure are prefixed N2103 unless otherwise noted. 6.2 Perform the SBFW Pump and Valve Operability and Valve Lineup Verification Test in accordance with Attachment 1. i l BRAF1
24.107.03 Rev. O Page 4 7.0 Acceptance Criteria 7,1 The Tech Spec requirements of this test are satisfied when the following criteria are met. 7.1.1 The SBFW System Valves were found in their required position and shown to be operable in accordance with Attachment 1. If not, refer to Tech Spec 3.7.9. 7.1.2 At least .one .(1) SBFW Fump (A and/or B) develops > 600 gpm in the test flowpath in accordance with Attachment
- 1. If not, refer to Tech Spec 3.7.9.
l l ORAF1
24.107.03 Attcchm:nt 1 Page 1 of 4 SBFW PUMP AND VALVE OPERABILITY AND VALVE LINEUP VERIFICATION TEST Step No. Initials /Date 1.0 Verify the following prerequisites of Section 5.0 are complete: 1.1 (5.1) NSS permission obtained. / 1.2 (5.2) RWP requirements met. / 1.3 (5.3) CST water level > 9 feet. / 1.4 (5.4) SBFW System in Standby. / 2.0 On COP H11-P601, verify annunciator ID65, SBFW SYSTEM TRIPPED, is clear. / 3.0 On C0P H11-P601, verify that each valve listed below is in its " Required Position" as indicated by the
. green backlit CLOSE lights.
Valve Required No. Description Position l 1 I F001 SBFW Pumps Discharge Line { Isolation Valve CLOSED / F002 SBFW Pumps Discharge Line Control Valve CLOSED / F003 F002 Bypass Control Valve CLOSED / l 4.0 Locally verify that each valve listed below is in its " Required Position". / Valve Required No. Description Position F300A SBFW Pump A Suction Valve OPEN / F300B SBFW Pump B Suction Valve OPEN / F309A SBFW Pump A Discharge Isolation Valve OPEN / . F309B SBFW Pump B Discharge , Isolation Valve OPEN / l F325 SBFW Test Line Isolation l Valve CLOSED / F331 SBFW . imps Discharge Line Isolation Valve OPEN / 110185
24.107.03 Attachmznt 1 Pcgs 2 of 4 Step No. Initials /Date 5.0 On COP Hil-P601, verify that the MODE SELECTOR switch for .the SBFW System is in the NORM position. / 6.0 At COP Hil-P601, verify'the following valves stroke full open (closed) as, indicated by their respective
-red (green) backlit OPEN (CLOSED) lights:
6.1' Open N2103-F002, SBFW Pumps Discharge Line Control Valve. / 6.2 Close N2103-F002, SBFW Pumps Discharge Line Control Valve. / 6.3 Open N2103-F003, F002 Bypass Control Valve. / 6.4 Close N2103-F003, F002 Bypass Control Valve. / l CAUTION l l l l Valves N2103-F002 and N2103-F003 must be l l full closed prior to opening N2103-F001.
~
l I l NOTE: With'SBFW pumps off, the OPEN pushbutton for valve N2103-F001 must be depressed and held in order to open the valve. When the OPEN pushbutton is released, the valve will close automatically. 6.5 Depress and hold the OPEN pushbutton for N2103-F001, SBFW Pumps Discharge Line Isolation Valve, until the valre is full open, then release the OPEN pushbutton and verify the valve automatically closts. / Tech. Spec. Requirement: Valves N2103-F001, F002 and F003 stroke full open and full closed. 7.0 Station an Operator at N2103-F325, SBFW Test Line Isolation Valve, and establish communication between the Operator and the Control Room. / 8.0 Open Pil-F606, CRD, HPCI and RCIC Return to CST Isolation Valve, located on C0P Hil-P805. /_ 110185 DRAFl
24.107.03 Atttchmont 1 Page 3 of 4 Step No. Initials /Date 9.0 Start the Lube Oil Pump for SBFW Pump A by placing the CMC switch to AUTO. / 10.0 Start the Lube Oil Pump for SBFW Pump B by placing the CMC switch in AUTO. / 11.0 Place the SBFW System MODE SELECTOR switch in the TEST position. / 12.0 Start SBFW Pump A. / 12.1 Verify that the Lube Oil Pump for SBFW Pump A stops. / 13.0 Open N2103-F325, SBFW Test Line Isolation Valve. / 14.0 Record SBFW Pump A flow as indicated on N21-R802: GPM / Tech Spec. Requirement: SBFW Pump A develops a flow of > 600 GPM. 15.0 Close N2103-F325, SBFW Test Line Isolation Valve. / 16.0 Stop SBFW Pump A. / 16.1 Verify that the Lube Oil Pump for SBFW Pump B starts. / 17.0 Start SBFW Pump B. / 17.1 Verify that the Lube Oil Pump for SBFW Pump B stops. / 18.0 Open N2103-F325, SBFW Test Line Isclation Valve. / 19.0 Record SBFW Pump B flow as indicated on N21-R802: GPM / Tech. Spec. Requirement: SBFW Pump B develops a flow of > 600 GPM. i i i 1 QRAF1
24.107.03 Atts. chm:nt 1 Page 4 of 4 Step No. Initials /Date 20.0 Close N2103-F325, SBFW Test Line Isolation Valve. / 21.0 Stop SBFW Pump B. / 21.1 Verify that the Lube Oil Pump for SBFW Pump t starts. / NOTE: The Operator stationed at N2103-F325, SBFW Test Line Isolation Valve, is no longer required. 22.0 Place the CMC switch for SBFW Pump A Lube Oil Pump in the OFF/ RESET position. / 23.0 Place the CMC switch for.SBFW Pump B Lube Oil Pump in the OFF/ RESET position. / 24.0 Place the SBFW System MODE SELECTOR switch in the NORM position. / Time /Date Completed / 25.0 Perform the SBFW Independent Position Verification in accordance with Attachment 2. / 26.0 Notify the NSS upon completion of this test and of any step or condition which does not satisfy the requirements of this procedure. / Test Personnel Name (Print) Initial Signature 110185
. _ - . . . . . . _ _ _ _ . ~ . , _ _ . . ._ _._,._ _ . . _ . . _ . . _ , . -- 24.107.03 Attschm nt 2 Pega 1 of 1 SBFW PUMP AND VALVE OPERABILITY AND VALVE LINEUP VERIFICATION TEST INDEPENDENT POSITION VERIFICATION SHEET 1.0 After completion of Attachment 1, verify the following are lined up as indicated: Time /Date Started / DEVICE POSITION INITIAL COP Hll-P601 N2103-F001 CLOSED N2103-F002 CLOSED N2103-F003 CLOSED SBFW System MODE SELECTOR Switch NORM SBFW Pump A CMC Switch 0FF/ RESET SBFW Lube Oil Pump A CMC Switch 0FF/ RESET SBFW Pump B CMC Switch 0FF/ RESET SBFW Lube Oil Pump B CMC Switch- 0FF/ RESET COP Hil-P805 Pll-F606 CLOSED Turbine Bldg. 3rd Fl. (Col. Pil) N2103-F331 - OPEN Turbine Bldg. Basement (Col. UV12) N2103-F002 CLOSED N2103-F003 CLOSED N2103-F325 CLOSED 2.0 Performed by: / Name (Print) Initial Signature / Date 110185 END URAFT
? .i SR Safety Classification s
' FERMI 2 PROCEDURE - ABNORMAL OPERi.TIONS TITLE: , CONTROL OF THE PLANT FROM THE DEDICATED SHUTDOWN PANEL PROCEDURE NUMBER: 20.000.18
! REVISION: 0 Name of preparer: Vince Hydro , Technically reviewed by: Date: Reviewed / concurred by: Date: Supv - Operational Assurance-Approved by: Date: Responsible Section Head or OSRO Member / Alt Further Approval Required for Safety-Related or Superintendent-Designated Procedures: Recommended by: Date: __Of.R0 Chairman / Alternate Approved by: Date: Superintendent - Nuclear Production The following approved Procedure Change Requests are incorporated in this revision: q l This revision l l does l l'does not constitute periodic review. l 1 DRAFT
t 5 20.000.18-Rsv. O TABLE OF CONTENTS. Page 1.0 Immediate Operator Actions . . . . . . . . E 2.0 Subsequent Operator Actions -
! No Loss of Offsite Power . . ...... . 3
- 3.0 Subsequent Operator Actions -
Loss of Offsite Power . . . . . . . . . 12 war . ORAFi
c 4 20.000.18 Rav. O Page 1 1.0 Immediate Operator Actions 1.1 If there is a confirmed fire in one of the Control Cgnter Complex Zone s ( I AB , 2 AB , 3 AB , 7 AB , 8 AB , 9 AB , 11AB, OR 13AB) that requires the Fire Brigade to be activated (Unusual Event), perform the following:
! 1.1.1 Start the . CTG 11-1 from the Main Control Room by Arming and Depressing the DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SYSTEM pushbutton on COP H11-P811.
1.1.2 Start the Lube Oil Pumps for the Standby Feedwater System on COP H11-P601. 1.1.3 Direct at least one licensed operator and one non-licensed operator to the Dedicated Shutdown Panel H21-P623. 1.1.4 At the Dedicated Shutdown Panel, H21-P623, transfer control from the Control Room to H21-P623 as follows: NOTE: The following two switches spring return to neutral.
- 1. Place the EF1 SUPERVISORY CONTROL switch to LOCAL and release.
- 2. Place the EF2 SYSTEM TRANSFER switch to LOCAL and release.
1.1.5 Verify CTG 11-1 is started and ready to load otherwise, start CTG 11-1 from the Dedicated Shutdown Panel. 1.1.6 Commence an orderly shutdowa from the Main Control Room in accordance with the appropriate General Operating Procedure. 1.2 If the fire is extinguished before 10 minutes have elapsed, then: 1.2.1 Evaluate the damage caused by the fire. 1.2.2 Initiate corrective action to repair any damage. 1.2.3 At the direction of the NSS, restore Control from the Dedicated Shutdown Panel to the Main Control Room using the Control Transfer Switches. 1.2.4 At the direction of the NSS, exit this procedure.
~
JQl1;~l
7 20.000.18 Rav. O P;gs 2 1.3 If the fire burns for 10 minutes or longer (Alert Condition) then perform the following: ; 1.3.1 Scram the Reactor. l
, j 1
1.3.2 Assume level control at the Dedicated Shutdown Panel by J performing the following uteps: NOTE: Continue level control from the Main Control Room as long as possible.
- 1. Start the Standby Feedwater Pumps from the Dedicated Shutdown panel as necessary.
f 2. Open N21-F001, Standby Feedwater Isolation Valve. l
- 3. Operate FCV H21-F002, Standby Feedwater Flow Control Valve as necessary.
L
- 4. Operate FCV N21-F003, Standby Feedwater Flow Control Valve as necessary.
- 5. Verify Standby Feedwater Flow on the Dedicated Shutdown Panel H21-P623.
1.3.3 Verify Safety Relief Valves operate in the Safety l Relief Mode to control Reactor Pressure. I I I f l CAUTION l ! I I ! l If N2 is not available, SRV G may be limited to 5 l l operations. I I . I 1.3.4 If necessary, manually operate 3RV G to control Reactor Pressure. 1.3.5 Continue rejecting heat to the main condenser for as long as possible. 1.4 If the fire is extinguished without the use of water, then perform the following: ( I 1.4.1 Evaluate the damage caused by the fire. 1.4.2 Initiate corrective action to repair any damage. 1.4.3 At the direction of the NSS, restore control from the Dedicated Shutdown Panel to the Main Control Room using the Control Transfer Switches. 1.4.4 At the direction of the NSS, exit this procedure. DRAfl
s 't 20.000.18 Rsv. O Pcge 3 1.5- If water must be used to extinguish the fire then proceed as follows: 1.5.1 If offsite power is still available proceed to Section 2.0. I
' 1.5.2 If offsite power is lost, perform Section 3.0, then L! return to Section 2.0.
2.0 Subsequent Operator Actions - No Loss of Offsite Power 2.1 If the Fire Brigade Leader determines that the use of water is necessary to extinguish the fire (Site area Emergency), then perform the following as directed from the Dedicated Shutdown Panel: 2.1.1 Align loads as directed on the following DC Panels:
- 1. All loads off on 2PA-1 (AB3-Hil)
- 2. All loads off on 2PB-1 (AB3-Hil)
- 3. At 2PA-2 (AB3-G11), circuit #14, Feed to 2PA2-5, ON; all other circuits off.
- 4. At 2PB-2 (AB3-Fil), circuit fil, Feed to SRV F013G, ON; all other circuits off.
2.1.2 Trip the following 4160 breakers at the indicated , busses:
- 1. F6 at 4160 Bus 65F, Main Breaker to SS #65 Transformer (AB3-G10).
- 2. E6 at 4160 Bus 65E, Main Breaker to SS #65 Transformer. (AB3-H10).
- 3. B6 at 4160 Bus 64B, Main Breaker to SS #64 Transformer (AB2-H10).
- 4. A9 at 4160 Bus 64A, Main Breaker to SS #64 Transformer (RW2-Ll4).
2.1.3 Trip the following breakers at Bus 72 B ( AB2-H10):
- 1. 1B, Main Breaker.
- 2. 2B, Isolation Transformer for Lighting Panel MDE-1. I
^ DRAF1
20.000.18 Rev. O P gn 4
- 3. 2C, Spare.
- 4. 2D, 480V Distribution Cabinet 72B-2D.,
- 5. 3B, 480V Distribution Cabinet 72B-3B.I
- 6. 3C, Fuel Pool Circulation Pump B.
- 7. 3D, Reactor Building Supply Fan.
- 8. 4A, 480V MCC 72B-4A.
- 9. 4B, DC Rectifier Power Unit.
- 10. 4C, 480V MCC 72B-4C.
- 11. 4D, Reactor Building Exhaust Fan.
2.1.4 Close or verify cicsed the following breakers at Bus 72B (AB2-H10):
- 1. IC, Tie to Bus 72C-1C.
- 2. 2A, 480 V MCC 72B-2A.
- 3. 3A, 480V MCC 72B-3A.
2.1.5 Trip the following breakers at Bus 72C (AB2-G10):
- 1. 2A, 480 V MCC 72C-2A.
- 2. 2B, Isolation Transformer for lighting panel MDN-1.
- 3. 2C, 480V Distribution Cabinet 72C-2C.
- 4. 2D, 480V Distribution Cabinet 72C-2D.
- 5. 3B, 480V MCC 72C-3B.
- 6. 3D, EECWS Pump NORTH, DIV. I
- 7. 4A, 480V MCC 72C-4A.
- 8. 4B, Main control Room AC Chiller.
- 9. 4C, RBCCW Pumps North.
- 10. 4D, SBGT filter unit. -
DRAF1
20.000.18 Rsv. O Page 5 2.1.6 Close or verify closed the following breakers at Bus 72C (AB2-G10): e
- 1. IB, Main Breaker. ,
a
- 2. IC, Tie to Bus 72B-IC.
- t 3. 3A, 480V MCC 72C-3A.
- 4. 3C, 480V MCC 72C-F.
2.1.7 At H21-P624, take Local control and Open C10, Core Spray Pump C. 2.1.8 At H21-P624, take Local Control and Open C5, RHR pump C at Bus. 2.1.9 At H21-P624, take Local Control and Open C9, Maintenance tie. 2.1.10 At Switchgear Room DC Distribution Cabinet 2PAB2-14(AB2-H9) turn off all of the circuits except position #5, power to Bus 64C. NOTE: The following step restores power to required equipment. 2.1.11 Restore Drywell Cooling and required EECW by performing the following steps: NOTE: Primary Containment Temperature is indicated on the 3L Dedicated Shutdown Panel, H21-P623.
- 1. At Local Control Panel H21-P625 (RB2-B15), take Local Control and open or verify open the following valves:
- a. P44-F606A, DIV I Drywell Equipment Outboard EECW Return Valve.
- b. P44-F607A, DIV I Drywell Equipment EECW Supply Valve,
- c. P44-F602A, EECW Heat Exchanger B001 Inlet Valve.
- d. At Local Control Panel H21-P625 (RB2-B15),
take local control and start Drywell Cooling Fan T47-C002. DRAF1 , 1 . _ . _..m .
20.000.18 Rsv. O Page 6
- e. At Local Control Panel H21-P626 (RB1-G13),
take loca1' control start Drywell Cooling Fac T47-C001. .
- 2. At Local Control Panel H21-P628 (AB2-Fl0),
I take local control and open or verify open P44-F616, DIV I Equipment Inboard EECW Return Valve.
- 3. At Bus 72C (AB2-G10), close pos 3D to start the North DIV. I EECW Pump.
2.1.12 Close or verify closed the following breakers at the RHR complex, Bus 12EB:
- 1. EB2, RHR Service Water Pump C.
- 2. EB4, Dummy Breaker tie to Bus 640.
- 3. EB5, 480 V Unit Substation Transformer 72EB.
2.1.13 Trip the following breakers at Bus 72EB in the RHR Complex:
- 1. IC, Tie to DG Bus 72EA-lC.
- 2. . 2A, Mechanical Draft Cooling Tower Fan C Hi.
- 3. 2B, Mechanical Draft Cooling Tower Fan C Low.
- 4. 2D, 480 V MCC 72EB-2D.
2.1.14 Close or verify closed the following breakers at Bus - 72EB in the RHR Complex:
- l. IB, Main Breaker.
- 2. 2C, Emergency Equipment Service Water Pump A.
d DRAFI
r 20.000.18 Rsv. O Pcgs 7 2.1.15 Establish Torus Cooling by performing the following steps: e I
; I l CAUTION l I I
,! l With control for the RHR Valves transferred to the l l Local Control Panels, all of the normal valve control l
~
l interlocks are bypassed. The potentials for draining l l the Reactor Vessel to the Torus and overpressurizing l l the RHR system exists. l
- 1. At Local Control Panel H21-P627 (RB2-All), take local control and close or verify closed the following valves:
- a. Ell-F010, RHR Loop A/B Discharge Cross Tie Valve.
- b. Ell-F015A, LPCI Loop A Inboard Isolation Valve.
- c. Ell-F017A, LPCI Loop A Outboard Injection Isolation Valve.
- 2. At Local Control Panel H21-P625 (RB2-B15), take local control and close or verify closed the following valves:
- a. ' Ell-F009, Shutdown Cooling Suction Inboard Isolation Valve.
- b. Ell-F006C, RHR Pump C Shutdown Cooling Isolation Valve.
- c. Ell-F016A, RHR Loop A Drywell Spray Outboard Isolation Valve.
- 3. At Local Control Panel H21-P626 (RBI-F14), take local control and close or verify closed Ell-F004A, RHR Pump A Torus Suction Isolation Valve.
- 4. At Local Control Panel H21-P625 (RB2-B15), take local control and start the RHR Emergency Equipment Cooler fl, T41-B018.
- 5. At Local Control Panel H21-P626 (RB1-F14), take local control open Ell-P028A, RHR Loop A Containment Spray / Test Isolation Valve.
DRAF1
20.000.18 RLv. O P2gs 8
- 6. At Local Control Panel H21-P625 (RB2-B15), take loca1' control and open or verify open the following valves: ,
- s. Ell-F003A, RHR Heat Exchange A Discharge Valve.
- b. . Ell-F004C, RHR Pump C Torus Suction Isolation Valve.
- c. Ell-F047A, RHR Heat Exchanger A Inlet Isolation Valve.
- d. Ell-F048A, RHR Heat Exchanger A Bypass Valve.
- 7. At H21-P624, near 4160 Bus 64C, ( AB2-G10) start RHR Pump C by manually closing breaker C5.
- 8. At Local Control Panel H21-P626 (RB1-F14), take local control and throttle open Ell-F024A, Torus Cooling / Test Isolation Valve.
- 9. At Local Control Panel H21-P625 (RB2-B15),take local control and throttle open Ell-F068A, RHR Heat Exchanger lA Service Water Flow Control Valve.
NOTE: Torus Water Level and Temperature is indicated on Dedicated Shutdown Panel, H21-P623.
- 10. Methods of Torus Cooldown Rate Control NOTE: With Ell-F048A(B), RHR Heat Exchanger Bypass Valve, and Ell-F003A(B), RHR Heat Exchanger Outlet Valve, fully open, approximately 75% of the flow will pass through the Heat Exchanger Bypass Line and the remaining 25% flow will pass through the RHR Heat Exchanger.
I NOTE: Throttling Ell-F048A(B) or Ell-F003A(B) l is the preferred method of cooldown rate control.
- a. To increase cooldown rate, throttle, in the l closed direction Ell-F048A(B). (This will cause more flow to pass through the RHR Heat Exchanger.)
l l DRAFT
20.000.18 Rrv. O P:ge 9
- b. To decrease cooldown rate, throttle, in the closed direction Ell-F003A(B). (This will cause more flow to pass through ghe RHR Heat Exchanger Bypass Line.) .
NOTE: Torus cooling should be kept in
,' service as long as relief valve operation is occurring.
2.1.16 When time permits, turn off the following loads on 260VDCMCC 2PC-1 (TB2-Jll):
- 1. Position lA, Reactor Feed Pumps Turbine "N" Emergency Oil Pump.
- 2. Position 2A, E. RFPT Emergency Oil Reservoir Dump Valve.
- 3. Position 2B, Turbine Oil Reservoir Dump Valve No.
1.
- 4. Position 2C, Turbine Oil Reservoir Dump Valve No.
2.
- 5. Position 3A, Gland Stream Master Trip Valve.
- 6. Position 3B, Recire Pump M-G Set Emergency oil Pump "C".
- 7. Position 3C Recirc Pump M-G Set Emergency Oil Pump "D".
2.1.17 When time permits, turn off the following loads on 260VDCMCC 2PC-2 (TB2-M2):
- 1. Position IA, Reactor Feed Pump "S" Emergency Oil Pump. l l
- 2. Position 3A, W. RFPT Emergency Oil Reservoir Dump l Valve.
- 3. Position 3B, Loop Seal Oil Reservoir Drain Valve No. 1.
1
- 4. Position 3C, Loop Seal Oil Reservoir Drain Vsive l No. 2. l
- 5. Position 4A Emergency Law Pressure Turbine Hood Spray Cooling Water Pump. l DRAF1
' 20.000.I8 Rsv. O Page 10 s~
2.1.18 Shutdown' Torus Coo 1ing when no longer needed by performirig the following steps:
, . s
- 1. - At Local Control Panel H21-P626 (RB1-F,14) close the following valves: - *
- a. Ell-F024A, Torus CooOng/ Test Isolation
, Valve. '
- b. Ell-F028A, RHR Loop A Containment Spray / Test Isolation Valve.
- 2. At H21-P624, (AB2-G10), stop RHR Pump C by manually tripping breaker C5.-
~
- 3. AtLocalControlPanelH21-P62h'(RB2-E15):
- a. Close Ell-F003A, RHR Heat Exchanger A Discharge Valve.1 *
- b. Open or Verify full 6 hen Ell-F048A, RHR Heat ExchEnger A Bypass Valve. ,,
2.1.19 When Reactor Steam Dome Pressure is below the Reactor Low Pressure SDC Permissive, (<95 psig) place Shutdown Cooling in service using the.following steps:
- 1. At Local Con. trol Panel H21-P625 (RB2-B15) close Ell-F004C',' RHR Pump C Torus Suction Isolation Valve.
- 2. At Local Control Panel H21-P625 open Ell-F006C, RHR Pump C Shutdown Cooling Isolation Valve.
- 3. At Local Control Panel H21-P627 (RB1-All), take local control and close or verify closed Ell-F010, RHR Loop A/B Discharge Crosstie Valve.
- 4. At Local Control Panel H21-P627..(RB1-All), take local control and close B31-F031A, Reactor Recirculation Pump A Discharge Valve.
- 5. At Local Control Panel H21-P625 (RB2-B15), open Ell-F009,, Shutdown Cooling Suction Inboard Isolation Valve.
- 6. Manually open Ell-F008, Shutdown' Cooling Outboard Suction Valve. (RB1-Cl2).
- 7. At 'H21-P624 (AB2-G10) start RHR Puinp C by manually closing breaker C5.
- 8. Control of Cooldown Rate DRAfl -
o a
V *~ 20.000.18 R1v. O PIga 11 NOTE: With Ell-F048A and Ell-F003A fully open, approximately 75% of the flow will pass through the Heat Exchanger gypass Line and the remaining 25% flow will pass through the RHR Heat Exchanger.
- a. To increase cooldown rate, throttle in the
.t open direction, Ell-F003A(B), RHR Heat
' Exchanger Outlet Valve. (This will cause
- more flow to pass through the Heat
< Exchanger.)
- b. To decrease cooldown rate, throttle in the closed direction, Ell-F003A, RHR Heat Exchanger Outlet Valve. (This will cause less flow to pass through the Heat Exchanger.)
- c. To further decrease cooldown rate, throttle in the open direction, Ell-F048A, RHR Heat Exchanger Bypass Valve. (This will cause more flow to pass through the bypass line.)
NOTE: 1 RHRSW pump operation, flow is 5200-5600 GPM.
- d. Record Reactor Vessel temperature and pressure in accordance with General Operating
#22.000.12, " Reactor Heatup, Cooldown and Temperature vs Pressure Monitoring."
2.1.19 When the fire has been extinguished perform the following steps under the direction of the NSS:
- 1. Perform an engineering evaluation to determine the extent of the damage.
- 2. Initiate corrective action to repair all damage.
2.1.20 When all damage that affects the control and operation of equipment has been repaired, return Control from , Loca1' Control Panels to the Main Control Room as l follows:
- 1. At H21-P625 (RB2-B15) turn the Control Transfer Switch to the CONTROL ROOM position.
- 2. At H21-P627 (RB2-All) turn the Control Transfer i Switch to the CONTROL ROOM position. l l
DRAFI _ . _ . _- 3
7
- h -
20.000.1" R7.v. 0 l 'i P:gs 12 l
- 3. At H21-P626 (RB1-G13) turn the control Transfer Switch to the CONTiOL ROOM position, e
- 4. At H21-P628 (AB2-F10) turn the Control, Transfer Switch the CONTROL ROOM position.
- l 1 l
- 5. At iocal Control Panel H21-P624 (AB2-G10), turn '
! the Control Transfer Switch to the CONTROL ROOM position.
- 6. Restore electrical lineups to normal using the electrical lineup sheets for the appropriate l System Operating Procedures.
- 7. Transfer control from the Dedicated Shutdown Panel to the Main Control Room using the 2 transfer switches located on the Dedicated Shutdown Panel ,
H21-P623. 3.0 Subsequent Operator Action - Loss of Offsite Power 3.1 Verify that the plant is separated from the 120 Kv grid by observing the following breakers open at the Dedicated Shutdown Panel, H21-P623: 3.1.1 Brownstrown #1 "GM" 3.1.2 Luzon "GK" 3.1.3 Custer "GD" 3.1.4 Trans #1 LTC output "A" 3.1.5 13.2 Kv Bus fil Feed to DIV I "D" 3.1.6 13.8 Kv Bus #1-2 to 72G "A7" 3.2 Verify CTG 11-1 aligns to the 13.8 KV Peaker Bus 1-2A as follows: 3.2.1 Verify output voltage is .13.2 to 13.8 Kv. 3.2.2 Verify output frequency is 60 Hz. 3.2.3 Verify the A2 breaker closes (auto closure). 1.1. R A F1
= , . , . ..-.,,-.e v - . . . -
-av -
20.000.18 R;v. O P ge 13 ' 3.3 Starting with EDG #12, shutdown all four diesels as follows: I
. l 3.3.1 At the Local Diesel Control Panel, depress,the exciter trip pushbutton. ,
i a 1 3.3.2 Verify the EDG Output Breaker opens. t 3.3.3 Place the EDG in the Maintenance Lockout condition.
.3.4 From the Dedicated Shutdown Panel, verify the A6 Breaker closes (auto closure).
3.5 With the A6 Breaker closed and EDG #12 shutdown, close the C6 Breaker from the Local Control Panel H21-P624 (AB2-G10). 3.6 At H21-P623 align power to Stby Feedwater as follows: 3.6.1 Open BKR W5, Nor feed to 65W. 3.6.2 Clone BKR VI, Nor feed to 64V. 3.6.3 Close BKR V3, 64V to 65W tie breaker. 3.7 Restart standby feedwater pumps as necessary. 3.8 Proceed to Section 2.0 of this procedure to continue plant cooldown. l i 3 RAFT 3
-.-...n...--.--. - - - .
] This copy for temporary. Issue
** ~ '
only per AP. 12.000.02 .- 1703.02 SR IhIO CCpy f;;.t ,, Safety Classification " 53SM only pa7 pp Q E
, -M
.g . ,d
" ' FERMI '2 PROCEDURE - TECHNI 'AL - PERFORMANCE LUATION
- g-Q ' ' ':M.~4 ,*it..:.
~
*< TITLE: -
' THIRD REPOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY
. CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURE NUMBER: 237.000.83 REVISION: 0 ! p* r i m raR a:} n"'m m, ' 'u3 Lea my Name of preparer: Mark R. K1uka ky: h & Date: /0 ~)/-)5 '
r C
' Reviewed /concu* red by: k Date:lOhi{r3 Su%v - O ational Ashurance Approved by: 1 Ilt t Date:/^.'" '
Responsible Section Head or OSRO Member / Alt Further Approval Required for Safety-Related or Superintendent-DesiEnated Procedures: Recommended by: Date: 4 if ':' OSRO Cha rman/ Alternate Approved by: . Superintendent - Nuclear Production Date: /0[F/'.6' The following approved Procedure Change Requests are incorporated in this revision: This revision ]h] does l j does .not constitute periodic review. ! DRAFI l .. o <
. ~ 47.000.83 Rsv. 0
, TABLE OF CONTENTS Page,
. 1.0 Scope and Purpose............................ 1
~
. E.0 Rererences...................................j
, t. . . . :3.0 Pr ere qu i si t es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 2 4.0 Pr e ca uti ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 -
. .- 5.0 Test Equipment............................... 5 6.0 Ini ti al C on di ti ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7.0 Procedure.................................... 8 7.1 Fermi 1 C3600 System Remote (RTU)....... 8 7.2 Fermi 2 C3600 Mas ter (MTU ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 73 Overall System Che cks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2B 7.4 Control Transfer and CTG-11. Unit 1, C3600 System Control Functional Checks. 34 7.5 Fermi 1 120KV Breakers and 13.2 KV Switchgear Control Testing.:........... 48 (2 7.6 Undervoltage Trip Scheme Testing....... 62 7.7 Status Indicator Checks.. .. .......... . . 66 8.0 Accept an ce Cri teri a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 9.0 Return to Normal / Post Test Conditions....... 75 Enclosures Relay Division Test Procedures (091185)...... Enclosure 1 Handling of Semi Conductors (081685)......... Enclosure 2 Undervoltage Relay Manual-CEH 1783B (091185). Enclosure 3 "Draf t" Copy of Dedicated Remote Shutdown Panel Tech. Spe cs . (102785) .. . . . . . . .. . .. . ... . Enclosure 4 Attachments N&TE Log Sheet and Test Personnel Log (081685) Attachment 1 Communication and Transducer Cables (081685). Attachment 2 -
Interconnecting Cable Checklist, 1 Fermi 1 ( 0 816 85 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attachment 3 Power Supplies ( 081685). .. . ... . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . Attachment 4 66 TLM AMP Amplif i ers (081685 ) . . . ... . . . . . . . . . Attachment 5 I 66 ADC A/D Converter (082885)................ Attachment 6 Scaling Resistor Calibra, tion (091785)........ Attachment 7 Status Input Checks (091785 ) . .. . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . Attachment 8 {- Control Input Che cks (091785). . . . . .. ... .. . . . . Attachment 9 LBP/100/R480/1.0 102885 l
~ = .
DRAFT ,
47.000.83 l Rsv. O !
,, Attachments cont'd 1
66 DAC D/A Converter Calibration (091785).... Attachment 10 { 66 DAC D/A Message Correlation (091785)...... Attachment 11 l Pan el Het ers (091785) . . . . . . . .. . . . .: . .... . ... . Attachadnt 12 Status Output Checks ' (091785) . . . . ... . .; . . .... Attachment 13
- . ~ KUP, KUL and Aux 1111ary Relay Checklist '
'. (082885)..................................... Attachment 14 '
i
; , Testing Discrepancy Log Sheet (091785)....... Attachment 15_ l
. . Independent Verification of Post Test " - -
t Conditions (092585)........:............... . Attachment 16
~ , TJndervoltage Trip String Cutoff Switch ,
Che c kl i s t (0925 85 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . Attachment 17 I 294 SCS Control Cutoff Switch Checklist , (082885).....................................- Attachment 18 Undervoltage Trip Scheme Cutoff Switch - - Che ckli st-U .V. Tes t (0828 85 ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attachment 19 Panel Meter Che ck (102485 ) . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . Attachment 20 294 SCS Control Cutoff Switch Checklist (102685)..................................... Attachment 21 1 i l [ DRAFI r
r I 47.000.83 Rev. 0
,, Page 1 1.0 Scope and Purpose 1.1 The scope of this procedure is limited to the Telemetering
. linking of the Third Remote Shutdown Panel at Fermi 2 to CTG-11"1
..< and mat controls at Fermi 1. At Fermi 2 this includes the Master
- - Unit, interconnecting cables, DC power supplies, control
~
switches, meters and interposing relaying. At Fermi 1 this
, .-includes the Remote Unit,. interconnecting cabling DC power
..- . . supplies, interposing relaying and communication cabling. A
.. . 1; -later. functionaLtest [ Plant ~ Operations Manual -(P0H) Procedure,
. . . . 48.000.05, Remote Shutdown Panel (3L) H218-P623 Post-Mod Test, a-reference 2.2.4] of the entire Third Remote Shutdown Panel will
-include actual operation of the CTG-11 switchgear and 120 KV
.. breakers under loss of offsite power conditions. -
2.0 References 2.1 Use References 2.1.1 (POM) Procedure 12.000.12, Tagging and Protective Barrier System - 2.1.2 POM Procedure 12.000.13, Radiation work Permit
.(. '
2.1 3 POM Procedure 12.0'00.15, PN-21 (Work Order) Processing
.. 2.1.4 POM Procedure '12.000.43, verification of Correct Performance Operating Activities
- 2.1.5 POM Procedure 12.000.48 Plant Housekeeping -
2.1.6 POM Procedure 12.000.80, Conduct of Electrical Field Activities n; 9 C T C *> i 5 0 % C* 2.1.7 MIE0018,Nulti Contact Auxiliary Relay 2.1.8 MIE0020. Time Delay Relays 2.1. 9 MIE0024 Electrical Scheme Checkout 2.1.10 L'"' free +r= MIE0041. Electrical Cable and Cable Bus Checkout -
, 2.1.11 EDP1697 Dedicated Shutdown System, Control Panel
, H21'P623 Fabrication and Installation 2.1.12 EDP1701, Dedicated Shutdown System - BOP switchgear and MCC modification, lighting, communications, Supervisory Control Fermi 1 relay room modifiutions,120 KV
(,, switchyard modifications - DRAF1
47.000.83 Rev. 0 Page 2 2.1.13 RFL Industries, Inc Manual, TSVEMD SO C 27697 2.2 Source Documents '5
. _ 2.2.1 '
Vendor Documents .
. .?
- 1. RFL I'ndustries Inc. Drawings
- a. JDDVEND CL 3083 (maries of drawings) I
~
-b., . DDVEND EL -3084J(series.of drawings) !
~ -
- 2. 2.'2 Fermi 2 Technical Spacification 3.3.1Da, 3 3.10b and
'3.7.9b - -
NOTE: Not approved - current "draf t" copy Enclosure 4. 2.2.3 POM Procedure 12.000.07. Plant Operations Manual Procedures - 2.2.4 POM Procedure 48.000.05, Remote Shutdown Panel (3L) H21-P623 Post-Mod)( Test. . 2.2.5 ( EDP1702, Dedicated Shutdown System - Class 1E MCCs and 4160V Switchgear Modifiations, Instrumentation
. Installation and SRY Control Modif1ation 3.0 Prerequisites ,
- 3.1 Test personnel have reviewed the reference material listed in Section 2, and Enclosures of this document.
Verified by/Date 32 The equipment has been stabilized at the ambient temperature and powered for at least 1/2 hour before attempting calibration test. Verified by/Date
~3 3 A Radiation Work Permit has been approved per the requirements of 12.000.13 (Radiation Work Permit), Jteference 2.1.2.
Verified by/Date 34 A TN-21 has been processed 1md " signed on" per 12.000.15 PN ( - (Work Order) Processing, Reference 2.1 3 - - ' Verified by/Date t-
r ~1 47.000.33 RIV. 0 , Page 3 l gp f 35 Assure that the proper valued fuses cf tN propes- ve'tues are 2 available for the system according to the reference dr,awings.
, .i Verified by/Date
_~ 3.4 Proper approva1's-frein the wuelear Shift Supervisor (EF2),
., , j. Operating Authority (EF1), and the Electrical System " Central ,
eSystem Supervisor" have'been obtained.
~ Verified by/Date 4.0 Precautions 4.1 Be careful not to drive the indicating needle more than 10% past full scale on the front indicating panel meters of CDP M11-P811 and H21-P623 This is most likely to occur during calibration of D/A converter units.
4.2 The Test Module has been removed from the units after testing of the system. 4.3 - Be sure that proper Complimentary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) handling practices are used when working on system Printed
. Circuit Boards (PCB). (See Enclosure 2) 4.4- Many potentiometer adjustments have been factory set. Therefore, always obtain an "as found" value of any voltage, current, resistance, or timing measurement when testing the system before changing setting. Adjust these only when required to obtain acceptable test responses.
4.5 When testing the control section of the 3L system or any S1400 sub-system temporarily disable any controls which, if exercised, could cause a hazardous situation, unauthorized control, , inadvertent operation, or could cause damage. This can be 1
- accomplished by use of any.of the following:
- 1. Opening end element links on RTU's
- 2. Disconnecting terminal block links on the RTU's
\
s 3 opening SCS 294 relay flexitest suitches !
- 4. Opening 294 cutoff switches
- 5. Operating the "43" switches (located at peakers) l 1
DRAEi
47.000.83
. Rsv. O
.. Page 4
.. They can be used either singularly or in conjunction with one another. Be sure if any links or switches are used to. return them to normal after testing. - When opening links or s* witches, installing jumpers, lifting wires or any other modifications of i
;; the normal circuit configuration for testing purposes utilize POM '
.. ! Procedure 12.000.80, (Conduct of Electrical Field Activities), .
Reference.2.1.6. . ,;-:;.
. -l:;_ _f
-sit.5$$2$~WW-.
4.4 ' Open (disable),any status ~(indication) circuits which could cause e false . indications to the operator or $dentify so as to avoid
. . confusion. Be sure all. status circuits ye returned to normal after test.
.. . .. c ; , . , n.
4.7 During testing care should' be exercised when applying any voltages to terminal blocks in the control section. 4.8 There should be no atteinpt to remove or bypass any transient suppression devices; such as diodes or Metal Oxide Varistors
. (MOV), unless for replacement due to defect. These devices are installed to prevent transient surges from damaging the system.
4.9 No PC Boards should be removed or replaced unless the appropriate
. power supply is turned off.
(* 4.10 Do not megger or hi pot the de output of any load monitoring
. transducer.
4.11.Do not megger or hi-pot the AB-40 panel meters on CDP H11-P811 or
" H21-P623. Before meggering interconnecting cable, short the-terminals of the effected COP H11-P811 and H21-P623 panel meters with a test jumper. ** -
4.,12 Do not open circuit the secondary of an energized current
- transformer (C.T.).
4.13 Do not apply test potential to any energized CT, Fotential Transformer (P.T.) or control circuit. 4.14 Test equipment used during the performance of MIEs associated with this test will be logged on the MIE forms, all other equipment will be logged in Attachment 1. 4.15 All test personnel parforming any portion of this test will document their participation .by logging in on Attachment 1. Initials and date will be sufficient for signing off steps, except where specified. 4.16 All persons working on this test must fully understand their assigned task and understand its impact on the system and plant conditions. Any actions which effect systems outside the C3600 system must be approved per discussion with the Control Room NSO before proceeding. DRAET
I 47.000.83 RIv. 0
. Page 5 l
~
4.17 Any discrepancies encountered during testing must be documented on Attachment 15. All discrepancies must be evaluated by the Plant Support Engineer for impact on the system the pYant and **A. .
; the test procedure, before the test can beTcompleted. When- -
necessary to avoid undesirable conditions the testing sust be
- !. . stopped until the. discrepancy is resolved. It may also be l
- desirable to stop testing if the discrepancy can be readily '
.- resolved thus avoiding extensive retesting Inter'.
< 4.18 The contr.o1 of the affected equipment shall be returned to the .
. Fermi 2 Control Room at the end of each testing period, unless it I
--1s absolutely unavoidable. If the test is stopped for any reason the Control Room NSO must be advised of where control is possible and of any limitations in control / status.
4.19 Obtain personnel protection per POM Procedure 12.000.12 (Tagging
. and Protective Barrier System), Reference 2.1.1. -
4.20 Maintain a clean work area per POM Procedure 12.000.48 (Plant Houseke.eping), Reference 2.1.5. - 4.21 This test can only be run in Condition 4 COLD SHUTDOWN, Condition 5 REFUELING, and can not be run when handling irradiated fuel. 5.0 Test Equipment Instrument fiange Accuracy Digital Multimeter (DMM) Various + .25 (Fluke 8600 or equivalent) Yull Scale (F.S.) Dual-Trace Oscilloscope 'Various 1 55 sweep (Tektronics T922 or equivalent) AC Voltmeter Various + 15 (HP 3400 or equivalent) Full Scale (F.S.)
- Audio Signal Generator Various + 15 (HP 201C or equivalent)
- Variable Frequency Generator Various (Multi-Amp FG-50-DM or
~
~
equivalent) The following equipment will be used at Enrico Fermi 1 site only. Tht.y will be used to calibrate and test non-QA Level I equipment. These instruments will not be under the Enrico Fermi 2 calibration and certification program. { ORAH
I 47.000.B3 R:v. 0 Page 6 ( DC Digital Voltage and Current Source -
+ 0-20 V DC + .015 -.
(Datel DVC-8500 or ~
* ~'
equivalent) -
+ Oe-20 MA + .015
.! Transducer Calibrator . . Various + .5%
Amp Meter Various
+ .55 (Multi-Amp - Model 135-B -
. or equivalent)
Watt Meter Various + .55 (Multi-Amp - Model 115 ~ or equivalent) -- 600 ohm 1/2 Watt Resistor -- - 15 6.0 Initia1 Conditions . 6.1 Verify that the plant is in Operating Condition 4 or operating Condition 5 and that irradiated fuel is not being handled. Verified by/Date 6.2 Be sure that the "P1" Jacks (yellow) are used for the Transmit and Receive Communication Path. Verified by/Date 6.3 Verify that the power supplies, listed below, are turned off at both the Master and Remote Stations. 6.3.1 Master station
- a. BIKOR Verified by/Date
- b. 68 HPS 129DC-1 Verified by/Date
- c. Sorenson
' Verified by/Date 6.3.2 Remote Station
- a. BIKOR
; Verified by/Date DRAE1
1
. 47.000.83 l R;v. O I Page 7 ) 1
;. b. 68 HPS 129DC-1 '*
- Veritled by/Date 6.4 open an status links. Iisted below at EFI.
- a. A2 Breaker status "
" Verified by/Date-i'
- b. AS Breaker status '
'~ Verified by/Date
- c. A7 Breaker status , ,,
Verified by/Date
- d. B6 Breaker status Verified by/Date
- e. A Breaker status Verified by/Date
- f. B Breaker status Verified by/Date 3 C Breaker status Verified by/Date
- h. D Breaker status Verified by/Date
- 1. GH-S.B. 101-102 status *
*'~
. Verified by/Date
- j. GD Custer Line status Verified by/Date
- k. OM Brownstown Line status Verified by/Date
- 1. UK Luzon Line status Verified by/Date
- m. 120 KV Breakers Closed
' Verified by/Date
. n. Control Transferre,d Verified by/Date
- o. CTG-11-1 Start ~
Verlfled by/Date
- p. CTG-11-1 Stop
( Verified by/Date DRAFI
.; 47.000.83 R;v. O Page B
- q. CTG 11-1 Avail /Rdg to Start
- Vertfled by/Date
-.,_ I '
r.- CTG-11-1 Seq in Progress - Verified by/Date 4 s.. Bus 1-2 Bus Energized
., Verified by/Date t Bus ~ 11 Bus Energized Verified by/Date
- u. Bus 101 Bus Energized Verified by/Date
- v. Bus 102 Bus Energized Verified by/Date 6.5 Verify the calibration due date on the test equipment has not expired.
' Verified by/Date
.( 7.0, Procedure NOTE: This procedure is laid out in a logical sequence which is
.the ideal order of testing. Circumstances may make it desirable to alter the order of testing or perform work in several sections concurrently. This may be done at the concurrence of the Responsible PSE, the Test Leader, and Operations in order to speed testing, make efficient use of manpower and take advantage of existing plant conditions.
It is the responsibility of the Test Leader to keep the NSS and NSO informed of testing impact upon the plant. 7.1 Fermi 1 C3600 System Remote (RTU)
- 7.1.1 Mechanical and visual tests - verify that:
- 1. Verify that there is no physical damage to the components or hardware of the Remote Unit, or the input and output devices.
Verified by/Date 7.1.2 Cable and Scheme Tests
- 1. Testing of Communication Path 2 l
1* 17.000.83 6 RI;v. O
. Page 9 NOTE: Being sure that the. Initial Condition 6.1 has been observed.
- a. Test Path 2. "P2" Jacks (blue), using
, MIE0041, (Electrical Cable and Cable Bus Checkoot), Reference 2.1.10.
'II.. ~ ~ Verified by/Date
.. ..- b. Loop the T' ransmit and Receive pair at the opposite end on the same system. Send a 1000HZ signal at O dba over the Transmit Line with the signal generator. Read the returning signal with the AC voltmeter and a 600 Ohm 1/2 watt 15 resistor connected in parallel across the Receive pair. Record the reading on Attachment 2. Verify that the loss is less than 20 dbm.
~
Verified by/Date
- c. Loop the Path 2 Transmit and Phone Line #2 Pair.
Verified by/Date NOTE: Being sure that the Initial Condition 6.1 has been observed.
- d. Test Path 2, "P2" Jacks (blue), using MIE0041, (Electrical Cable and Cable Bus Checkont), Reference 2.1.10.
Verified by/Date
- e. Send a 1000HZ signal at O dbm over the Transmit Line with the signal generator.
Read the returning signal with the AC voltmeter and a 600 Ohm 1/2 watt 15 resistor connected in parallel across the Phone pair. Record the . reading on Attachment 2. Verify , that the loss is less than 20 dbe. Verified by/Date
. 2. Testing of Communication Path 1
( - 0RAB
- a. s .... .
47.000.83 Riv. 0
. Page 10
- a. Change the Transmit and Receive Communication
. Paths at the Master (EF2) and Remote (EF1) stations from P1 (yellow) to P2 (blue). -
! \
- h. ;W
{Ih' ' ~ Verified by/Date ..
- ' f7 _ '. .
. . . b.. . Loop the Transmit and Receive pair at the
_ . opposite end. on the same system. Send a
,J 1000HZ ' signal at 0 dba over the Transmit Line
, with the , signal generator. Read the returning signal with the AC voltmenter and a
, 600 Ohm 1/2 watt' 15 resistor connected in parallel across the Receive pair. Record the reading on Attachment 2. Verify that the loss is less than 20 dbs.
Verified by/Date
- c. Loop the Path 1 Transmit and Phone Line #1 pair. -
Verified by/Date
- d. Being sure that the Initial Condition 6.1 has been observed, test Path 1 "P1" . jacks -
(yellow), using POM Procedure MIE00!it, (Electrical Cable and Cable Bus Checkout). Reference 2.1.10. Verified by/Date e .- Send a 1000HZ signal at D dbm over .the Transmit Line with the signal generator. Read the returning signal with the AC voltaeter and a 600 Ohm 1/2 watt 15 resistor cannected in parallel across the Phone pair. Record the reading on Attachment 2. Verify that the loss is less than 20 dbm. Verified by/Date
- f. Return the Phone and Transmit and Receive paths tiack to P1 (yellow).
Verified by/Date DRAfl
, 47.000.83 Esv. O Pcge 11 k
~
7 3 Transducer Cables & Scheme (Analog Inputs) CAUTION ,
, Do not apply test potential 4,o energized or operating equipment. -
p . 2 1. Perform the following as required when testing l l cables listed on: Attachment 2.
. ,a ., .
- a. Verify all equipment is disconnected from the cable being tested.
NOTE:. .The "3L" System shares transducers and cables with SCADA System and 1 the EF1-EF2 Telemetering System. The Electrical System Central , System Supervisor should be l notified whenever there will be a loss of SCADA telemetering capability due to testing of the 3L System. . (.. b. Notify the Central System Supervisor that there will be a loss of SCADA telemetering capability due to testing of the 3L System, (if applicable),
- c. Test all transducer cables, listed on Attachment 2 per MIE 0041 Reference 2.1.10.
- 2. All cables listed on Attachment 2 successfully tested and reterminated.
Verified by/Date 7.1.4 Interconnection Cables and Schemes
- 1. All interconnecting cables ano schemes Lee to be checked using the following Maintenance
. Instructions:
, a. MIE0018, Multi Contact Auxiliary Relays.
Reference 2.1.7 (Sign Off required on Attachment 14)
- b. MIE0024, Electrical Scheme Checkout, Reference 2.1.9 DRAF1
y
^ .,. 47.000.83 R;v. O Page 12 h
c.. HIE 0041. Electrical Cable and Cable Bus Checkout. Reference 2.1.10 (Signoff is required in Attachment *3) NOTE: The SCS 294 relays have been previo[usly tested and will be retested only upon the
.1 specific request of the Responsible PSE per
. Er; closure 1 (Relay Division Manual of Test
- Procedurea; Section XI Article 9 " Detroit
_ . . Edison. Type SCS Relay Acceptance and
; -- Operational Tests' and Article 11 ' Detroit s , . Edison SCSa3 Relay Acceptance Test and Operational Tests").
'1. CTO-11-1 Control and Status -
Verified by/Date
- 2. Overall 3L Supervisory Verified by/Date 3 Undervoltage Trip Scheme
( Verified by/Date
- a. Scheme check Verified by/Date
- b. Test and set the undervoltage relay to settings from Relay Division (Return signed copies of settings sheet to Lead Plant Support Engineer - Electrical when complete) per the manufacturers instructions, Enclosure 3
Verified by/Date 7.1.5 Power Supplies , l
- 1. 68 HPS 129 DC-1 Power Supply
- a. Turn the power supply switch to the '0FF" position.
Verified by/Date DRAfl
.' 47.000.83 R v. 0
, Page 13
(
- b. Put 'the power supply on a card extender.
~'
Verified by/Date
, c. Install the properly specificed fuse in FL1 s
l: and close the fuse link. - -
-~~i - .7 . ;, ~~ ~ ~ Verified by/Date
- d. Using a DMM meast$re the voltage between edge i
.- connector ~ pin 22 (GND) and pin 21 (+129). l Record below. *
- l VDC MTE No. '
Verified by/Date
- e. Verify that the voltage recorded above (step 7.1.5.1.D) is between 104 VDC and 140 VDC.
Nominal reading is 129VDC. If the reading is below 104 VDC, notify the Operating Authority (EF1) that the station battery voltage is low. If the reading is above 129 VDC notify the Operating Authority that the voltage is high. Verified by/Date
- f. Turn the power supply switch to the DN position.
, Verified by/Date
- g. Connect a DMM and measure the voltage between edge connector pin 2 (O VDC) to pin 4 (+12 VDC) and then between pin 2 to pin 9 (*12 VDC). Record the as found values on
- Attachment 4.
Verified by/Date NCTIE: Each output should be between 11.4 and 12.6 VDC. There is no adjustment to this supply. If raadings are outside acceptable values, then the power supply must be brought within tolerance (Refer t'o RFL System Manual, Document Control ( #TSVEND SO C 27697), reference 2.1.13 DRAF1
47.000'83 R:v. O Page 14 t
- h. Power supply "As Left" condition within the acceptable range.
~.I Verified by/Date
- 1. Turn the power supply switch to the DFF position and return the card to the rack.
' Verified by/Date
- 2. 129 VDC to +24 VDC BIKOR Power Supply .
l
- a. Verify that the power supply is off.
Verified by/Date
- b. Verify that F1, F2, and F3 of the Power Supply have the proper specified fuse inserted in accordance with the reference drawings. F1' F2 and F3 are located on the top panel of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU).
( Verified by/Date l c. Put the PC board, location (C17) on a card I extender. *
' Verified by/Date
- d. Turn the power supply switch "S1" on the BIKOR supply to the "0N" position.
Verified by/Date
- e. Verify that the DC OUT light, located on the top panel on the RTU, is 111tninated.
~
Verified by/Date
.f . Using a DMM measure the voltage between terminal 4 (+) and terminal 3 (-) located on the BIKOR supply. Record the value on Attachment 4. \.
Verified by/Date
r 47.000.83 R;v. O P ge 15 l ( NOTE: The output should be between 19.2 and ; 28.8 VDC. There is no adjustment to this supply. If readings are Dutside acceptable values, then the power supply must be brought within . tolerance. (Refer to RFL System Manual. Document Control #TSVEND.SO C 27697), reference
~~
. . 2.1.13. <.
. g. Power supply *As lef t* condition within the acceptable range.
~
Verified by/Date
- h. Turn the power supply switch on "S1" to the "OFF" position and return the PC board to the rack.
Verirled by/Date 7.1.6 Analog Section
-( 1. 66 TLM AMP Amplifiers (multiple amplifiers are on the card) (Record Data on Attachment 5 as
~
required) _ a. Remove the 66 TLM AMP card from the chassis (location C-13) and reinstall it on an extender card. Verified by/ Data.
- b. Turn on the 68HPS 129DC-1 power supply.
Verified by/Date
- c. Perform the following actions as required h meM e va a functional ".h- Lef t,"
ccr.dition) for each of the amplifiers listed on Attachment
' '5.
Cena et a. D M M
- 1) Nonitor input levels at the front of the card using the yellow (+) and the gray
(-) test jacks.
\
. J
r
,. 47.000.83 R3v. O Page 16 r
Ceeccet a. W m
- 2) M6nitor output levels between the white (com) and blue (HI) test points which are at the top of the card. ;-
- 3) 'To set-the zero (bias) of the amplifiers
. perform the following i , .. ' a) . . Connect a voltage source set at ti;E 0.000 VDC ~+.5mV to the input of the 3k; Jaaplifier.
2 C".N'
" ..b) < - Using'f .
- measure the voltage a DMM
' . output reading and record the 'As
- found" reading, the reading should.
be 0.000 VDC31aV. c) If the output reading is unaceptable adjust the bias potentiometer to achieve proper reading. JI) To set the gain of the amplifier perform the following steps: a) Set the voltage source for 1.000 VDC11mV and record the output ,"As Found", the reading should be 2.000 1 005 VDC. b) Set the voltage source for -1.000 VDC 11mV and record the output "As Found" the reading should be ~2.000 1 005 VDC. c) If the gains are out of tolerance adjust the 1*u11 scale gain potentiometer for the amplifier to achieve the proper gain.
- 5) Repeat steps 7.1.6.1.c.1) through 4) until both zero* bias and gain adjustments are within tolerance record
*As Lef t" values when complete.
. a) All amplifiers listed in Attachment
. 5 have been successfully adjusted.
Verified by/Date
?-
DRAFI
r- a f ,* 47.000.83 R;v. O
- Page 17
~.. .
( b) Remove the 66 TLM AMP card from the extender card and insert in its position (C-13). 8
* ~
' Verified by/Date -
;}
*. c) Turn power supply 68HPS 129DC-1 gg, - -
' '~~
. Verified by/Date
- 2. 66 ADC A/D Converter (Record Data on Attachment 6 as required)
NOTE: "X" will be tested first then *Y" will be tested.
- a. Verify that the 68 HPS 129 DC-1 power supply if OFF, then remove the'*X" 66*ADC A/D converter from location (C17) mount it on an ,
extender card and reinsert. (t b. Disconnect the inputs signals by removing the Verified by/Date 66 A!CX cards from the following positions.
- 1) Location C15, 66 AMUX card removed.
Verified by/Date
- 2) Location C20, 66 AMUX card removed.
Verified by/Date
- c. Turn the 68 HPS 129DC-1 power supply "0N".
Verified by/Date i
- d. Check and adjust the balance calibration by I performing the following actions:
l l DRAF1 _, , . , , ,_~.---w-- -
r
- , 47.000,83 R:v. 0
, Page 18
- 1) Install a test jumper between TP1 (green) and TP2 (gray). -
"X" card , , ,
"Y" c rd Verified by/Date . Verified by/Date 2 .2) Connect an isolated, ungrounded 60112, 2Vp p signal from TP1 (green) to TP4 (white). *
"X" card "Y" card Verified by/Date Verified by/Date
- 3) connect an oscilloscope to TP3 (orange HI) and TP4 (white LO) and record "As Found" data hbmere & plo *- t "X" card F' "Y" card Verified by/Date Verified by/Date
- 4) Adjust the balance potentiometer until the oscilloscope indicates minimum AC voltage, record the "As Lef t" data (Vp-p). 6 td ach m e. 4; pa y i l "X" card "Y" card Verified by/Date Verified by/Date
'5) Remove the A.C source.
"X" card "Y" card Verified by/Date Verified by/Date
- 6) Disconnect the oscilloscope.
"X" card "Y" card Verified by/Date ~ Verified by/Date g 7) Remove the test jtanper.
"X" card "Y" card DRAF V.,1,1.d ,,,D.t. V.,1,1.d ,,,..t.
r 47.000.83 R;v. O P ge 19 1 ( e. Check and adjust the Span and Bias per the Vendors Manual. RFL Industries, Inc. Manual l TSVEND SO C 27697, Reference 2.1 13 and by ! performing the actions authorized'below as
.. required. . pp y c.,g.,p,.
- ;d.: .._ ;. ;--
_. :
- 1) ,
Connect a stable and adjustable DC 2 voltage source across the input
. terminals 5,(?,).,and 6 (+) of the base board *ggy :y.l& - ..;
X" card ' 'l ,,] 'Y" card
~~ Verified by/Date Verified by/Date
- 2) Short terminal 4 to 5 with a test j umper.
*X" card "Y" card Verified by/Date Verified by/Date
- 3) Install at DMM to monitor input level
(. across TP1 (green +) and TP2 (gray-).
"X" card "Y" card Verified by/D&E Verified by/Date
- 4) Put the 66 Sequencer Module (location B27) Test-Operate switch in the test position and manually step to channel
#0.
"X" card "Y" card Verified by/Date Verified by/Date
- 5) Perform the following functions for each of the input levels listed on Attachment 63 p 9 6 2.
*X" card "Y" card Verified by/Date Verified by/Date ilRM1 j
~~*
47.'000.83 R",v. 0 Page 20 a) Monitor the digital output with the , Test Module and convert its binary l
. output to decimal per page 3 of
. Attachment 6.
"X" card ,
"Y" card l "Yerified by/Date ~
Ver1Tled by/Date b) Adjust the Span and Bias until-the digital and analog values agree,
- record the binary value on Attachment 6.
"X" card "Y" card Verified by/Date Verified by/Date
- 6) Turn the power supply 68HPS 129DC=1 0FF.
. "X" card "Y" card Vertried by/Date Vertfled by/Date
~
Turn off the voltage source then remove. 7)
~
"X" card _
"Y" card Ver1 Tied by/Date Verified by/Date B) Remove the test ju:Lper between termina'.s 4 and 5.
"X" card ._
"Y" card Verified by/Date Verified by/Date
- f. Remove the "X" 66 ADC A/D converter and extender card, then reinsert without the extender card into location C17.
Verified by/Date k, DRAF1 e .
~- 47.000'83 R3v. O
,- Page 21
. g.- Remove t.ie "Y" 6f ADC A/D converter from location C22. mount on an extender card and reinsert. .
s-
^ ~
. Verified by/Date l
' - h. . Check and adjust the balance of the "Y" card
.. . - .-c per steps 7.1.6.2.c and d.
- 1. Check and adjust the Span and Bias of the "Y" card per step 7.1.6.2.e.
Verified by/Date
.1 Remove the "Y" 66 ADC A/D converter and extender card and reinsert without the extender card.
. Verified by/Date
(-' k. Reinstall the 66 AMUX cards in the following locations:
- 1) location C15 66 AMUX card reinstalled.
Verified by/Date
- 2) Location C20 66 AMUX card reinstalled.
Verifled by/Date
- 1. Put the 66 Sequencer Module Test Operate Switch into the Operate position.
Verified by/Date 3 Turn the power supply switch on the 68 HPS 129 DC-1 to the ON position.
' Verified by/Date
(- 4. Scaling Resistor Calibration DRAF1
F: - i* . . 47.000.83 s R;v. O
., Page 22
( a. Perform these steps for each "Used" Customer Terminal Point (CTP) listed on Attachment 7 (Record data on Attachment 7) ,
, 1) Disconnect the transducer input to the (CTP).
~
- 2) L Connect a DC milliamp source across analog CTP.irput.
gy .<. y .
- 3) Connect a DMM across the scaling resistor to monitor voltage.
- 4) Ap ly the indicated mA input current.
- 5) Adjust khe scaling resistor to achieve a 2.0,00V1001 Y reading record the
, reading.
- 6) Using the test module in its assigned location verify message correlation.
note (/) on Attachment 7.
- 7) Turn off the current source and detach.
( B) Remove the DMM from the scaling resistor.
- 9) Reconnect the a.Mdog CTP.
- b. Verify that all "Used" analog CTPs returned to' normal .,
S Verified by/Date
- c. Verify that all used Scaling Resistor calibrations are "As Lef t" satisfactory per Attachment 7 Verified by/Date 7.1.7 Status Inputs
. 1. Ferform the following actions to check status inputs for all used inputs listed on Attachment 8.
- 4. Connect a test jtanper across the CTP (one at a time). .
DRAF1
- s. 47.000.83 R:v. O P28e 23
(- b. Verify Message Correlation and Initial the appropriate spot on Attachment 8. c.- Remove the test jumper. I
- 2. Verify that all test jumpers are removed from all
, m - CTPs listed on Attachment 8.
j' - e s .:~~ ~ Verified by/Dat e 3 All used status inputs listed on Attachment 8 have correct message correlation.
~
Verified by/Date 7.2 Fermi 2 C3600 System (MTU) Mechanical and visual checks 7.2.1 Verify that there is no physical damage to the components and the hardware for the Master Unit or its input and output devices. Verified by/Date NOTE: The construction of the Supervisory Control portion of the Third Remote Shutdown Panel is described in EDP 1697 and 1701 which should be reviewed before attempting to scheme check the Supervisory Control Circuits. (References 2.1.11 and 2.1.12 respectively). 7.2.2 Perform scheme and cable checks for the circuits listed below: NOTE: All cables and schemes are to be checked using the following maintenance instructions:
- a. MI-E0024. Electrical Scheme Checkout, Reference 2.1.9.
- b. MI-E0041, Electrical Cable and Bus
, Checkout, Reference 2.1.10.
. 1. 13.2 kV Breaker Control and Eus #11 Status (EDP 1701 item 47).
( Verified by/Date DRAF1
47.000.B3 Rev. 0 Page 24 ( 2. 120 kV Breaker Control and Bus 101*-102 Status (EDP 1701 item 46).
-5
, . Verified by/Date 3 CTG-11-1 Control and Supy Control Transfer (EDP
,, 1701* item 48).
. : " Verifi2d by/Date 4.- Fermi-2 3L initiated alarms (EDP 1701 item 11)
Verified by/Date
- 5. CTG-11-1 Metering at H21-P623 Verified by/Date
- 6. H21-P623, P3601P001 - Supervisory Control Panel Power Distribution.
Verified by/Date 7.2 3 Ch.eck of Remote Shutdown Panel (H21*P623) Meters
- 1. Check all indicating panel meters on panel H21-P623, listed on Attachment 20, by performing the following steps for each meter:
- a. Disconnect the meter and apply a DC milliacp signal to the meter per the values listed on Attachment 20.
Verified by/Date
- b. Verify that with 100% full scale signal applied, the. Indicating panel meter is within 1 4.0% of full scale. Record the readings on Attachment 20.
l Verified by/Date !
, c. Verify each of the following meter {
( are reconnected when the test is finished. ' 0 URAF1
47.000.83 R;v. O l P ge 25
)
- 1) CTG-11-1 Voltage Verified by/Date 2)- CTG-11*1 Frequency --
t *
. . < ..~ . [ ..' verified by/Date
~ ~ . . --..%. " ' k x. s .
.3) CTG-11-1 Watts -
~ '^
Vertried by/Date
- 4) CTG-11-1 Vars Ver1rted by/Date 7.2.4 Power Supplies
- 1. 68 HPS 129DC-1 Power Supply
- a. Verify that the power supply is off Verified by/Date
- b. Put the power supply on a card extender.
Verified by/Date
- c. Install the properly specified fuse in FL1 and close the FL1 link.
Verified by/Date
- d. Using a DMM measure the voltage between edge connector pin 22 (GND) and pin 21 (+129).
Record be3 ow. . - ' ~ VDC MTE No. Verified by/Date
- e. Verify that the voltage recorded above (step 7.2.4.1d) is between 104 VDC and 140 VDC.
Nominal reading is 129 VDC. If the reading ( , la below 104 VDC, notify the Nuclear Shif? DRAFI
2 3 47.000.83 R,v. 0
. Page 26 Supervisor that the station battery voltage is low. If the voltage is above 140VDC notify the Nuclear Shift Supervisor that the voltage is high. *
. VerifLed by/Date
. f. Turn the power supply switch to the ON
. position.
~' Verified by/i; ate
~
- g. Connect a DMM and measure the voltage between edge connected pin 4 (O VDC) to pin 2
(+12 VDC) and then between pin 4 to pin 9 (*12 VDC). Record the as found. values on Attachment 4. Verified by/Date NOTE: Each output should be between 11.4 and 12.6 VDC. There is no adjustment to (- this supply. If readings are outside acceptable values, then the power supply must be brought within tolerance (Refer to RFL System Manual. Document Control l
#TSVEND SO C 27697. Reference 2.?_1.2). i 7 e I .'ll I.
- h. Power supply "As Lef t" condition within the acceptable range.
Verified by/Date
- 1. Turn the power supply switch to the DFF position and return the car d to the rack.
Verified by/Date
- 2. 129 VDC to +24 VDC BIKOR Power Supply l
- a. Verify that the BIKDR supply is 'DFF". j l
Verified by/Date t ilRAfl .. ~.
47.000.83 Rsv. 0
', Pag 3 27
- b. Verify that F1, F2 and F3 of the Power Supply have the proper specified fuse Inserted. (F1 - F2 - 1.5 amps, F3 - 4 amps).
, Verified by/Date
[~
- c. Put the PC board, on a card artender.
.~ -
' .~~
Verifled by/Date 4
- d. Turn the power supply switch "S1" on the BIKOR aupply to the ON position.
- 1) BIKOR - ON
' ' Verified by/Date
- 2) 68 HPS 129DC ON ~
Verified by/Date
- e. Verify that the DC OUT 11gh't, located on the middle panel of each master station, is 111uminated.
( Verified by/Date
- f. Using a DMM measure the voltage between terminal 4(+) and terminal 3(-) on the BIKOR supply. Record the value on Attachment 4.
NOTE: The output should be between 11.4 and 12.6 VDC. There is no ** adjustment to this supply. If readings are outside acceptable values, then the power supply must be brought within tolerance (f.efer to RFL System Manual Document
, Control #TSVEND SO C 27697).
. reference 2.1.13
- g. Power supply "As Left" condition is within the acceptable range.
Verified by/Date
- h. Turn the power supply switch "S1" on the BIKOR supply to the *0FF" position and return the PC board to the rack.
~
Verified by/Date : l DRAFT
. 47.000.83 R;v. O Page 2B
( 3 130 - 24 VDC Sorensen Bench Board Power supplies
- a. Using a DMM read the voltage between the ,
output terminals (O VDC & + 24VDC). Record the values on Attachment 4.
~-...
3 Verified by/Date
. _. n' NOTE: - The output should be between 23.4 and
. . 24.6 VDC. There is no adjustment to
- this supply. If readings are outside acceptable values, then the power supply must be brought within tolerance (Refer to RF1, System Manual. Document Control dTSVEND SD C 27697, reference 2.1.13).
- b. Power supply "As Left" condition is within the acceptable range.
a
~
Verified by/Date
- c. Turn the power supply switches of 68 HPS '
129DC-1 and BIKOR Supplies to the "0N" (- position. I Verified by/Date 73 overall System check 7.3 1 control Inputs CAUTION When testing 'the control section of any portion of the C3600 system or S1400 subsystem temporarily disable any controls which, if exercised, could cause hazardous situation, unautholzed control, Anadvertent operation, or could cause damage.
- 1. Verify the P1.1acks (yellow) for the Transmit and Receive Communication Path for each system at both the Master and Remote ends are used.
Verified by/Date 2. (' Obtain proper approvals from the Nuclear ' Shift DRAf1 ~ - -
47.000'83 R;v. O
. Page 29 Supervisor (EF2), Operating Authority (EF1) and the Electrical System " Central System Supervisor"
. mi for the following step. -
.. . Verified by/Date NOTE-: -$ Observe all pertinent precautions listed
... .in Section.14 of this procedure.
- v. .
. 3.- Operate each control switch and verify that the proper message is being sent by using the test module at the Master unit. Check against Attachment 9. Do this for each control input listed on Attachment 9.
~
Verified by/Date 7 3.2 System communication
- 1. DJsable peaker controls and open all Type 2914 cut of f switches listed on Attachment 21.
( Verified by/Date
- 2. Observe that at the Remote Station that the Light Emiting Diodes (LED's) on the 66 Sequencer Card are being turned on and off and not just staying in one state.
Verified by/Date 3 Disconnect the communication path between EF1 and EF2. Do this by taking the " Patch Cord" out of the "P1" communication Jacks (yellow) at the Master unit. Verified by/Date JI. Verify that the Dedicated Shutdown Supv. Control Trouble (Alarm 11D53 Seq. Rec. 002C36) alarm on the COP R1fP811 annunciator alarms.
~' Yerifled by/Date
(
- 5. Reinsert the " Patch Cord" at the Master Station l
\
DRAFT
. 47.000.83 RIV. 0 P2ge 30 i
. 1 and repeat the test only at the Remote Station.
This should result in the same indication on the ,l
-COP H11-P811 annunciator panel. l
^'
'~ Verified by/Date )
S. 6. Close the ,294 SCS cutoff switches listed on Attachment 21.
~
- , l j
Ver1 Tied by/Date 7.3.3 Analog Section
- 3. ' Test each 66 DAC D/A converter, listed on Attachment 10, using the following steps:
- a. 66 DAC D/A Converter - Balance NOTE: These amplifiers are factory set.
Verification for each converter being balanced is to be performed on Attachment 30. (. 1) Record the *AS FOUND" readings for each converter on Attachment 10.
.2) Check the symmentry setting on the 66 DAC boards.
- 3) - Connect a DMM between the common test point, TP1 (white), and the *VR test point. TP4 (gray). Measure and record
. the voltage on Attachment 10.
NOTE: The readings should be -6.24 volts DC (+ .32 VDC). Jil) Move the DMM Hi Lead from the TP4 to the
+VR test point, TP3 (orange). The ;
reading should show the same voltage (+ ~
.5 mV) but with the opposite polarity.
NOTE- Slight calibration adjustments j may be made with the R9 : potenticester which is on the front of the analog board. 1
- 5) Record the *AS LEFT" values on Attachment 10.
t.
~
DRAf1
47 000183 RIv. 0
-. Page 31
- 6) All test jumpers and test equipment are removed.
~
Verified by/Date e
- I ' 7). All "As Left" values within tolerance.
..~. . . T. ,9-l :~: .
b:.t-(4 :"Qgu ,; . ' Verified by/Date
- b. 66 DAC D/A Converter.* Epan and Bias NOTE: - The Span and bias settings are factory set. Verification for each converter being tested is to be performed on Attachment 10.
- 1) Disconeet the panel meter and connect a DMM across the output terminals, listed on Attachment 10, of the Master station to monitor the DC milliamp output current.
- 2) Connect a DC milliamp source to the CTP listed on Attachment 10 at the Remote Stations.
- 3) Check the Span and Bias control settings in the following maru:ee a) Switch the input current at the Remote station from 1.0 made 1 25 micro-ampdc to e1.0 made + .25 micro-ampdc. -
b) Record "As Found" readings on Attachment 10. c) Adjust the Span and Bias at the Master until the error is zero (+ l
.015) at those points.
l N:TTE: Span and Bias settings l are adjustable with the potentilometers (R23 and R14) which are on the ; front of the analog board. Their setting is a " trial and error" process. (, d) Record "AS LEF7" values on Attachment 10.
47.000.83 R:;v. O
,, , Pcge 32 k
- c. Message Correlation 1)
Using the same test set up as it) step 7.3 31.a verify the proper digital 4
, , coding'using the test modules at the
~.* ' Master and Remote Stations. (Sign off Attachment 11 page b)
E
*'. W *^ Merified by/Date
- 2) Monitor and record the DC milliamp output at the MTU for each current input indicated at the RTU on Attachment 113 p,, . .
I L L, ' Verified by/Date
- 3) Whe'n testing is completed, reconnect the panel meters and disconnect the test equipment.
__ Verified by/Date Load Test (Perform while CTG-11-1 is operating) 2. NOTE: The load test will verify that H21-P623 panel meters have the correct values with respect to the equipment being monitored. Also, that the analog point has the correct message correlation for each telemetered quantity listed on Attachment 12. .
- a. Put the 66 Sequencer Module,-Test-Operate Switch into the test position and manually step to the selected channel.
' Verified by/Date
- b. Monitor the inliut to the telemetered quantity transducer with a watt meter, voltmeter,
, current meter or frequency meter (as l appropriate for the value wanted). Record j the readings on Attachment 12.
Verified by/Date DRAfl
- -. e.-- l
- ar a ,
,o. .,
e ~. 47.000.83
- R3v. 0 Page 33 k
- c. Verify that H21-P623 panel meters are within f,45 of expected meter reading of thei telemetered quantity and are indicating the proper flow direction. . Record the readings
, on Attachment 12. , a *
.,.m"*
_ , ~, : Q . 2. J - . .;.;7;U " Verified by/Date
.. 7 ' QR.
w ..y $5l. -
- d.; Short the input etrrent to the to each transducer using an appropriate test switch and verify that the panel meters go to zero,
-open the shorting switch when complete.
Verified by/Date
- e. Return 66 Sequencer Module Test-Operate switch to normal.
Verified by/Date ' 3 status NOTE: This test will verify proper correlation between status inputs at the Remote Station to the status indication lights on the H21-P623 at the Master Station.
- a. For all status points on Attachment 13 simulate a status change for monitoring device. Perform the following steps for each point listed on Attachment 13
- 1) Monitor the status messages at both the MTU and RTU using the test modules. l l
- 2) . Verify that the proper status message
. format is being sent and received. I
- 3) Verify that the proper status lights are 1111aninated on H21-P623
-4) Simulate a change by opening a status point or shorting the input as appropriate.
. 5) Verify that the status output switches
( at the MTU are properly wired and labeled. DRAH
- - - ~
c -.
47.000.83 R;v. O
- Page 34 i
- a. 'All status points returned to normal.
, [ Verified by/Date
- b. -All points listed on Attachment 13 tested 4 suc.cessfully. -
.'I 7 Y Verified by/Date 7.4 Control Transfer and CTG-11.. Unit 1 C3600 system Control
. Functional Checks - -
CAUTION Attention should be given to the following alarms which indicate a loss of supervisory control. This can result in a loss of Fermi 2 control, and/or status indication of Fermi 1. Mat Equipment and the CT&-11 peaking units. If any of these alarms are received inform the NSO and investigate the cause before proceeding.
- 1. EF1-EF2 SUPV. CONTROL SYSTEM TROUBLE Alarm 11D69,-Seq. Rec. 045S31 indicates problems in the S1400 system which provides Termi 2 control and status of the Fermi 1 mat equipment and the CTO-11 peakins units when supervisory control is not transferred to the C3600 system.
- 2. DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTROL TROUBLE (Alarm 11D53, Seq. Rec. 002C36), This indicates troudie in the supervisory control portion of the C3600 system. This is used to provide control and status indications of the Fermi 1 mat equipment and the CTGall peaking units when control is transferred to the C3600 system control panel H21-P623 3 120 KV UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME ABNORMAL
( Alarm 11D57 Seq. Ren. 003C36), this effects the undervoltage scheme which is part of the C3600 system and is intended to automatically open the Fermi 1 mat breakers upon loss. of power at the Fermi 1 mat when C3600 is armed. l
7.4.1 Prerequisites
( DRAFT
F ) 47.000.83 ) R;v. O '
-; 'Page 35 l
- 1. Walk down. the "3L" system and verify that all !
~
termination links (including S1400 interfaces) are i closed, use the following items for refer,nce. e (
- a. Termi 1 . l
- 1) S.D. EF1mEF2 Supv. Cont. Sys. "3L" t
, Remote. Dedicated Shutdown System. EDP
.. 1701, Item 38. .
~
2- 1- . Verified by/Date
- \
- 2) S.D. EF1dEF2 Supv. Cont. Sys. CTG-11 i Peaker Control EDP 1701, Item 37. " l l
Verified by/Date
- b. Termi 2 l
-1) S/D 120Kv Breakers (EF1) Supervisory Control Dedicated Shutdown System EDP 1701, Iten 46. .
( Verified by/Date
- 2) S/D.1'3.2Kv & 13.BKv Breakers (EF1)
Supervisory Control Dedicated Shutdown i System EDP 1701, Item 47. Verified by/Date
- 3) S/D. Peaker CTG-11 Unit 1 (EF1)
Supervisory Control Dedicated'ShutdowT. System EDP 1701, Item 48. Verified by/Date l
- 2. Walk down the "3L" system and verify. that all l equipment is properly fused and power is on. In '
addition verify that trip cutoff links are closed.
- a. At Fermi 1: -
- l
- 1) As a precautionary measure open all trip
. cutoff switches before powering the Undervoltage Trip Scheme. (Signoff required on Attachment 17).
' Verified by/Date
l 47.000.B3 RLv. O Page 36 i
- 2) 125 VDC Distribution Cabinet "A" Circuit 10 (Undervoltage Trip Scheme) 20, amps.
4 l
- . ~. Verified by/Date
- ; 4, _
- 3) ' Panel #2 Undervoltage Trip Scheme
? . .,.
(Reference; EDP 1701, Jtem 12,. page 24 and Item .38). - - -
. -- l
. Verified by/Date !
t I
- 4) Close the Undervoltage trip cutoff switches. Close the Arm Cutoff first, i then check each breaker trip cutoff and ensure that any trip signals are cleared before closing. (Signoffs required on !
Attachment 17) ! Verified by/Date (. 5) 125 VDC Distribution Cabinet "A" 7 EF1MEF2 Supv. Cont. System "3L" (PNL.15) 20 amps. Circuit Verified by/Date
- 6) Panel #15 BIKOR Power Supply "3L" Supervisory Control Panel Power F1 and F2 = 1.5 amp, F3 - 4 amp.
Verified by/Date :
- 7) End Link Elements S1 and S2 closed "3L" Control. -
1 l Verified by/Date
- 8) End Link Element S3 closed "3L" Control Transfer.
Verifled by/Date 3 Locate test and operating personnel at the following position and establish communications. l l DRAFT
47.000.83 Ray. O P:ge 37
-1
- 3. Fermi 2 Control Room COP H119811.
Verified by/Date
. b. Radwaste second floor switchgear room at 1 -
panel R21*P623
. , .[ ' tr:. 4 " ~ Verified by/Date
. c. - Fermi 1 Belay Room "3L" RTU, PNL 15.
~~ Verified by/Date NOTE: During the performance of this section of the procedure, it in important that communications be maintained at all times between the Fermi 2 Control Room, the Remote Snutdown Panel and operator at Fermi 1. The operator .t Termi 1 must have radio communications -
with the Fermi 2 Control Room and (- be qualified to operate the CTGs and the Fermi 1 mat equipment.
- d. Inform the Fermi 2 Control Room NSS, and NSO that control of the Fermi 1 mat and the CTG 11-Unit 1 peaker is about to be transferred-to the C3600 system and CTG 11-Unit 1 will be started.
Verified by/Date
- e. Obtain permission of the Central System Supervisor to Start CTG-11eUnit 1 and sync it to the grid.
Verified by/Date I
. 7.4.2 Control Transfer and CTG-11~ Unit 1 Functional Tests.
- 1. At the Fermi 2 control room, turn the locking ring of the Dedicated Shutdown System transfer pushbutton to the ARMED position and verify that
, the DEDICATED SHUTDOWN TRANSF. P.B. . ARMED alarm i
DRAFT
I
'i 47.000.83 R v. O ,, Page 38
(' {D61 and Seq. Rec. Pt. 004C36 are received.
. Verified}by/Date NOTE: The next step will cause a momentary
^,
Sequence Complete indication, be prepared to verify it. [ Sign off l
... 7.4.2 3.bg.)) pa,3e.393 2.- Depress the TRANSF pushbutton and verify that the following Indications are initiated:
- a. At the Fermi 2 Control Room
- 1) The DEDICATED SHUT DOWN CONTROL ACTIVATED alarm 11D49 and Seq. Rec. 001C36 indications are initiated.
. Verified by/Date
- 2) The Sequence in Progress indications is on for CTG 11-Unit 1.
C. Verified by/Date
~
- b. At the Dedicated Shut Down Panel li21aP623 1)
The UV Trip Armed indication is.dnitiated. Verified by/Date
- 2) The Supv. Control Tranferred indication is initiated.
Verified by/Date
- 3) The CTG 11-Unit 1 STAND-BY/STOP CONTROL Switch indicates Seq. in Progress.
' Verified by/Date 3 After approximately 10 minutes, when CTG-11, Unit 1 is ready to accept load verify the following.
- a. At H21-P623 ,
DRAFT
r 47'000.83 R*,v. 0 Page 39 ( 1) The SEQ IN PROG. light is extinguished (located on the CTG *11. Unit 1 control switch). - - l
. 2 l 1
. ~ Verified by/Date ;
- 2) ' The Governor. control can adjust the
~
frequency (stay within the 58 to 61 Hz
. . range) adjust to 59.9 to 60 Hz. l
.. " Verified by/Date
- 3) The voltage control can adjust the voltage (stay within the 109 to 129 volt range), adjust to 119 to 120 volts.
{ Verified by/Date
- 4) The CTG-11, Unit 1 meters should indicate 119 to 120 volts, and 59.9 to 60 Hert2; Verified by/Dati b.
In the Fermi 2 control room (CDP N11-P8{ }
- 1) The SEQUENCE COMPLETE light is on for CTG- 1. Unit 1. (Momentary only)
Verified by/Date
- 2) Attempt to adjust CTG-11 Unit 1
. frequency using the governor control and verify that it has been disabled.
Verified by/Date
- 3) Attempt to adjust the CTG 11 Unit 1 voltage using the voltage control and verify that it has been disabled.
Verified by/Date
- 4) The CTG .11, Unit 1 meters should indicate 119 to 120 volts 59.9 to 60 k Hertz.
Verified by/Date DRA T
47.000.83 Rsv. 0 PaSe 40
.4 The peaker should be run at least 15 minutes to allow it to reach normal operating tempera,ture.
, At the discretion of the operator shutdown the peaker by turning the CTG-11, Unit 1 control switch in the stop position at 321aP623
.g '
l
*~
~
. . : '; .k.
- 5s i- Verified by/Date
. ... 5. Verify that Breaker Tos A2 indicates open in the control room and.on H21*P623.as the peaker coasts down. *
~ Verified by/Date
- 6. After the peaker has coasted down the CTG-11, Unit 1 READY TO START light should illuminate in the Control Room and at H21 P623 4
f Verified by/Date
- 7. At H21-P623 't' urn the EF-1 SUPV. CONTROL Switch to
'. the Control Room position.
Verified by/Date
- 8. Verify that the UV TRIP -ARMED and the SUPV. CONT.
TRANSFERRED lights are extinguished at H21*-P623
- Verified by/Date
- 9. At the Fermi 2 Control Room, verify that the DEDICATED SHUT DOWN SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVATED (Alarm 11D49 Seq. Rec. 0001C36) alarm can be cleared.
Verified by/Date
- 10. At the Fermi 2 Control Room turn the Arning ring -
of the SUPERVISORY CONTROL TRANSFER pushbutton to
.
- the DISARMED position and verify that th3 DEDICATED SHUTDOWN TRANSF. P.B. ARMED (Alarm 11D61, Seq. Rec. 004C36) alarm can be cleared.
Verified by/Date i
~
DRAFT
. 47.000.83 )
Riv. O P2ge 41 ( NCTfE: The Peaker should be allowed to cool at least 30 minutes before attempting to restart. , , i 11.- At the Remote Shutdown Panel ten the EF1 SUPV '
- CONTROL switch to the LOCAL position and' verify
- the following local indications: 1
~
. a. 7 The SUPYEONT. TRANSF light is on.
' Verified by/Date l
- b. The UV TRIP ARMED light is on.
. Verified by/Date
- 12. At the Fermi 2 Control Room verify that the DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVATED (Alam '
11D49, Seq. Rec. 001C36) alars is initiated. Verified by/Date (~ - 13 At H21-P623 turn the CTG-11, ilnit 1 control switch to start and ver.".fy that the READY TO START light is extinguished and the SEQ IN PROG light is initiated. Verified by/Date
- 14. At the Fermi 2 Control Room verify that the CTG-11, Unit 1 READY TO START light is extinguished and the SEQ. IN PROGRESS light is initiated.
Verified by/Date
- 15. After approximately 10 minutes, when CTG-11. Unit 1 is ready to accept load. Verify the following.
- a. At H21-P623
- 1) The Governor Control can adjust the frequency (stay within the 58 to 61 Hz range), adjust to 59.9 to 60 Hz.
(' Verified by/Date m s.
T 47.000.'83 Rsv. 0 Page 42 (
. 2) The Voltage Control can adjust the voltage (stay within the 109 to 129 volt range), adjust to 119 to 120 volts.
* ' ~" ~
Verified by/Date
'3) The SEQ. IN PROG. light will extinguish
-(located on.the CTGall; Unit 1 control r
' switch). -- *
.Veritled by/Date
- 4) The CTG-11, Unit 1 meters should indicate 119 to 120 volts 59.9 to 60 Hertz. ~~ ~
Verified by/Date
- b. In the Fermi 2 Control Room (CDP H11&P811) .. ..
- 1) The SEQUENCE COMPLETE light is on for
( - CTG-], Unit 1. (Momentary Only). Verifted by/Date
- 2) The Governor Control has been disabled verify this by trying to adjust frequency from H11mP811.
Verified by/Date
- 3) Attempt to adjust the voltage from H11-P811 with the Voltage Control switch and verify that it has been disabled.
' Verified by/Date
- 4) The CTO 11, Unit 1 meters should indicate 119 to 120 Volts, and 59.9 to 60 Hertz.'
l
; ~' Verified by/Date l
DRAFT
47.000.83 R;v. 0 l
. Page 43 l
( NUTE: CTO-11. Unit 1 should be run )
',- for at least 15 minut.es to ;
allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
- 5) , After sufficient run time shutdown the
_ _ unit by turning the CTGm11 Unit 1 - < t . control sw$tch on H21*P623 to the STOP
. .. -position. -
Verified by/Date
- 16. After the peaker has coasted down, the following indications should be verified.
- a. At H21aP623 i 1) The A2 breaker should indicate OPEN.
Verified by/Date
~
- 2) The CTG' 11, Unit 1 control switch should indicate READY TO START.
' Verified by/Date
- b. At the Fermi 2 Control Room (COP E11-P811) 1)-
The CTG-11 Unit 1 output breaker A2 should indicate open. Verified by/Date
- 2) CTG-11, Unit 1 should indicate READY TO START; -
~
Verified by/Date
- 17. At H21-P623 turn the Supervisory Control Transfer switch to the CONT. ROOM position and verify the following indications.
l 1 k DRAFI
~~
. 47.000.83 R3v. 0 Page 44
( .
.. a. At H21'P623 the UV TRIP ARMED and the SUPV.
CONT.*TRANSF'D lights are extinguished. 1
- A. .:- - . ' ' Verified by/Date i: .
- b. At,the Fermi 2 Control Room the DEDICATED
' - SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVATED ( Alarm
> . . 11D49,. Seq. Rec. 001C36) alarm can be
. cleared.- ~.
' ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
, Verified by/Date-
- 18. At the Peaker Relay House perform the following steps NOTE: Allow a minimum " cool down" period of 30 minutes between peaker runs.
- a. Place CTG-11 Unit 1 in local control
- Verified by/Date NOTE: The following steps will result in the momentary initiation of the SEQUENCE COMPLETE light at H11-P811 ,.
beprepared)(ESignoff7.4.2.21a)i,p;,,,_ , Lc Cads;
- b. Start CTG-11 Unit 1,* using the local control
. switch at the Peaker Relay House.
~
Verified by/Date
- 19. The following indications should be received at Fermi 2
- a. At H21-P623 the CTG-11. Unit 1 Start /Stop Control indicates Segoence in Progress
~
Verified by/Date
- b. At M11-P811 CTG-11 Unit 1 indicates Sequence in Progress Verified by/Date
- 20. After approximately 10 minutes, when CTG-11 Unit 1 is ready to accept load, adjust the frequency and- 1 DRAFl
r-47.000.83 R;v. O Pag) 45 I voltage, sync and close into the grid from the Peaker Relay House. Verified by/Date
^'
- 21. At H11-P811 the following indications are
- received.* *
. a. The SEQUENCE COMPLETE . light has been received I
.(momentary indication) 1 Verified by/Date
- b. The CTG-11 Unit 1 output breaker indicates closed '- -
Verified by/Date
- 22. At H21-P623 verify the following a.. A2 breaker indicates closed Verified by/Date
- b. All lights on the CTGd11 Unit 1 START /570P -
control switch are extinguished Verified by/Date 23 At the Peaker Relay House place CTG-11, Unit 1 in the iecote position - Verified by/Date
- 24. At the N21-P623 transfer supervisory contrcl by turning the EFr* SUPERVISORY CONTROL switch to the LOCAL position.'
Verified by/Date I
- 25. At the Termi 2 Centrol Roam verify that the DEDICATED SHITT DOWN CONTROL ACTIVATED alarm (Alarm 11D49, Seq. Rec. 001C36) is initiated
( . Verified by/Date
1
~. 47'.000'83 R;v. O Page 46 i
.26. At H21-P623 verify the following
- a. The UV TRIP ARMED indication is initi:ated.
- T- Verified by/Date
~ . . . . _ b. The J5UPV. CONTROL TRANSFERRED indication is initiated. ,._ . - . -
. %.f .
~ ~'
. Verified by/Date
- 27. At H21-P623 turn the CTG-11 Unit 1 start /Stop-control to the START position and verify that the output level of Unit 1 goes from minimum to base Verified by/Date
- 28. At H21-P623 using the governor control lower the output of CTG- 1 Unit 1 to 5 to 6 MW Verified by/Date
- 29. Verify that the CTG'-11 Unit i readings are within 10% of each other at the H21*P623 and H11-P811 panels respectively At H21-P623 At H11-P811 g . .. ..
VOLTS ' MW VAR, , Verified by/Date
- 30. Turn the Control Transfer Switch at H21-P623 to the CONTROL ROOM position and verify the following
- a. AT H21eP623 verify that.
- 1) The UV TRIP ARMED indication is extin-guished.
Verified by/Date DRAFT l
~ '
47.000.83 RIV. 0
. Page 47
- 2) The SUPV. CONTROL TRANSFERRED indication is extinguished
^
' Verified by/Date j
. b. In the Fermi 2 Control Room verify that the DEDICATED SHUT DOWN CONTROL ACTIVATED alarm
$- .~-
(Alara 11D49, Seq. Rec. 001C36) can be cleared - l
~' ~
' Verified by/Date '
- 31. Demonstrate control of CTO-11 Unit 1 from F11*P811 by raising the power level to 9 to 10 MW using the governor control switch -
Verified by/Date
- 32. Shutdown CTG 11. Unit 1 from H11-P811 by~ turning the control switch to STOP ** **
Verified by/Date 33 Verify that the output treaker A2 opens during shutdown Verified by/Date
- 34. At H21-P623 turn the control transfer switch to LOCAL
- and verify the following.
a. AtH2fP623
~1) The SUPV CONTROL TRANSFERRED Andication is initiated
~ '
Verified by/Date
- 2) The UV TRIP ARMED Andication is received Verified by/Date
- b. At M11*P811 4 g DRAH ;
47.000.B3 R;v. 0 Page 48 t 1) The DEDICTED SHUTDOWN CONTRDL ACTIVATED alarm. ( Alarm 11D49, Seq. Rec. 001C36) is initiated.** , 3 s
. .'~ Verified by/Date 35.' At H11eP811 verify that the following controls are 1
,e ,.
. inoperable by trying to operate them.
- m. CTCn11' Power Block Start
~~~
~ Verified by/Date
- b. CTG-11 Unit 1 Start Verified by/Date
- c. CTG-11 Unit 2 Start Verified by/Date
- d. CTG-11 Unit 3 Start Verified by/Date
- e. CTG-11 Unit 4 Start
~
Verified by/Date ( 36. At H21-P623 turn the Supervisory Control Transfer switch to the CONT. ROOM position and verify that
- a. At H21-P623 the UV TRIP ARMED and the SUPV.
CONT.'TRANSF'D are extinguished. Verified by/Date
- b. At the Fermi 2 Control Room the DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVATED alarm (Alarm 11D49, Seq. Rec. 001C36) alarm can be cleared. -
Verified by/Date 7.5 Fermi 1 120Kv Breakers and 13.2Kv Switchgear Control Testing 7.5.1, Prerequisites
- 1. Review Sections 7.1, 7.2 and 7 3 of this test to ensure that any incomplete steps or discrepancies will not adversely inpact this portion of the test.
Attachment 15, the Testing Discrepancy Log Sheet must also be reviewed for impact upon this section ( of the test. Verified by/Date
47.000.83 Rsv. 0
., Page 49
\_
. 2. The terminal links for the breakers are close at the MTU and RTU have been closed. ,,
. i- .. Verified by/Date t ,
3 Plant conditions have been reviewed with the NSO and it has 'been agreed that this portion of the f test can be run. 4 Verifit:d by/Date
- 4. Locate test and operating personnel at the following positions and establish communications.
NOTE: At Fermi 1 test personnel and the operator will be required to move around the relay roco and the plant, therefore radio communications will be necessary,
- a. Fermi 2 Control Room CDP H11-P811.
Verified by/Date
- b. Radwaste second floor switchgear room at the Third Remote Shutdown Panel, H21-P623 Verified by/Date
- c. Fermi 1 relay room at the Third Remote Shutdown System RTU Panel 15.
Verified i,y/Date NOTE: During the performance of this section of the procedure, it is important that communications be maintained at all times between the Fermi 2 Control Room, the Remote Shutdown Panel and the operator at Fermi 1. The operator at Fermi 1 must have radio communications _ with I the Fermi 2 Control Room and be qualified to operate the CTG-11 Peaking units. and Fermi 1 Mat-- ( equipment if necessary. - DR.UT l
47.000.83 R;v. O i Page 50
~ .. 1 l
- 5. At CTG-11 Unit 1 place the "43" (control transfer) switch in the local pUsition, which limits operation of. the Unit to local control.
~
Verified by/Date
- 6. Open the 294SCS control cutoff-links listed on Attachment 18. . i,
', i
~
Verified by/Date 7.5.2 Fermi 1 120Kv Breakers and 13 2Kv Switchgear Functional Tests. - -
- 1. At the Third Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623
~ transfer supervisory oontrol by turning the EF-1 SUPERVISORY CONTROL switch to <the LOCAL positier..
Verifled by/Date
- 2. Verify the following indications at the Third
( Rerote Shutdown Panel H21-P623
- a. The UV TR~P ARMED indication is initiated.
Verified by/Date
- b. The SUPV. CONT. TRANSF'D indication is initiated.
, Verified by/Date 3 Verify that the DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTROL -
ACTIVATED (Alarm 11D49 Seq. Rec. 001C36) alarm is initiated in the Fermi 2 Control Room. ,s Verified by/pate WOTE: When performing functional tests the breakers and switchgear should not actually operate because the194SCS cutoff switches will be,open.' This
. section of the test willsprove that / operating signals from th' C3600 e system i are reaching the 294SCS relays which DRAFT
L ~ l ~- 47;000.83 l Rsv. 0 l
. Pog2 51 1 . .
operate the equipment. When opening the
. 294SCS switches, operate only the control links. Release the control switch at H21*P623 once coil pic?k-up at the remote breaker or switchgear is
.. confirmed. Before closing the 294SCS
, , cutoff switches check the open and close coils of the. relay to ensure that they I are dropped.out. l
- 4. For treaker A6 perform the following steps:
- a. At H21-P623 turn the breaker A6 control
, switch to close.
~
Verified by/Date
- b. At breaker A6 confirm that the close coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up.
Verified by/Date
- c. At H21-P623 A6 turn the breaker control
(- switch to open. Verified by/Date
- d. At breaker A6 confirm that the open coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up.
Verified by/Date
- e. At CDP H11-P811 turn -the breaker control switch to close, verify at position A6 that the close coil does not pick up.
Verified by/Date l
- 7. . At CDP H11*P811 turn the breaker control 4
,, switch to open and verify that the open coil
_ does not pick up. l 1 l Verified by/Date (. DRAF1
= . .
47.000.83 R;v. 0
,- Page 52 l
( g. At breaker A6 cor. firm that the 294SCS open and close coils are dropped out.
'I Verified by/Date
,; 5. For bre,aker A7 Perform the following steps:
, . .a. . At H21*P623 turn the breaker.A7 control
.' switch to close.,2.... .
.. -~
. . . . , . e.qr ?
4 y 1, ,,-
? '
. Verified by/Date ,
- b. At breaker A7 confirm that the close coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up.
Verified by/Date
- c. At H21*P623 turn the breaker A7 control switch to open. }
I L
, Verified by/Date E d. At breaker A7 confirm that the open coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up.
Verified by/Date
- e. At COP H11-P211 turn the A7 control switch to 21ose and* verify that the close coil does not oick up at position A7.
Verified by/Date
- f. At CDP H11*P811 turn the A7 breaker control switch to open and verify that the open coil does not pick up at position A7.
Vertried by/Date 1 At breaker A7 confirm that the 294SCS open
\- and close coils are dropped out.
~
. Ver1ried by/Date
? .
- 6. Tor breaker 26 perform the following steps:
; DRAF1
47.000.83 RIV. 0
. Page 53
- a. At H21*P623 turn the breaker B6 control switch to close.
~
Verified by/Date g . . b. At b'reaker B6 confirm that the close coil of
. the 2911SCS relay.is picked up.
Verified by/Date
- c. At E21dP623 turn the breaker 36 control
. switch to open.
Verified by/Date
- d. At breaker B6 confirm that the open coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up.
Verified by/Date
- _ e. At CDP H11'P811 turn the B6 breaker contrcl l switch to close and verify that the close coil does not pick up at position B6.
Verified by/Date
- f. At CDP H11*P811 turn the B6 breaker contr(.1 switch to open and verify that the open coil does not pick up at position B6.
Verified by/Date
- g. At breaker B6 confirm that the 294SCS open and close coils are dropped out. ;
Verifled by/Date l
~7. For breaker A perform the following steps: :
- a. At H21-P623 turn the breaker A control switch to close.
/- Verified by/Date i
DRAFI
. 47.000.63 Rsv. 0 ,. Page 54
- b. At breaker A confirm that the close coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up.
Verifie by/Date
- c. At~1121*P623 turn the-breaker A control switch
~
,' to'open.
" Verified by/Date d.- At breaker A confirm that the open coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up.
Verified by/Date
- e. At COP H11aP811 turn the A control switch to close and verify that the 294SCS close coil
' does not pick up at position A.
~
Verified by/Date
- f. At CDP H11cP811 turn the A control switch
' {.- open and verify that the 294SCS open coil , does not pick up at position A. Verified by/Date
- g. At breaker A confirm that the 294SCS open and close coils are dropped out.
Verified by/Date S. For breaker B perform the following steps:
)
- a. At H21-P623 turn the breaker B control switch to close. j 4
~
Verified by/Date
- t. At breaker B confirm that the close coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up. i l
Verified by/Date l k l DRAFT
- ~
47.000.83 R3v. 0
,. Page 55
- c. At H21-P623 turn the breaker B control switch to open.
'" Verified by/Date
'd. At breaker B confirm that the open coil of ~
, the 294SCS relay is picked up.
~ ' ' ' ~ ~
~ . - Verifled by/Date
- e. At CDP M11-P811 turn the control switch to closr. and verify that the 294SCS close coil does not pick up at position B.
~ Verified by/Date
- f. At COP H11-P811 turn the B control switch to open and verify thr.t the 294SCS open coil does not pick up at position B.
Verified by/Date
- g. At breaker B confirm that the 294SCS open and close coils are dropped out.
'~ Verified by/Date
- 9. For breaker C perform the following steps:
a .' At H21-P623 turn the breaker C control switch to close.
~ Verified by/Date
- b. At breaker C confirm that the close coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up.
Verified by/Date P
- c. At H21*P623 turn the breaker C control switch to open.
Verified by/Date DRAFT
'" " '~ ~ M
+
0
-1 -
47.000.83 R:v. 0 Page 56 ( d. At breaker C confliin that the open coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up. Verified by/Date u. e.' 'At CDP M11-P811 turn the control switch for the C. breaker to the close position and c, _ . -
.. verify that the 294SCS close coil does not pick up at position C.
' ~
~ Verified by/Date f.: At CDP H11*P811 turn the control switch to
.the open position and verify that the 294SCS ,
open coil does not pick up at position C. ' j Verified by/Date i ! g. At breaker C confirm that the 294SCS open and close coils are dropped out. 1 ( Verified by/Date \ 10. For breaker D perform the following steps:
- a. At H21-P623 turn the breaker D control switch to close. .
Verified by/Date b.- At breaker D confirm that the close coil of the 294SCS relay is picked up.
~
Verified by/Date c .- At H21-P623 turn the breaker D control switen to open. Verified by/Date
- 4. At breaker D confirm that the open coil of
! the 294SCS relay is picked up. I f (, ' " Verified by/Date DRAFT
.47.000.83 Rev. D Page 57 \
e.. At CDP H11-P811 turn the control switch for the D breaker to the close position and
-verify that the close coil does not pick up
, at position D.
-t
' ' ' ~ '
-h , - -
. ~" Verified by/Date
- f. At COP M11aP811 ' turn the control switch for the D breaker to the open position and verify that the 294SCS open coil does not pick up at the D position.
Verified by/Date , g. At breaker D confirm that the 294SCS open and close coils are dropped out. Verified by/Date {. For breaker A2 perform the following steps: ( a. At CTG-11, Unit 1 rack the A2 breaker into the test position. Verified by/Date
- b. At H21-P623 turn the A2 breaker control switch to the close position and verify that the breaker closes.
Verified by/Date , 1
- c. At H21-P623 turn the A2 breaker control j switch to the open position and verify that the breaker opens.
Verified by/Date
- d. At COP H11aP811 turn the control switch for the A2 breaker to the close position and verify that the breaker does not close.
! Verified by/Date DRAfl
)
47 000.83 R;v. O l Page 58
~: -[ e. At CDP M11mP811 turn the control switch for the A2 breaker to the oper. position and verify that open coil for the breaker does !
not pick up. yj ) i l Verified by/Date
-- - f.
At CTCb11; Vnit 1 rack the breaker into the ,
~~.. - ~ connected position.
]
w:4 ,*,% .-
.- w'.
Verified by/Date
~
.12. For breaker GD perform the following steps:
- a. At the Fermi 2 Third Remote Shutdown Panel H21*P623 turn the GD control switch to the trip position.
Verified by/Date
- b. At Fermi 1 relay room Panel #6 verify that the open coil of the 294SCS relay picks up.
( '- Verified by/D*ite
- c. At COP M11-P811 turn the breaker control switch for GD to open and verify that the 294SCS open coil does not pick up at Fermi 1 relay room panel #6.
Verified by/Date
- d. At COP R11-P811 turn the breaker control switch for GD to close and verify the 294SCS close coil does not pick up at Fermi I relay room panel d6.
Verified by/Date
- e. Verify the oped coils of the 294SCS relay are dropped out.
Verified by/Date ( , 13 For breaker GH perform the following stepsi 0RAF1
.. l
* ~
47.000.83 ! R:;v. 0
. , . Page 59
. a. At the Fermi 2 Third Remote Shutdown Panel H21*P623 turn the Gi control switch.to the '
open position. a .
.- * ' Verified by/Date
- ~
~
- b. - At the Fermi 1 relay room Panel #5 verify ,
that the open coil of the GH 294SCS relay ' picks up.
. Verified by/Date
- c. At H21-P623 Termi 2 turn the GH control switch to the close position.
~ ' Verified by/Date
- d. At Panel #5, Fermi 1 verify that the close coil of the GH 294SCS relay picks up.
(* Verified by/Date
- e. At COP ll11-P811 turn the treaker control switch for GI to the open position and verify that the 294SCS open coil does not pick up at Fermi I relay room panel #5.
. Verified by/Date
-f. At CDP H11t P811 turn the breaker control switch for breaker GH to close and verify that the 294SCS close coil does not pick up at. Fermi I relay room panel #5.
Verified by/Date
- g. Verify that the open .and close coils of the 7
294SCS relay are dropped out.
~ ~
Verified by/Date
- 14. For breaker GM perform the following steps:
k DRAFT
47.000'.83 Rev. 0
..', Page 60 I l
- a. At the Fermi 2 Third Remote Shutdown Panel i H21'P623 turn the GM control switch to the '
the trip position.
}
Verified by/Date
.t .,
- t. .
b .- At Fermi 1 relay room Panel #1 verify that
..~-~ -
the open coil of the 294SCS relay picks up. *
. ' Verified by/Date
- c. At CDP H11-P811 turn the breaker GM control switch to open and verify that the 294SCS open coil is not picked up at Fermi I relay room panel #1.
Verified by/Date
- d. At COP h11-P811 turn the breaker GM control switch to close and verify that the 294SCS close coil does not pick up at Fermi I relay room panel #1.
. Verified by/Date
- e. Verify the open and close coils of the 294 SOS relay are dropped out.
Verified by/Date
- 15. For breaker GK perform the following steps:
- a. At the Termi 2 Third Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623 turn the GK control switch to the trip position.
Verified by/Date
- b. At Fermi 1 relay room Panel #2 verify that the open coil of the 294SCS relay picks up.
Verifica by/Date
; c. At COP H11-P811 turn the breaker GK control switch to the open position and verify that DRAFT
47.000.'83 RIV. 0
, .: Page 61 the 294SCS open coil does not pick up at Fermi I relay room panel #2.
I
- , Verified by/Date
.g d. At, COP H11mP811 turn:the breaker GK control switch to*.the close position and verify that
- . - the 294SCS close oo11 does not pick up at Termi 1 relay room panel 02.
~' '
. Verified by/Date
- e. Verify the open ~and close coils of the 294SCS relay is dropped out.
Verified by/Date 16 Close the 294SCS control cut off links listed on Attachment 18. Verified by/Date (~. 17. At CTG-11 Unit 1 place the "43" control switch in the remote position. Verified by/Date
- 18. Return control to the Fermi 2 Control Room by performing the following:
- a. At H21-P623 turn the Control Transfer switch to the Cont. Rm. position and verify that the following indications are extinguished.
- 1. UV Trip Armed Verified by/Date
- 2. SUPV Control Transferred v
Verified by/Date
- b. At the Fermi 2 Control Room verify that the following alarm is clear.
ORAn, - ---,. _. -
r
~'
47.000.83 Rsv. 0
., Page 62 1)
DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVATED (Alarm 11D49, Seq. Rec. 001C36). ,
~
. Verified by/Date
-t 7.6 sUndervoltage Trip Scheme Testing 7.6.1 Perform the following at Fermi 2
- 1. Obtain permission from the Control Room NSO to
. transfer control to the H21-P623 panel and review and inform him of the scope of the testing to be performed.
Verified by/Date
- 2. Locate test and operating personnel at the following position and establish communications.
- a. Fermi 2 Control Room CDP H11aP811.
Verified by/Date
- b. Radwaste second floor switchgear room at panel H21-P623 Verified by/Date
- c. Fermi 1 Relay Room "3L" BTU, PNL 15.
Verified by/Date 30TE: During the performance of this
. section of .the procedure, it is important that communications be maintained at all times between the Fermi 2 Control Room, the Remote Shutdown Panel and operator at Termi 1. The operator at Fermi 1 must have radio communications with the Fermi 2 Control Room and be qualified to operate the CTGs and the Fermi 1 mat equipment. )
5 3 At the Remote Shutdown Panel turn the EF I SUPV CONTROL switch to the LOCAL position and verify the following indications: ORAn
' ~
47.000.83 R,v. 0
..~ Page 63
- a. The SUPV CONT. TRANSF light is on.
Ei ' ' Verified by/Date d b. The,UV TRIP ARMED light is pn.
~
~ ~
Verified by/Date
. .Ji . At the Fermi 2 Control Room verify that the DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVA 1ED (Alarm 11D49, Seq. Rec. 001C36) alarm is initiated.
Verified by/Date 7.6.2 Perform the following steps at Fermi 2
- 1. Locally at CTO-11 Unit 1 place the "43" switch in the local position.
Verified by/Date ( ,
- 2. At panel #2 in the Fermi I . relay room verify that the red undervoltage trlp string monitor lights art on.
~
Verified by/Date 3 Open the undervoltage trip cutoff switches listed on Attachment 19.
' Verified by/Date
- 4. In the Fermi I relay room connect test jumper from terminal #5 of relay BAU62 (Mounted on the back of Pn1 #2) to terminal f5 of 10AU69 (located on Pn1
#2) this simulates that the incoming 120 KV lines are open.
~
Verified by/Date 7.6.3 At the Fermi I relay room panel #2 disconnect and isolate the X phase input from terminal #7 of 27e101P
; and verify that the relay drops out and that.27X2' '
DRAFT
*'=*e4 . 4'e W g,,,
-- .,-,. - e - ,
7
+
. . , 47.000.83 R3v. O Pag 3 64 (located on the same panel) drops out and the 27(101P-102P) monitor light is extinguished.
Verified by/Date
;; 7.6.4 At the Fermi 2 Control Room verify that the 120 KV y! UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME ABNORMAL (Alarm 11D57. Seq. Rec.
, 003C36) alarm is initiated. -
>is
.t , .
., ..g;,;,U,- 3; ~ .. Verified by/Date 7.6.5 -At the Fermi I relay room panel #2 disconnect and isolate the X phase input from terminal #7 of 27M102P and verify that the relay drops out and the AU strings monitor light is extinguished.
NOTE: The 9AU69 and the 10AU69 relays will momentarily pick up during the next step have test personnel positioned to observe operation of these relays. 7.6.6 At the Fermi I relay room panel #18 install a test
. jumper across terminals 5 and 8 of relay RESSCr-1 and
, verify the following. *
- 1. The following relays are picked up.
- a. 1 AU94-Trip and L.D. Pos. GD Verified by/Date
- b. 2AU94-Trip and L.D. Pos. GK Verified by/Date
- c. 3AU94-Trip and L.O. Pos. GM Verified by/Date
, d. 4AU94-Trip Pos. A Verified by/Date
. e. SAU94-Trip Pos. D
{ Verified by/Date f.- 6AU94-Trlp Pos. A7 , 4 Verified by/Date
- g. 7AU94-Trip Pos. B6 Verified by/Date
- b. 9AU69-Close Pos. A6 (momentary)
( Verified by/Date DRAFT
47.000'83 R2v. 0
.. Page 65
- 1. 10AU69-Close Pos. A2 (momentary)
Verifled by/Date
~i 7.6.7 At the Fermi I relay room panel #2 reconnect the X phase input to terminal #7 of 27a101P and reset the
, relay. --
, '. ' i /.? _5c,[ I. Verified by/Date 7.6.8 At .the Termi I relay room panel #2 reconnect the X phase input to terminal #7 of relay 27M102P and reset the relay the 27(101P-J02P) monitor . light should illuminate. -- -
Verified by/Date 7.6.9 At the Fermi 2 Control Room the 120 KV SCHEME ABNORMAL ( Alarm 11D57, Seq. Rec. 003C36) alarm is initiated. Verifiec by/Date (- 7.6.10 At the Fermi I relay room panel #18 remove the test Jumper across terminals 5 and 8 of relay RESSC 1. Verified by/Date 7.6.11 In the Fermi I relay room remove the test jumper between from terminal f5 of 8AU62 (mounted on the back of Pn1 #2) to the #5 terminal of 10AU69 (located on Pn1
.02). -
Verified by/Date 7.6.12 At Fermi I relay room panel #2 operate the AU STRING
. RESET f.B.S.W. and verify the followingt {
- 1. The AU STRING MONITOR light is on
. p. Q cm:C2'to g Verified py/Date
- 2. .The following relays are de energized.
Th< Relay , Panel / Location Verified by/Date
- a. 1AU94 #6 ,,
/
('
- b. 2AU94 #3 _
/
BRAFT m_
,88 e
47 000.83
' R:v. O P;ge 66 1
- c. 3AU94 #1 /
-d. 4AU94 Pos A , ,
/
- 4. 5AU94 Pos D /
t
, f. 6AU94 Pos A7 ~ /
's.
~
7AU94 , Pos B6 /
- h. 9AU69 Pos A6 /
- 1. 10AU69 Pos A2 /
7.6.13 Close-the cutoff switches listed on Attachment 19. Verified by/Date 7.6.14- At H21*P623 turn the EFI SUPV. CONTROL transfer switch to the CONTROL pcsition and verify that:
- 1. The UV TRIP ARMED light is extinguished at H21-P623 Verified by/Date
- 2. The SUPERVISORY CONTROL TRANSF light is extinguished at H21*P623 Verified by/Date 7.6.15 At the Fermi 2 Control Room verify that the SHUTDOW SUPV CONTROL ACTIVATED (Alarm 11D49, Seq. Rec. 001C36) can be cleared. - -
~ Verified by/Date 77 Status Indicator checks 7.7.1 Obtain permission of the Fermi 2 Control Room NSS and -
; NSO to perform this section of the test.
* ~
Verified by/Date ( DRAFT w ~ -
~
47.000.B3 -
, R ;v. O Page 67 7.T.2 Inform the System Supervisor that this portion of the test will affect status indications of.the Fermi 1 mat equipment. Obtain his permission to perform this* test.
. _.;.:l j. y,;.- 4 5 5 r.. , ,_,
, . . - lb;4.,. 4 ~. :2. .?. Verifled by/Date
.! , x. a, f. .
liOTE: - -Status . Indications received while performing other sections of .this test will not be s l' b.c repe,ated.;t u.g.,g.c
. .: ..u,...
here. . i%"
*i?..%.1h".e
. . + . ~ x- - . . .
'7.7.3 Siaulate operation of.the following breakers to verify open and close status indications. If the breaker is
-closed an open condition can be. simulated by opening the 294SCS status link. If the breaker is open a close can be simulated 'by placing a test jumper across terminals 12 and 13 or the 294SCS relay. Perform the open aid close tests in the appropriate order.
- 1. CWn indications Pos A6.
- a. At H21-P623 /
~
Verified by/Date
- b. At H11-P811
( * * *
- Verified by/Date
/
- 2. Closed indications Pos A6.
- a. At H21*P623 '
/
Verified by/Date
- b. At H11-P811 /
Verified by/Date k Q. ,.. I
- 3. Status circuit Pos A6 returned to noemal and indications correct.
/
Verified by/Date
- 4. Open indications Pos A7.
- a. At H21*P623 /
Verified by/Date
- b. At H11*P811 ~~
/
Verified by/Date
,. 5. Closed indications Pos A7.
s 1
- a. At H21-P623 "
/
Verified by/Date 1 DRAFI
~ - 47.000,83 R:,v. O
.'. Page 68 k
- b. At H11-P811 /
Verified by/Date j 6.
'iA5 Fand '/ -l Status circuit Pos A7 returned tomemm1 and
*lndications are correct. ,
i' / e ' Verified by/Date
~ " -
- . 7. ' .Open indications Pos B6.
- a. At H21*P623 . _ .
/
Verified by/Date
- b. At M11*P811 /
Verified by/Date
- 8. Closed indications Pos B6.
- a. At H21-P623 /
Verified by/Date
- b. At H11-P811 /
-~ -' '
Verified by/Date ( 9. Status circuit Pos B6 is returned to indications are correct. - Iad
/
Verified by/Date
- 10. Open indicat' ions Pos A.
- a. At H21-P623 /
Verified by/Date
- b. At H11-P811 /
Verified by/Date
. 11. Closed indications Pos A.
- a. At H21*P623 /
Verified by/Date
- 2. At H11-P811 /
, Verified by/Date U ry
- 12. Status circuit Pos A returned en to/hr= &r/'
= and'
'Andications are correct.
i' '
/
Verified by/Date DRAFT
7.- 47.000.83 R;v. O Page 69 13 Open indications Pos B.
- a. At H21-P623 . /
Verified by/Date
- b. At M11-P811 /
c' , Ver ified by/Date
- 14. Closed indications Pos.B.
- a. At H21*P623 /
Verified by/Date ~
- b. At H11*P811 /
Verified by/Date
- 15. The Status Circuit Pos B is returned to a. d the indications are correct.
/
Verified by/Date
- 16. Open . indications Pos C.
- a. At H21-P623 /
(
- Verified by/Da,te
- b. At M11-P811 /
' Verified by/Date
- 17. Closed indications Pos C.
- a. At H21*P623 /
Verified by/Date
- b. At H11-P811 /
Verified by/Date
' % Ft:- -
- 18. The status circuit of Pos C is returned to-noeeal_
and indications are correct.
~
/
Verified by/Date l
- 19. Open Indications Pos D.
. . j
- a. At H21-P623 /
Verified by/Date
- b. At H11-P811 /
'~ Verified by/Date DRAF1
., 47.000.83 R;v. O Page 70
(
- 20. Closed indications Pos D.
- a. At H21"P623 . /
Verifit'd by/Date
- b. At H11rP811 /
~. !
. ' ' Verified by/Date
' - ' A s k a .4 ' ,
- 21. The status circuit of Pos D is returned to rrn.1< W -
and all indications. are correct. , . / Verified by/Date
- 22. Open indications Pos OH.
- a. At H21-P623 /
Verified by/Date
- t. At H11*P811 /
Verified by/Date
- 23. Closed indications Pos GH.
- a. At H21-P623 /
( - Verified by/Date
- b. At H11-P811 /
Verified by/Date
.'/ - C ..
24 The status circuit Pos GH is returned to mecEl .5* and the indications are correct.
/
Verified by/Date
.25. Open indications Pos GD.
- a. At H21*P623 /
Verified by/Date
- b. At H11-P811 /
Verified by/Date
- 26. Closed indications Pos CD,
- a. At H21-P623 /
Verified by/Date
- b. At H11-P811 '
/
Verified by/Date DRAFT
4 4*l.000.83 R3v. 0 Page 71 i
- 27. . The status circuit for Pos GD is returned to normal and the indications are correct. , , .
'l & Fn.c,4 " cen u e '
.' Verified by/Date
,28. .' Open in'dications Pos GK.
a. At TI21*P623 '
/
' Verified by/Date
- b. At M11-P811 /
'~
Verified by/Date
- 29. Closed indications Pos UK.
- a. At H21*P623 /
. Verified by/Date
- b. At H11*P811 /
Verified by/Date
- 30. The status circuit for Pos GK is returned to-
*, noecal and the indications are correct.
(- [
- e10
(, .! '5 % f . oh f Verified by/Date
- 31. Open indications Pos GM.
- a. At H21*P623 /
Verified by/Date .
- b. At H11aP811 /
Verified by/Date
- 32. Closed indications Pos GM.
- a. At H21-P623 /
Verified by/ Data
- b. At H11*P811 , /
Verified by/Date 33 The status circuit for Pos GM is returned to p aseewd and the indications are correct. . As Ven) o rCc o'dd . c t, 4 . Verified by/Date ( DRAFT
47.000.83 R3v. 0
,- Pege 72 ~.
7 7.4 For the 120 KV LINE CLOSED indication, any of the ' incoming 120 KV line breakers open will cause the indication. If a line breaker is open it will be necessary to install a jumper across the en relayY. G contact to clear the indication. If the eaker is closed it will be necessary to lift a wire from the 3 contact which is in the alare scheme to initiate the indication..: Perform in appropriate order.
- ". . '1. .:. Position.GD.'. relay.2BT69 (contacti across -3 and 7).
- a. . Initiates indication /
Verified by/Date
- b. Clears indication /
Verified by/Date
- 2. Position OK, relay 2BU69 (contact across 3 and 7).
- a. Initiates indication /
Verified by/Date
- b. Clears indication /
Verified by/Date ( 3 Position GM, relay 2BV69 (contact across 3 and 7).
- a. Initiates indication /
Verified by/Date
- b. Clears indication /
Verified by/Date Ji. . The 120 KV LINE CLOSED indication scheme is returned to nopeat and indicates the correct status, hpgp g / g I l l Verified by/Date l 7.7.5 Verify that the. Bus 11 Energized Indication at H21. P623 works correctly.- If the bus is denenergized lift the wire from relay 27e11 t.ermination number 1 to extinguish the indication. If the bus is*de* energized place a jumper across terminations 1 and 10 of 27-11 to ' simulate a de-energized condition. * * **
- 1. Energized indication works correctly.
/
( Verified by/Date HAEI
47.000.83 ,
. R;v. O ;
- , , Page 73 i Ops FtwndYndib&n k 2. The circuit is returned to.norarai and tne -
- indication is correct.
/
Verified by/Date st 7.7.6 Verify that the Bus 1*2 ENERGIZED indication at H21*P623 works correctly. If the bus is energized lift . the wire terminated to terminal #1.of relay 27*11 on PNL 18 (Fermi I relay room) to initiate a de^ energized indication if the bus is de energized place a jumper.
. acr'.ss terminals 1 and 4 of 27a12 to initiate an energized indication. *
- 1. Energizea indication works correctly.
/
Verified by/Date
- 2. The circuit is returned to aopsal A s k ed andCodskitr the indication is correct.
/
Verified by/Date (. ~7.7.7 Inform the Control Room NSS and NSO that testing is complete and all status indications should be
, considered valid.
/
Verified by/Date 7.7.8 Inform the System Supervisor that testing is complete and all status indications should be considered valid.
/
Verified by/Date 8.0 Acceptance Criteria B.1 The abili+,y to control the following equipment free the H21-P623. 3L, Panel has baen demonstrated.
- 8.1.1 CTG-11. Unit 1 Verified by/Date 8.1.2 120 Ky Breaker GD
(
' Verified by/Date DRAFT
!- -$ 47.000.83 R v. 0
,- Pag 2 74
(- - 8.1.3 120 KV Breaker GH
-~
Verified by/Date
._ - 8.1'.4 -120 KY Breaker WI q! . .
~~
Verified by/Date 8.1.5 120 Ky Breaker GK
~ ~
. Verified by/Date 8.1.6 A2-CTG Breaker Verified by/Date 8.1.7 Pos. A613.2 Ky switchgear Verified by/Date 8.1.8 Pos. A713.2 KV switchgear Verified by/Date 8.1.9 Pos. A 13.2 Ky switchgear Verified by/Date 8.1.10 Pos. B 13.2 Kv Switchgear Verified by/Date 8.1.11 Pos. C 13 2 KV switchgear
' Verified by/Date 8.1.12, Pos. D 13.2 xv switchgear Verified by/Date k
DRAFT
- 1 l
47.000.83 ; R ;v. 0 ..[ Page 75 NOTE: - Portions of the B6 breaker control scheme were tested for possible future use. 8.2 The following monitoring equipment.at E21*P623 is functi'onal. ' 1. CTG-11 Unit 1 Watts '
-t . . Verified by/Date i
- 2. CTO-11 Unit 1 VAR
* -' * "~
Verified by/Date
. 3. CTG-11 Unit .1 Frequency
~~ *
, Verified by/Date Ji . CTO-11 Unit 1 Volts Verified by/Date 8.3 The Dedicated Shutdown System transfer pushbutton at H11-P811 is functional. **
Verified by/Date 9.0 Return to Normal / Post Test Conditions ( 9.1 At H21-P623 verify the followir,g: - 9.1.1 The Supv. Control Transt'd indication is cleared. Verified by/Date 9.1.2 The UV Trip Armed indication is cleared. VerifieQ by/Date 19 . 2 At COP H11-PB11 verify the following: 9.2.1 The Arming Ring on the Supv. Control Transfer switch iz in the Disarmed position. Verified by/Date 9.2.2 The following alarms are clear:
- 1. DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVATED (Alarm
~
11D49, Seq. Rec. 001C36). k Merified by/Date DRAFT >
~
47.000.83 R;v. D
. Page 76
- 2. DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTRDL TROUBLE-(Alarm . .
11D53, Seq. Rec. 002C36).
,i
~ Verified by/Date - - - -
j! 3. 120KY UNDER VOLTAGE SCHEME ABNDRMAL (Alarm 11D53, Seq. Rec. 003C36). - -
~
. Verified by/Date
- 4. DEDICATED SHUTDOWN TRANSF. P.B. ARMED (Alarm 11D61, Seq. Rec. 004c36).
Verified by/Date 9.3 Have a knowledgeable person perform an Independent Verification per Attachment 16 to satisfy the requirements of POM Procedure 12.000.43 (verification of Correct Performance of Operating Activities), Reference 2.1.4.
, /
( Verified by/Date 9.4 When it has been verified that the system is returned to normal sign off the PN-21 and process the PN-21 per POM Procedure
.12.000.15, PN-21 (Work Order) Processing, Reference 2.1 3
/
Verified by/Date e 4 e ( 1 URAFI
**. ' RELAY DIVISION TEST PROCEDURES 47.000.83
. t Encic2uro 1 Page 1 of 11
. itfCTRICAL SYSTEM -
RfLAY DIVISION E
.c MANDAL OF sgcTsoes
( ERFORMANCE SECTION TEST PROCEDURES AaTectr eso I , ,,n , Detroit Edison Type SCS Refoy. Acceptonce and Operofional Tests . APPROVED 4 . PREPAREDSY
. t October 13, 1972
.c.. :pATE j'?',up,',,,fy, " ; Ny No %
The SCS refoy is o d-c ouxilliary relay used for Supervisory Control and Surveillance. This Article decribes the procedure for acceptance tests and operational festing.
. SDP 15 BKR. CONTROL-
#' ~
6 7 ALARM O W g SCL _ , C ,
- 0 ::LO 3 10 ::C :0
'TO 3UPERVISORY -SSB 8-ma ::C 3
CONTROL < O O' EQUIPVENT ;;dLO ::C :: O BKS;;,- < BKS 4 ' LO w si _i zj 'o2 x x ,
~
" BKR. STATUS SC SO -
4 294 CUTOFF 5 6 ) _ l 3PST SW. g ) o o I 2 3 94 03 il 6 D SBS IG.1-294/SCS RELAY AND CUTOFF SWITCH. (SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND SURVEtLLANCE.)
- (
091185 DRAFT
~~ -,,ee-e.--~ - - , - - e,----, , - . - - - - - - , - - - - - - . , ~ ,.--e-,-,,-,.,,n
, ,,,m.--.,-- , , . -,,--n, _ . - - . , . , , - -a. , , , , , - -w.
y 47.000.83 Enclosura 1
, Paga 2 cf 11 SECTION XI ,
ARTICLE NO. 9 PAGE 2 [/ IMPORTANT STEPS ' KEY POINTS A. 7 Acceptance Tests (SCS relay removed from t:ase.) *~
-1.-' Hegger and hi pot all terminals to each other and to the chass!s.
+
2.
' Check applyingpickup Dr the variable "C" relaye by . 2. ' 'I This is a 24 V de relay.
de voltage Pickup shwid be 18 V de between Terminals 14 and 16. Use or less; a flashlight between Terminals 9 ,0/
' and 2 to'nonitor contacts. 4 3 Check pickup of the "O" relay by 3. , 4SeeN2.'
applying variable de voltage between Tertcinals 15 and 16. Use a flashlight across Terminals 9 and 1 to monitor contacts.); ',
, ,/
- 4. Check pickup of the" BKS" rehy 4. This is a 125 V de relay, by applying variable de voli. age Pickup should not exceed between Terminals 9 and 4. ) 90 V dc.
(- Connect a flashlight across Terminals 12 and 13 to monitor contacts. ,
- 5. Check pickup of "LO" relay by 5. See M.
applying variable dc ' voltage between Terminals 3 and 4. Connect a de voltmeter from Terminals 9 ti . 4 to monitor M contacts. . - B. - Operation Checks (The SCS relay must be in the case and all external wiring must be complete and ready for service. These tests cast be completed while the breaker position is phut down and all breaker control fuses are installed.) '
- 1. Remove wires from SCS Terminals
- 11. 13, 14. 15 and 16. (' /
/
- 2. Close all three poles of the 294 -
cutoff switch.
.I ii DRAFT
.. * ~ 47.000.83 Enclosure 1
, Pag) 3 cf 11 SECTION XI ARTICLE NO. 9 PAE 3 IMPORTANT STEPS KEY POINTS 3 connect a flashlight. across sCs
- Terminals 11 and 13
.t Close circuit treaker. . ..
- 5. Apply 24 Y de to Terminals 151 . .5. -Observe: (a) Circuit breaker and 16. - .- trips (b) Flashlight goes out (c) LO relay picks up and -
seals .in (d) circuit breaker will not reclose automatically (3) SCs white monitor light (LOI) goes on.
. 6. Recove 24 V de from Terminals 15 6. Observes (a) Circuit breaker and 16 and apply to Terminals 14 closes (b) Flashlight goes on and 16. (c) LO relay drops out (d) SCS monitor lignt (LDI) goes out.
- 7. Remove 24 V de frorr. Terminals
. 14 and 16.
B. Replace wires on Terminals 11, 13, 14. 15 and 16. ( 0,,,6' DRAF1
. , . , , - - -, c - . - -
^
RELAY DIVISION TEST PROCEDURES 47.'000.83
*
- ELICTRICAL 1YSTEM
-- Enclosur o 1 A EL AY OlV1510N MANUA1. OF SECTl!N XI PaSe 4 Cf 11 PERFORMANCE es essan se esa e.eS.ECTION se
. TEST PROCEDURES As7sett wo. 11 l
~. i i
7,ygg Acceptance and Operation Testing of the SCS-3, SCS-3A and SCS-38_ Relays . I
** l APPs0VfDs . c- .
PatranED sy 3. V. Moccia , I f.-82 [g DATE surgestors 6-81 i
$'- 7,, ;
.~....
. ,bl5? 5 >$ ..
. De SCS-3, SCS-3A'and'5CS-35 relays are d-c auxiliary relays
. used for supervisory Control and Surveillance of distribution level equipment. This article describes the procedures for the accep.tance and operational testing of the SCS-3, SCS-3A and SCS-35 relays. The SCS-3 relay is a 24V DC type used for distribution circuit reelosers In a Class "I" Substation such as the Westinghouse ESM. The SCS-3A is a 24V DC, 48V DC type relay which Interfaces automatic throwover controle in Class "A" Substations to the SCADA system. The SCS-35 is a 24V DC, 125V DC type relay intended to Interface circuit breaker con-trots where the trip and closing sources are not common.
Figure 11s a schematic diagram of the SCS-3, SCS-3A and SCS-33 relays. A wiring diagram is provided in Figure 2. (
.M.. ..Mw *.? R. . a m ms O O O O O o es O O O r . . .
. .E ' t$--
. .) .. _{ ] /
g
,1" jfE f l" -
4;[& = .
*N' amm anq>
z -
.,,1 .E d NE
; . h.
3
' .3 h,. . . .
. c q:' s' M~4r C, C,
. i -
t i* n n 1 h[* y[ . J[d >y y '~ T ~l'~l'~ s. y()? ,y 'T
'~
4I II d b !) () (> II II II ( ) () () (>
*"'*'**'****""'s. m anns en au o use 790Wf TTtW. O see WCe FI-22 CA$t I enase as ameonssts ace-as a.sCs-35 GELaT5 .
. FIGURE 1
_ g ,g3
~
Enclosuro 1 Page 5 of 11 SECTION XI, NO. 11 PAGE 2 ( l 11 . N'% . ss
+=
-i m , .
y . a .- y . . y , g- ..p.
.:s -<.-- m ,. ,
g g -_ - --
.g 4 . ..
- 5. .~ c .m.
m ,. ,;[
!!! i .; i'; & 1_I "
rg2.- 1111 2
.I [, 2 '
3 3 r s ]l-y 2 , n g g - t i#
\
7
._.a
-1 4' s
\
i
.(::- ~
=
i i $ l!l ,l . l _j!i !! "i 3- 1 P ' Ea
}*J*i 11-v.(*i t* L L l -
i n'
- 1 i
g,_ 4 i .. .. ai - ..
- ~ri ;q,Iv.,8 j j i1.!! i!. !
1 t 2 _.t . e oa ru '-t n l n,,
!it .I.r a rr >.. _.e _. .
- TD- g s 2 o a
.. s. TE . il !
. .gjjj88 ' 1,y M ;lbl JR 2 7
.. '-2
- lj
.l lIII
=
ll, li:n 14 r p 1
,-1 si ,a o*
!,r____ u d ~'- jig,i 3
_$_ .n ., , I i r,
'I 4- i ,- * -
r 1 l !!iii!iIII!i!!!
. Nr,t r r(t
!- t r - .
( 091185 DRAFT
r
- 47.000.83 Enclosuro 1
. Pag? 6 cf 11 SECTION XI, NO.,11
( PAGE 3 SCS-3 Modifications . The SCS-3 is a DECO stock item (Stock Wmber 623-0631) and is modified by Relay
- . . Division to bectne a SCS-3A or a SCS-3B. SCS-3A's or SCS-3B's RETURNED FROM THE 1 FIELD ARE to be modified to the SCS-3 configuration before stocking.
, , " , SCS-3 to'SCS-3A Modifications A. Wiring Changes
.1. Move Lead I on the LD relay from Terminal 7 to Terminal 8.
- 2. Move Lead 51 on the Lo relay from Terminal 8 to Terminal 7 3 Move Lead 5 on the BKS relay from Terminal B to Terminal 12.
Ji. Hove Lead 17 on the BY.S relay from Terminal 12 to Terminal B.
- 3. 294 LO Indicator Light Changes Replace the lamp cartridge type Sylvania NO. 30041, 24 volt, 70 MA lamp, with Sylvania No. 30061, 48 volt. 53 MA lamp.
C. LO and BKS Relay Changes Re' place 24 volt to and BKS relays Type KUP17D19-24 with 48 volt relays Type KUP17D19-48. Obtain these items frm the Relay Division Laboratory. D. Nameplate Change
. Turn the nameplate around to display Type SCS-3A inforcation.
SCS-3 to SCS-3B Modifications A. Wiring Changes None B. 294 LO Indicator Light Changes Replace lamp cartridge type Sylvania, NO. 30041, 24 volt, 70 MA lamp, witt. Sylvania NO. 30081,125 volt. 25 MA lamp.
,
- C. .LO and BKS Relay Changes Replace 24 volt Lo and BKS relays Type K11P17D19-24 with 125 volt relays ,
Type KUP17D19-125. Obtain these items from the Relay Division Laboratory. l l D. Nameplate Change Modify the na=eplate using a TASCAL LABEL to identify the relay as a Type SCS-3B. 091185 DRAEl .
e . 47.000.83 En21osura 1
.[ Page 7 cf 11
~
SECTION XI, NO.11 k PA E 4 .
,,IMPORTANT STEPS ,,,,
KEY POINTS e v i.c . A. , Acceptance Tests for the SCS-3, SCS-3A or SCS-3B Relaya -
- 1. Inspect the case and cradle- .
.1. A thorough mechanical inspectior.
-. assembly for loose hardware. ~ . ..b ? 1simportant to the integrity ef-Check the relay socket wiring E '*"the relay.
.l
, ffor tightness in the proper}E "*1~ ' ~ -
. location and firmly seated in ' '.
their mockets. , Make sure mounting and terminal hardware have been provided. Verify the case and cradle has the following accessories: (a) Red handles for Terminals 1,
- 2. and 12 (b) Chassis operated shorting switches between Terminals 6
& 7, 8 & 9. 12 & 13
( (c) Current Jacks on Terminals 7, . 9, and 13
- 2. Check pickup of the "C" relay on 2. This is a 24V DC relay. Picku; the SCS-3 and SCS-3B or the "R" should be 18V DC or less.
relay on SCS-3A's by applying variable DC voltage between Terminals 14 and 16. Use a flash-liEht between Terminals 20 and 2 to monitor contacts. 3 Check the pickup of the '0" relay 3. This is a 24V DC relay. Picku; by applying variable DC voltage should be 18V DC or less. between Terminals 15 and 16. Use a flashlight across Terminals 10 and 1 to monitor contacts.
- 4. Check pickup of the " BKS" relay 4. This is a 24V DC relay on the applying variable DC voltage bet- SCS-3. a 48V DC relay on the ween Terminals 5 and 4 for the SCS-3A or a 125v DC relay on
. SCS-3 and SCS-3B relays or SCS-3B. Pickup should not ex-Terminals 17 and 4 for SCS-3A ceed 18 volts or less for the relays. Connect a flashlight .
SCS-3 or 38 volts or less for ; across Terminals 12 and 13 to SCS-3A or 93 volts or less for I monitor contacts, the E.CS-3B relays. j ( , 091185 DRAFT
*- - 1
~
47.000.83 Enclosuro 1 Peg 2 8 cf 11
~
SECTION XI. NO. 11 PAGE 5 l IMPORTANT STEPS KEY POINTS
. 1. - Acceptance Tests for the SCS-3, SCS-3A, or SCS-3B Relays (continued)
- 5. . Check pickup of "LO" relay by 5. This is a 24V DC relay on the
. ,- . . . applying variable DC voltage SCS-3.. a 48V DC relay on the
.~
- between Terminals 3 and 4. SCS-3A or a 125v DC relay on t
. - Connect a DC voltmeter from SCS-3B. Pickup should not ex-
.. - Terminal 5 to 4 to monitor - ceed 18 volts or less for the contacts. SCS-3 or 38 volts or less for SCS-3A or 90 volts or less for the SCS-3B relays.
- 6. Megger and hi pot all termi- 6. The relay must be placed in nals to each other and to the case and all switch fingers the case, closed.
B. Operation Check of SCS-3 and SCS-3B installations The SCS-3 and SCS-3B relays must be in the case and all external wiring must be complete and ready for service. These tests must be completed while the breaker position is shutdown and all breaker control fuses are Installed. An external 24 volt DC source is required for testing. IMPORTANT STEPS KEY POINTS
- 1. Remove wires from the SCS-3 or 1. These wires must be disconnected SCS-3B Terminals 5. 11. 13. 14 to prevent the test potentials and 15. Also disconnect the being applied to these terminals S24 wire (white) connected to from da: aging the remote the S24 wire on terminal 6 going unit.
to the circuit . breaker 52 "b" contact.
- 2. Close all three poles of the 294 cutoff switch.
t 3 Connect a flashlight across the SCS-3 or SCE-3B Terminals 11 and 13
- 4. Connect a source of 24V DC 4. A standard DC test set-up with potential to the SCS-3 or isolation may be used.
SCS-315 relay Terminal 16 (negr.cive) and 5 (positive).
- 5. Close circuit Breaker and place 5. The riashlight should be lit.
the breaker control switch in . ( the " auto" position. 091185 1
. l
. 47.000.83 Enclosuro 1 Pag) 9 of 11 SECTION XI, NO.11
.( PAGE 6 -
IMPORTANT STEPS KEY POINTS .
- 3. Operation Check of SCS-3 and SCS-3B Installations (continued) t .. 6. Momentarily jumper 24V DC 6. ' observe:
; positive from Terminal 5 to
, Terminal 15. . A one second - - _.m M ,(a) . Circuit breaker trips,
. "on" prior is required. - (b) Flashlight goes out,
. ;.; '4c) "LO" relay picks up and .
seals in, (d) Circuit breaker will net reclose automatically, (e) SCS white monitor light (LOI) goes on.
- 7. Mocentari)y jumper- 24V DC 7. Observe:
positive from Terminal 5 to Terminal 34 A one second (a) Circuit breaker closes, "on" period is required. (b) Flashlight goes on, (c) "LO" relay drops out ,
~(d) SCS monitor light (LDI) goes out.
C. B. Trip the circuit breaker 8. Observe the circuit breaker from a relay. Remove.the . recloses automatically.
. external DC source. -
- 9. Replace the wiring on Termi-nals 5. 11. 13, 14, 15 and 16.
C. ' Operation Test of SCS-3A Installations on Class 'A" Substation Transforcer' Secondary Breakers The SCS-3A relay must be in the case and all external wiring must be complete and s aady for service. These tests must be completed while the transformer, associated load bus and tie breaker are shut down. It is necessary to simulate normal station conditions (tie breaker open, transformer breaker closed, 47 relay picked up) with the 43 s switch in the automatic position to perform an operation test of the SCS-3A installation. The SCS-3A relay operates from the substation 48V DC control and received commands from a SCADA remote terminal until which are 24V DC. IMPORTANT STEPS KEY POINTS
- 1. Remove the wires from the SCS-3A 1. These wires must be disconnected
. Terminals 11,13,14,15 and 16. to prevent damaEe to the SCADA Tag the wires such that they may BTU by the test potential being
( be reconnected later, applied to the SCS-3A. 091185 DRAFT
-[ 47.000.83 Inclosuro 1 Pag 2 10 cf 11 SECTION XI, NO. 11
( PAGE 7 IMPORTANT STEPS - KEY POINTS , 4 N . C. - Operation Test of SCS-3A Installations on Class "A" Substation Transformer c- -. Secondary Breakers (continued)
. e. -2. Place the four pole 294.CD/BP
- f. . _ ..' . D witch IJ the normal position. er-s - -
e,.v - . 4- .. 3 connect a flashlight, across ' 3. This monitors the breaker status
' the SCS-3A Terminals 11. and 13 contact.
- 4. With the transformer breaker 4. The flashlight should be lit.
closed and the 43 switch in the AUTO position, observe the " BKS" relay and "LO" relays are dropped out.
- 5. Open and reclose the 294 CO/SP 5. Observe the flashlight goes out switch status finger, while the switch finger is open.
- 6. Momentarily energize the SCS-3A 6. A standard DC voltage test set-
"O" relay by jumpering a 24V DC up may be used.
source to the SCS-3A relay ( Terminals 15 (positive) and 16 (negati ve ). Observe: a one second "on" period is sufficient. (a) Tha transformer circuit breaker opens and does not reclose. (b) The flashlight goes out,
;(c) The "LO" relay picks up and seals in.
(d) Tne white "LOI" indicate-light (s) light. (e) The tie breaker remains open.
- 7. Place the 294 CD/EP switch _in 7. Observe:
the bypass position. Do not open the status finger. (a) The transformer breaker Closes, (b) The flashlight lights, (c) The "LO" relay drops out, (d) The "LOI" indicator 1 light (s) goes out.
- 8. With the 294 CO/BP awitch 8. Observe the "O" relay picks up still in the bypass position, but the transformer breaker does nomentarily energize the *0" not open. No other changes l
( relay by jumpering 24 volts should occur DC to Terminals 15 (positive) and 16 (negative) as in Step 6. 091185 DRAH ! l
-.,' '47.000.83 Enclosuro 1 1 Page 11 of 11 SECTION XI, NO. 11 PADE B IMPORTANT STEPS KEY POINTS .
C. Operation Test of SCS-3A. Insta11ations on Class *A" Substation Transformer Secondary Breakers (continued) I !, - . i- 9. - Reclose the 294 00/BP switch - 9. The transformer breaker shoult
- - ~
and momentarily energize the -;g :.. trip and the same observations SCS-3A "O" relay _by jumpering ~'-:'
' should occur as in Step 6.
24 volts DC to Terminals 15 .- (positive) and 16 (negative).
- 10. Momentarily energize the SCS-3A 10. Observe:
"R" Relay by jumpering 24 volts DC to Terminals 14 (positive) (a) The, transformer breaker and 16 (negative). closes, (b)
The flashlight lights, (c) The "LO" relay drops out, (d) The "LOI" lamp (s) goes out. (e) The "R" relay picks up and drops out.
- 11. Place the 43 switch in the
( MANUAL position and trip the transforur breaker from the control switch.
- 12. Pick up the "O" relay by -12. Observe:
jumpering 24 volts DC to' Terminals 14 (positive) and (a) The "LO" relay picks up 16 (negative). and seals in. (b) The "LOI" light (s ) lie"1. 13 Pick up the "B" relay by .13 Observe: jumpering 24 volts DC to Terminals 14 (positive) and (a) The "LO1" light (s) goei 16 (negative). out. (b) The transformer breaker
-remaint open.
- 14. Place the 43 switch in the AUTO 14. Observe the transformer position. breaker closes.
- 15. Disconnect test sources and re-connect the wires to Terminals
- 11. 13. 14, 15. and 16.
i j THIS COMPLETES THE OPERATION TEST. l 0,,,.' DRAFT -- ~
.,-- . Enclosuco 2 4 . P2g31 of 1 HANDLING OF SEMICONDUCTORS , t AP semiconductors,especially smaller units 'such as small-signal transis-tors, TTL and CMOS integrated logic circuits, linear integrated . circuits, and microprocessors, are vulnerable to the possibility of damage:from static chardes. ' - s-~
'0 wing to the protection afforded by diodes connected across the inputs of
* * ~cnearly allTresent-day CMOS logic circuits, the voltage induced by small
<- static charges can go no higher than these clamping diodes will allon, a '
voltage which is within the safe range of the devloe. - This protect;Ln
.. renders CMOS devices no more vulnerable than other small semiconductors.... , f .
Even though protection against stray field is adequate for all devices, the * ~ human body, under adverse, but still-common circurestanci.3 can become the equivalent of a 200 pF capacitor charged to 5000 volts. This is enough energy to burn out the miscroscopically small cell of almost any semioon-ductor. When circuit boards are removed f rom the chassis, therefore, and when inputs are open-circuited, the potential for failure exists with all semi-conductors. Thus, the primary concern in handling is to keep everything at the same potential and to provide a means for preventing the introducticn of high energy charges. The following procedures are recommended for use when handling any small semiconductor: (1) Turn off power before removing or inserting modules into their chassis. . (2) Store spare cards in aluminum foil or Velostat bags. (3) ship individual modules in conductive material, such as aluminum . - foil or Velostat bags. (4) . Service personnsi should physically discharge themselves by con-
- tacting the frame of the equipment (logic common.) before probing the circuit or handling the module. Bending should be minimizec.
~
(5) The soldering iron should always be grounded while replacing com-ponents. Corrosion sometimes causes unground soldering tips. , (6) Integrated circuits should not be removed from their conductive shipping containers until ready for use. (' 081685 DRAH , I
*r * .*m e- t w +
. '~,J .,.;. ..:. . . f . W..1i!:'i.E12W2%*EH-l'183B
... . . MW-Y-G
,/E
-. E N ST R U CTI O N 5 ' Mi:WF'G N!*tE-+ ' '4
- ig li7.000.83
- g. I J l Enclosure 3
- p. - "
, [j Page 1 of 12 f , N. -
UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY MANUAL
, ,.~.,. ,
5 ; ., L .. u - --
. -: ic.d...F84'N..E.i$$...N..O;s.[..f.
g..c . .. . j c Y " 1' i PilASE l SEQUENCEf.: .
- i
~ AND UNDERVOLTAGE; RELAYS 1
sayamsie . 4 g , 2.ns ww -%'*- g 4 ' 2 s n p i I 3 u
- .uf a
i.[ 3 3 w-my m g 1 verurgym.7m3 w .p l 1,'.i'i$.b. * .f l-l .. ,
, 5'f h+NbEhh[f
.ypas
, , , , ,q bl g f.s l t
. T r ;
ICR51A ICR538 g E.,: 4
) ICR53 A ICR54A ,
;J
. .a ,. . .
. J~L' l
I
~
LOW YOLTASE SWITCHGEAR DEPARTMENT l ( #^ GENERAL h ELECTRIC lan* niu uria. n. agAn 1 l
..g . Ay . . . - . *? +.%.%, ..c.s.%,:O g.;
..:sc s. p.y. e .
,.g
- - . .. 3. . 4 f . 3 3 p.,
5:=- . t
.GEH-1783 Phase Sequence And Und2rvoltage Relays Type 3G o o3 Page 2 or.ja i
r
* . OUTER st.DCK -
l b*- LATCH C R A DLE
'Ci-QGMIC I '
.r .g -- S - .,,. ' i i
gn,.r w _uj , p lNNER f -
.A f i __a _ __.._.. SLOCK -
! I I i O
g _ r MN ,8 INNER BLOCK r%g
. _ -% -
- Y v:W3-LoJ- M 5 .~. , ,-- . . W s M YE2Y,hs n -
_.m._. INd!GEMETD ' -
. RESET BUTTON COVER 5 CUTERBLDCK CASE
. LeeuuEcy,,, , tuss] #
-')
.)
I. D91185 Fig. 1 Type IC4531 Relay. Dit Sisassembled (Frent Vier) ' DRAFT
=m W
#, . g.e" PHASE SEQUENCE AND UNDERV@LTAGE RELAYS m-w - -
~ ..- nr.ma
. . . .. ..,.w.-,... , .
.j ) . .
' TYPE ICR
- w. . .,3
- INTRODUCTION Enc 1m ure 3 1 -
Page 3 of 1p Th e Type ICR fnduction-disk relays are de- . CONTACTRATINGS s!gned to respcod to phase sequence, open phase - l and undervoltage. - The current carrying rating of the contact
. .. . , s.s circuit is determined by ishether the relay has a m . seat-sa unit and br the tap used on the seal-in coll.
APPLICATION c. -saTNp#nevalues r:. % f.or the three The Type ICR relays are us'ed to protect av ? unachines from undervoltage and whenstarting e-from garee: given.le the follo open phase or reverse phase a ence. They willK No Yes Yes , I function to stop the machine if a voltage across s' ; g Tao - 0,2 amp 2 0 ampC
)the relay terminals falls below a predetermined Carry continuously j;3
- 2.0 amps 0,8 amp _ 33amn Ca du
-value. Usually these relays will mot disconnecta h... for trgess)ty 30 amps 5 amps 30 ampe it 'or -
running motor if one circulted becausethe phase motor of thethree will supply supply phase- 1s open gresistance of - Y ohms ' O.13 ohms potential to the relay even with one phase discom -a cal-in coil - e nected from the source. The Type ICR relays are - ycle impedance - 52 oh:ns 0.53 ohmd also used for automatic throwover schemes where ,_ _ of seal-in coil i it is desired to check the presence of three phase voltage of correct phase sequence. When the contacts of 1he induction unit are not by passed by the seal-in unit contacts, they Figs. 4 to 6 show typical external connections may try to interrupt the circuit. The interruptir.g of the various relays described in these instrue- rating of the contacts for non-inductive loads are tions. . - as follows: f OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS Make and Intarrupt at: A-C Amps D-C Amps ADJUSTMENT RANGES AND OPERATING T2 HEE
~
T The range of adjustmbat and the operating-jtime characteristic r eiereaees for the varloos h $ ts - - relays are given in TableI. The values of three- 800 volts 0.00 0.M f phase voltages given are for the proper sequence L. applied to the relay below which the open contaf t BURDENS will open or the closed contact (where used) will close. Unless a specific setting for the relays The burdens impos6d by the two potential cir-ja given on the requisition, the factory will set cults at rated voltageand 60 cycles are as follows: the relay for the values shown. Volis Coil circuit Watts Vars* VA PF j The time eharaeteristic curves referredtoin 120 5-6 2.15 4.70 5.20 0.41 Table Iare for factory settings. 120 T-8 0.66 2.30 2.40 0.27 240 5-6 3.50 13.15 13.3 0.26 RATINGS . 240 T-s 0.41 6.38 6.40 0.0c 480 5-6 2.83 23.8 24.0 0.12 The Type ICR relays are available foe 1, _4 80 T-8 0.45 23.0 23.0 0.02 240, and 480 volt circuits. -
- Capaettive
- TABLE I Closing of Open Contact
) Relay Type (in % of rated 3. phase voltage)
Range of Factory .1 .cAdjustmest Closin of Closed Contact (in % of calfbration of open contact) Range of . Factory AVd
,ra T '
e stic ' l l Adfustment Settine Setting Curve ICR51A 65-95 15 + - - - i
' ICRb3A 15-200 90 -
'fR 75-90 .-
89 Fig. 2 3CR53B 15-100 00 +cc -V TS-90 ::;. 39 Fig.2 3CR54A 15-100 - 90 -
~ 75-90 39 Fig. 3 l RECEIVING, HANDLING AND STORAGE l
l C These rels when not included as a part af a5.$for any ammage sustained during shipment. If in-
' control panel, w be shipped in cartons designed e-Mury er diamage resulting from rough handling is
! to protect them against damage. Immediately upoa i eceipt of the relay,an examinationshould be made evident a claim should be filed at once with the transpo,rtatlonctmpany and thenearestSales Office ( . These hatructions de not purport le cover at detons or vernatow be equpment ae e.n<u.e-y se e, u e.neooa w% .,or.,a ., .ca,.non e. s.ui,r wtoe, provide foraevery posniide u .,.or se d..,.d 3 er shouldPorticular problems arise wMk are not severed adiciently for she purchaser's purposee, She motfor sh*"Id l be referred So the General EJoctric Company. 091185
- Changed since last revision
_ "= - - '-- 47.000.83 Enclo2uro 3
' Page 4 cf 12
- g. . . .
.s. .. ..._. .-_ . .. .
GEM-1783 Phase Sequence And Undervo!! age Relays Type ICR s a e a a as.s vette to stost ster contact
- ses or natto vetts i
vests se ctost sisat contact : ses er satta vetts {
~
too reint an&C ulcutt } b he T p . . . s:~ .
'; L
- 'r_ ;
3:s. s.
~
- 6.
- vies to stost asset contact east vettast as . -
[ ( }'f atsvers race earts vetts f3 , 3 vist to g
/
g stost Ltri contact
/' .
s.e e se so 3e to So so se so 59 aoo tra stut or RAtto vettest
' Pig. 2 Average Time ther.cterletic Of Relay Types ICR$3A And ICR53B 4
i s 3 a : a I o.5 vetts to stost Ltri contact : ses or aaTre vetts ' Wetts is stost aiEnt contact SCs of matto vetts p
,,. .o ,.t a. ..o. tv s y ting to nest ansat co. tact ente vetta e ,
; T'"E T' r.
as age cto reos matto vetts .a.3 Ctost (tet . I contact I
- l t s !
- 0. 2
-so to to a#0
. O as 30 3e 40 to lo fra Star oF RattS vo&TaSt 091185 n.. .
4v-. n ca.,.ci.,i.u . ., 1, . m i., hhh
- - - , - _ _ _ - w-
~
I
, Phass Sequeice And Undeiv"oltaga Ralays Tpe 3CR ' GEH-2M:
i '- g 3 f , A7.000.83 ( . 3 Enclosure 3
- 3 -
Page 5 of 12 1 3 _, _i' ENIUT'EEi7t ' PH4$[ s(QU[ac[ w - TO CLOSE coatects .
. I
~~
>U. "I 9 'l ; "' ~ '
er - - - -
~
2 a3 7g - 4, p g f_ 2
~m >: u , _ ~d_ Hy- ,
- _-- =-
2: . . . _ _..
.__ 4
. cc.Taci .- , . -
yb f , at 5; ; 7 3'" CI??ACU43. . q,y o R &,U
. 8'1 .
y t,c <R- w : ,
' b 2 - - e as ,rf,n ,
4 1 e ,..s.[p , ,e, , , , USEDOTTfDcomufcT40irSsi ~. " " E!N.Ma$ POT [mf8AL TRah5F0eu[e5 aRE , , w . M.'Eu - 90T tsSED. . , , , , as - s,.te ces. s 9tvict rumctieg auwstes_ e I 47 - PHASE sEQutpCE AND UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY TTPE lee DC - WPPts ortsaf ssG coll
'I t#
,g it:'
g en Lc - 10e[R oPIRail#G COIL _~
< ,g a sp. .gu , g '
s2s . 1 Fis. Il Typical tuternal Connections For Fig. 5 Typical External Connections Tor Type ICt!!A Relay Type ICR53B Asley of the General ElectricCompany ratified promptly. .- ately, they should be stored in their original car - i Reasonable care should be esercised la un. tons in a place that is free from moisture, dm packing the relay in order that none of Sheparts and metallic chips. Fore!gn matter collected c-the outside of the cas e ma find its wa insim, are injured cr the adjustments disturbed
- when the cover is removedan cause troub e in ttr If the relays are not to be installed immedt- operation of the relay. .
DESCRIPTION The relays covered by these instructions are at 75 percent rated voltage, the time reqcfrr identified by model numbers. The main construc- to close the contact with rated voltage applied 2. tional differences of these models are ven in the the time dial set on number 10 is 10 secer.i following table and are described un r REIAY TYPES. ~
.The e 3CR53A relay was dest for ust i
-) Time Seal-in Int.
ja three e circuits. It ha s d ble-thros l Afodel' Contacts . . : sing! e contacts. The left-hand contacts o;t-Dial Unit Conn. " :en ervoltage or reverse phase sequence. 7: . 1 121CR51Ai;-[A One Open Yes No Fig.T - relay has a tar et and seal-in unit which is 1- I 121CR53Ai,- lA Double Throw No Yes .8 series with Hs e sed contact. The relay does nr l
, 121CR53B A Double Throw No No .9 '.: contain a time dial.
[s 121CR54Al A Double Throw No Yes .4 x, . . l t., - 4."t.h the relay is adjusted for 90 percer.- l
' . RELAY TYPES 4
.s: ._ 2 and so percent dropout, the time require:
o e ose the normally-closed contacts, when the , The Type ICR51A relay was desi ed for use ' voltage As suddenly dr ed from rated voltage tc in three phase circuits. R has a s le circuit- sero valta, is 1.2 see . i
' closing contact which opens on undervoltage er reversed hase sequence, and a time dial for ad- he e ICR53B relay is similar to the Type
( - ) ~ he relay does not contain a target. sting th timedelay withwhich thecontacts close. . 1CR53A re Ja omitted. y except that thetarget and seal-in uni: When the relay is adjusted to open its contacts - The TypeJCR54A relay is similar to the Type 091185 % 5
- - - J
- CEH-1783 Phare Sequence And Undtruttage Relays Type ICR .
Enclosuro 3 Paga 6 cf 12 san , ce. .ei evi l ,, r i
.y 4" - '
- g :: :V g ,
. . . si ' ,, . < ,
.::nJ
-- o i. 3, . .
. ... Conf eet utE.b et s '
- g3a 1 1 :
!i ' '..... ..m .
; rm u uu u n.. :n W:a
- ...::!. ".".*'t
.:.:.i.:S. ::1 ,,
1 , t i t i
. . , e .u.
J Fig. 4 Typleal External Connections For Relay Fig. 7 Internal Connections For Type , T Types ICR53A And ICR54A ICR51ARelay(FrontView) )
< > qi <> ti il di
.. .. se ** ** 8' tl di II
.. A,,j ,, y 1:a n ,, : : ; . .'
s
~~
b, e, cs 's i f,.
, f :: !
1.;t :: . < . - -
- t, -; <
l t . ,
- g. , _ _
* ;; 1: 1 : 1 1 :. g g o 1: :. U if di dl 8>
3 i l i.l , N l' , , ,,,9 ,,,,,,,O
,, '.' e : ' . e. re e
l i I ,.
- Fig. 8 laternal Connettlons For Rela
- Fig.1 Interest Coni ections for Type l ttt53A And ICA54A (Front View) y Typee IC2538 teley (Frant View)
[ 091185 ,
+ rh .g .4 s, .s.4-DRAEl -
l
- - , . , , - - - - , - . . - , - , , - , , , - . , . . . - , .- - -r---, , . . ,
~ - - Phasa Sequ nee And IJndervoltage Relays Ty]ie ICR ' GEN '783 47 000.83 b Enclosure 3 ~ (v
- Page 7 of 12 m- .
3
=- ca.=
-- m ws
)3 I_ l l M l I i
h
- toe mot 3* hk kN l y
.mjg.n. s - J ,
1 yy., u , yd MM s ;- - . g W - i m '.2.1 ",J C ,
,..g[ . I -
.,,,,m., .. ' M a"gf b
' 0 h- 4 -
,y=,k
== (' g .- . . ngou ~ n. p-<, > , s. , p.;!g%
-w g d.t.- ;!
.o, '.
V. ***?**?* ] . W 'f 5 j -
& ~ f@W[%
l T. ; -
- . ss
%".:.S?'.
e.. .. / 43h, .5 . w% o ms. ~- l e. ;.t ,. . c:,.Mj'. h/4 .
-, ,M/
1 g w. u.c, I M- s - - L g
, I n 1
- I 1 .
h bd -b-L ' l-L E lh
=
r3
! &_ QQ : _
-i.; *. ': -
E flg.10 Type ICR$31 Rela {. Unit la Cradle Fig. Il Type ICRS3A Relay, Unit In Cradle
- (Front View; (gearView) silver contacts. The fixed contacts are adjustable ICR53A relay except that it has faster erating and the movable contact direct acting. . J times. When t ha relay is adjusted to p7ck upat 90 per cent and drop out at 80 per cent of rated The opper bearings consist of a polished stee'.
voltage, the time required to close the normally- pin and a bronz e guide bearing. It provides s closed contact when the voltage instantaneously dcfinite alignment of the relay shaft. Thelower drops from rated voltage to zero volts u 0.17 bearing consists of a polished steel pivot that h second, carried by a jewel bearing. The jewel is seated or. Relay Types ICR53A,1CR53B and ICR54 A con- a spring which minimizes shock, tain a contact that is closed when the relay is When used, the seal-in unit is mounted to the de-e argir.ed. For this reason, these relays left of the shaft as shown in Fig. 30. This rit h:. are supplied in doubic-end drawout cases. The its co!! 14 series and its contacts in p2 i el si:! , external connections are such that the relay coils I are energized when either the upper or lower con- the main contacts such that when the main .ontact? nection plug is put in place. The relay will there- close, the seal-in unit pleks up and seals in. Wher ] it raises a target in t , fore have time to open its closed contact before the viewseal-in which unit latches picks upup'd an remains exposed unt. j the second connection plug can be put in place. released by ressing a button beneath the jou: j 11 is necessary to have both plugs in place before the cover.
. the contact circuits are completed. Jeft corner INTERNAL CONSTRUCTJON .
. CASE The erating unit is similar to that used in' The case is suitable for either surface c:
f a standar watthour meter, except that the current semiflush panel m ounting and an assortment c' Aardware Is provided for eit her mounting. The coil is replaced by a second potential coll. The
$ induction disk (Fig.10) is embossed to insure flat- cover attaches to the cas e and also carries the reset mechanism when one is requir ed. Each mess and to give increased rigidity. -
- cover screw has provision for a sealing wire.
*fte dampingmagnet consists of a pair of alnico magnets enclosed in a steel circuit. Jt is mounted The case has studs or screw connections at both ends or at the bottom only ior the external 06" by clamp screws on a shelf along whichit can be connections. The elecirleal connections between snoved for time adjustments, the relay units and the case studs are inade through k spring backed contactfingers mountedin stationary The r elays have bigb pressure, silver-to .
DRAFT -
. , . e
.g .,
7?@ ;- e - 47.000.83 1 Enclosuro 3 c'EH 11783 Thasa Sequenes And Undery:;1tage Relay 2 Type ICE Pag 2 8 cf 12
~ 1 molded Inner and outer blocks between which nests the latch in place. The cover which is fastened to (
a removable connecting plu g which completes the the case by thumbscrews, holds the connecting plug %." 1 ( circuits. The outer blocks, attached to the case in place.
- have the studs for the external connections, and i inner blocks have the terminals for the internal ~
To draw out the relay unit the cover is first connections. remov and th e plug drawn out. Shortin bars are prov ded in the case to shoh the current rans-The relay mechanism is mounted in a stee1 ~ forrner circuits...The latches ar e then released, framework called the cradle and is a complete unit 2 and thesel unM can be eas!!y drawn out. To re-with all leads be terminated at the ir.ner block. . place the r unit, the reverse order is followed. ~ This e die is bel firmly in the case with a latch U:: .-Y^..- . < at the and the bottom and by a guide pin at the - A separatetesting plug canbe insertedin place l back of the case. The cages and cradles are so '. - ef the connect plug to test the relay in place on ' constructed that the relay cannot be inserted in the . .the panel either omXs own source of current and - l case upside down. The connecting p g, besides voltage or from ether sources. Or, the re unit making the eleetriea1 connections tween the + can be d,rawn outand replacedb has
~
respective blocks of the cradle and case,also Jocks 1; been tested in the laboratoey. y another whi
; p .:
INSTALLATION - LO C ATION in Figs. S and a. Typical wiring diagrams are shown in s. 4 to t.
~
The location should be clean and dry, free . from dust and excess've vibration, and well lighted One of the mounting studs or screws should be to facilitate inspection and testing, permanently grounded by a conductor not less than l No.12 B &S gage copper wire or its equivalent. ' MOUNTING The relays should be mounted on a vertical INSPECTION curface. The outline and panel drilling dimensions l are shown in Figs.13 and 34. At the time of installation, the relay should be inspected for tarnished contacts, loose screws
) CONNECTIONS other imperfections. If any tr ouble is found,or it should be corrected in the manner described under Th e internal connection diagrams are shown htAlhTENANCE.
ADJUSTMENTS PICKUP relative to the moving contact of the open con-tacts. The lead-in sprir.g for the upper moving The magnitude of voltage above which the contact is also connected to this clamp bar; there- I Cpen contact will be closed is determined by fore changing the position of the upper clamp bar the setting of the lower control spring. To cali- will, change the pick up setting sligh . This can , brate the relay to operate at a desired value of be reset by chan the lower contr spring as ' voltage, apply the desired pick up value of voltage described above. hen both pickupand dropout are to the relay and adjust th e lower control sprir.g set to the desired value the locking screws of the until the left contact just closes. The lower control top clamp har should aga,in be tightened. 5 cpring is adjustedby inserting the blade of a screw driver in one of the notches in the periphery of the - TIME SETTING
- control-spring adjusting ring and turning the ad-justing ring counter-clockwise to raise the pickup On the Type ICR$1 A reiay, the time required or clockwise to lower the pickup. for the open contact to close when rated volt-
,_ 3 age is applied to .the relay determined by
. a i n ,: ~- -
DROPOUT the time-dial setting. The maaimem time setting
'C is obtained when the time dial is set on the number
. For Relay Types ICR53A 3CR53B and1CR54A 10 time-dial setting. The time on any other time-the magnitude of volta e w which the closed dial setting ja approximately roportional t o the contact will be closed s determined by the con. time-dial setting. For exampt , the time to close tact ga ana the pick-up setti . After the pick. the contacts when set at the number 5 time-dial up sett ng is made as describe bove, the contact setting is approximately tene-half the time required t
' gap is adjusted loosening the two lock screws la to close the contacts when set at the number 10 the clamp bar ocated at the top of the shaft. time-dial setting.
- The moving contact of the closed contact is ,
connected to this clamp har and can be turned For relay Types ICR53A, 3CR53B and ICR54A,
"~
MM1. . . - - - . - - - - . . .
. 47.000.83
. Enclosuro 3
~ . Page 9 et 12 U NeMgu~eEc~elnd U$dervoltagt Relays Type ICR GEH-1783 the time requ!redto e ose the contacts is a function of the pick up and dr -out settings. It is possible to set any two of thethree variables. For instance if the pick-up value and the drop out time are 1:n, "
8 e' then the 8 [ '
~
portant,The above. drop pick-up value can be set out time can be adjusted by ad- as gives 8 5 justing the contact gap until the desired drop-cut cTU MNstEss time is obtained. The value of drop out voltage will be determined by the gap settingthat was made . Uj h;s..a.se jatsm'**5 to et the drop out time. The value of the drop.", . . I I
- out olla e cannot be changed with6ut changing tas -
*'1 "'1 dt "D*' I** -
Y %QP Q;..n.,- . h . ' Typical test connections are shown In Fig.13. _ g 1-sne
~
t.. TARGET AND SEAL-IN UNITa ve.-N
" ' ' .c ec
=dh 4 for trip cof1s operating en cur.+..n&.. ' -rents raagtag ..
from 0.2 up to 2.0 amperes at the minimum control a
- El "
sc voltage, set the target and seal-in tap plug la the se"i
- 0.2-ampere tap. ,yg g I
For trip colls operating on currents ranging from 2 to 30 amperes at the minimum control volt-o . ,No.n ...
*"' coact *E m age, place the tap plug in the 2-ampere tap, y. .g g 2 The tap plug is the screw holding the right-g hand stationary c ontact of the seal-in unit. To - chan
- Fig. 12 Typical Test Connections For
*" plug.ge the tap Then, setting, take a screw first remove from the connecting the left-hand sta - Type ICR Relays tionary contact and place M inthe desired tap. Nazi remove the screw from the other tap and placeit in the left-hand contact. This procedu,re is neces- be in both taps at the same time as pickup for d c
. sary to prevent the r ht-hand stationar contact will be the higher tap value and a-c pickup will be from getting out of adj tment, Screws ould not increased.
OPERATION These relays are of the induction-disk con- applied to its two potential circuits and the sine c! struction. The disk is actuated by a wattmetric the angle between the two applied voltages. This type operatingunit. Voltage coils are located above relationship makes the torque of the relay propor- - and below the operating disk. Phase shift is pro- tional to the area of the voltage triangle. The rela;. vided in each coil by a series c.pacitor to produce will operate when the area cf the vcltage trianr t
, a split phase field which de elops torque on the is a predetermined value. The relay will opera'<
induction disk. even though this area is reduced to this value du to one phase being low or whether all three phase: The torque produced by the Type ICR relay is arelow, proportional to the product of 1he 1wo voltages t e MAINTENANCE DISK AND BEARINGS -3, surface resembling in effect a sup erfine fil:
- 1. The polIshingaction is sodelicate that no scratchu i
The lower jewel may be tested for cracks by are left yet corroded material w211 be remceed exploring its surfacewkh the point of a fine needle. ;..: rapidly ,and thoroughly. The flexibility of the too The jewel should be turned up until the disk is .. insures the cleaning of the actual points of contact.
- . centered in the air gaps, after which M should be Sometimes an ordinary file cannot reach the actua:
locked in this position by the set screw provided points of contact because of some obstruction from for this purpose, some other part of the relay. O eoaract eorauiae '. with knives files,"or abrasive pa p er or cloth. Knives or files may leave scratches which increase ( For cleaning !ine silver contacts, a flexible arcing and deterioration of the contacts. Abrasive
, burnishing tool should be used. This consists of a paper or cloth may leave minute particles of insu-flexible strip of metal wuh an etched roughened lating abrasive material in the contacts and thus 09195
- Changed since last revisio- 9 ORHy -
<t -
- 07.000.83 GER.17'O Phase sequenco And Undervoltag? Rslays Type ICR Enclesuro 3 Page 10 of 12
,. preved clashg.
PERIODIC TESTING The burnishing tool described above can be . i otda!ned from the factory. An operation testand inspection of the relay at l least once every six months are recornmended, Test connections are shown in Fig.12, i RENEWAL PARTS .%... . 4-
]j - -
,-4:l@'q#Y$hlfR$
m. _ R is recommended that sufficient quantitles of ~ t renewat parts be carried in stock t'o enable the ; searest Sales Office of tbs Genera 1 Electric Com'- prompt pany, s quantity required, nam e of part or damag ' lacement of any that are worn,. broken, , - wanted,pand recomplete nameplate data, including
- t. -
- serial number. Ible give the General Elec- .
~ tric C ition nu,mber on which the relay. ;
c Whos orde'rf ag renew 21 parts, address the w.- ~wasfur
.} -
fy.: 4
. . . 2 --
;,-$ .: Y,+c - '
6 4' e e* 9
)
e
< 0,,,.'
DRAFT
--n a.w sw eequ.nce an; un ervataw Relays Type JCu -
87.000.'83 1 Enclosuro 3 l Page 11 of 12 l
- 1 l
PANEL LOCATION SEM:ftMiH SURFACE MTG. MT
.;. ("Ed !g y ,5cg w 5 *
;..:r! ggg I
BIS 17ISooogo7 g
."q .
p 12 M 16 48 20 => - - 1 g' 4r = ge T- +- ' t r#
"\ .38pon STUDS
~
~*
_.- ( ,, l_', xT *-3--+
. ,' SURFACE -
MTG. gje . P' at en 4
'246810# 1 '-
h
~
NUVSERING OF STUDS (FRONT VIEW) \ } SCREW j10-328 MTG. -* I
. OUTLINE
-S -
4- -2E -2g- E,4 m g 5 h g f,$ E ES DRt.L " "
'#H
-)
4 ES = CUTOUTS MAY : g " yp -.
.45 REPLACE DRILLED RG
(. .
- i
= w 5~ .-
t eme. 1 7 ; r-
,g Y ~~4:- -$ E . .-
4 < h 4
- -l-m
) 7 :
g I , -le STUD
> -- --+
= .
.g l
-r I g gg ? irso t
" ' ..d o . g_c E 7 -
PAEL DRILLING FOR SEH-FLUSH W
~3 ~ @ -k i , , 4 :
MOUNTING (FRONT VIEW) 2 R.NEL DRILLNG FOR SURFAl:E WOUNTING (FRONT YEW) VIEW SHCMflNG ASSEMBLY OF . HARDWARE FOR SURFACE MTG. ON STEEL IWJdELS Fit .14 Outline And Panel Drilling Dimensions For Relay Types ICES 3Ai ICR538 And ICR54A ( 091185 GENER At ELECTRIC COMPANY, SCHENECTADY, N. Y. E!O'A. ENS. vans
Encicauro 3 Pag 2 12 of 12
- {.f [*'. ,,
~-- Phass Sequence And Undtrvoltaga Rslays Type ICR GEH-ales 3 . ~ n ',n iT ;.'1 - ... .,
. 7 , a s -
** c.
PANEL LOCATION : SEMI-FLUSH SURFACE .
- MTE % e,u. . - MTG.
Ph j ..i. .
~,;% . -l .,~
k 0 l
-r m np .
.-("
~
n .?. - d
.._ e i. ,,g' d N'" *- EY J E.-k 2--3-9 IkSTUDS R
J !/ SURFACE
)
E-
= 4 MTG.
63868 '
+ ? \ P5 :* -
u9999Po s .J D_1 If
- S'" )
NUMBER:NG OF STUDS gl8g-[ ",0 32 SCRE. (FRorJT VEW) I SCFdW I e a OUTLINE
- ~ : -5 --+
DRILL h +2h- % h 2 h-
~, d a 4 OLES
- -----.+I , ~BYEL 2 HOLES i - - - -
o {pRtLL i @ CASE IO '11ES Y * ,' G' f w Nm e- --<. -:ge
- PmEt q
~g _ 4 .. l
/
", ' 1 wz k - - -
c ? ; [,-issTuo Si a
*-O- ett 15 !o'j m . ;;6g M_ 3eeWgi PANEL DRt. LING FOR SEMI FLUSH MOUNTING (FRONT VEW)
U k. h7 ihe i a , __" 2 e2h*h e----- 5j ~ PANEL DR1LLNG FOR SURF 1.CE MOUNTNC(FRONT VEW) VtEW SHOWNG ASSEMBLY OF HARDWARE FOR SUPJACE NTS. ON STEEL PANELS i i 1 j (- 091185 Fig. 13 htilne And Panet Drilling Sleensions For The Type ICR$1A Relay ORAFI
,4 . *
-w' w
r
-] . ,- I 47.000.83 Enclosure 4 Page 1 of 9
( , " DRAFT" COPY DEDICATED REMOTE
, SHUTDOWN PANEL TECH. SPECS.
,3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION
, ~)/4.3.10 APPENDIX R ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
_ _ _ LIMITING CONDITION FOR' OPERATION 3310 The alternative shutdown system transfer switches, power, and monitoring instrumentation channels shown in Table 3.3.10 shall be OPERABLE. - APPLICABILITY: OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS 1 and 2. ACTION:
- a. With the number of OPERABLE alternative shutdown monitorinE instrumentation channels less than required by Table 3.3.10
. restore the inoperable channel to OPERABLE status within 7 days or be in at least NOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours.
( b. With one or r?re alternative shutdown system transfer switches, power or control circuits inoperable, restore the inoperable switches / circuits to OPERABLE status within 7 days, or be in at least HOT SHUTDDWN within the next 12 hours.
- c. The provisions of Specification 3 0.4 are not applicable.
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS
~
4.3 10.1 Each alternative shutdown monitoring instrumentation channel shall be demonstrated OPERABLE by performance of the CHANNEL CHECK and CHANNEL CALIBRATION operations at the frequencies shown in Table 4.3.10. 4.3.10.2 Each alternative shutdown system transfer switch, power supply and control circuit shall be demonstrated OPERABLE by verifying its capability to perform its intended function (s) at least once per 18 months. a # F DRAFT
I
~
- 47.000.83 {
Enclosuro 4 l
. Page 2 of 9 i
(
~
TABLE 3'.'3.io APPENDIX R ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS l l MINIMdM
READOUT .. CHANNELS
, JNSTRUMENT r -
*'{ LOCATION OPERABLE l 1'. CTG Unit 1 - Volts H21-P623 1 2.. CTG Unit 1
- Frequency . _ . , , ,,,g, . . , 1
- 3. CTG Unit 1
- Watts ' ' " ~
1 4 CTG Unit 1 6 Vars- 1 5.. tendensate Storage Tank Level
~ ' 1
- 6. Standby Feedwater Flow 1
- 7. Reactor Water Level 1
- 8. Reactor Pressure 1
- 9. Torus water Temperature 1
- 10. Torus Water Level 1
- 11. Primary Containment Temperature 1
CONTROL CIRCUITS SWITCH LOCATION TRANSFER (T), CONTROL (C), CMC (CMC), PUSHBUTTON (PB), SELECTOR (S) (T) EF1 Supv. Control H21-P623 C. (T) EF2 System Transfer - (C) Voltage Control - (C) Governor Control (CMC) CTG 11 Unit 1 Control / Status (C) 120 KV Pos GM Bkr Control (C) 120 KV Pos GK Bkr Control (C) 120 KV Pos GH Bkr Control (C) 120 KV Pos GD Bkr Control (CMC) CTG 11 Pos A2 Ekr Control (CMC) 13.2 KV Pos A7 Outbuilding - TSC Fd Bkr Control (CMC) 13.2 KV Pos A6 SS64 Alt Fd Bkr Control (CMC) SS64 Pri Pos D Bkr Control (CMC) SS66 Pri Pos C Bkr Control (CMC) SS67 Pri Pos B Bkr Control (CMC) Trans 1 Sec Pos A Bkr Control (CMC) SBFW Pump A Bkr Control (CtC) SBFW Pump B Bkr Control (CMC) 4160V Pos V1 Bkr Control (CMC) 4160V Pos V3 Bkr Control (CMC) 4160V Pos W5 Ekr Control - (PB) SBFW Flow Control N21-F002 (PB) SBFW Flow Control N21-F003 (PB) SBFW Iso Valve N21-F001 ( (PB) SRV Line B B21-F013 G - m,- ORAF1 1
47.000'83 Encic uro 4
,- Page 3 of 9 TABLE 3 3.10 (Continued
, ,. APPENDIX R ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS CONTROL CIRCUITS SWITCH LOCATION * . (T) -4160V Pos C9 Tie Breaker Control (Cutoff Switch) If21*P624 - (T) 4160V Circuit Breaker Pos C10 Core Spray Pump C Control (Cut-off Switch) .
.(T) 4160V.Pos C5 circuit Breaker control '
-{T) 4160V Pos C6 Circuit Breaker Control -
4
- l (T) - 4160V Pos C8 Circuit Breaker Control e -
. .(T) .4160V C11 Circuit Breaker Control (CMC) Residual Heat Removal Pump C (CMC) 4160V Pos C6 Incoming Breaker Control (CMC) 4160V Diesel Gen Bus #12 EB Breaker Control -
(CMC) ESS Bus 72C Transf R1400S023A Primary Control (T) 43S-5B Transfer Sw Viv. E11-F004C H21*P625 (T) 43S-6D Transfer Sw Viv. E11-F048A * (T) 43S-5A Transfer Sw Viv.' E11-F003A (T) 43S-5C Transfer SW Viv. E11-F006C (T) 43S-6A Transfer Sw V1v. E11-F047A (T) 43S-6B Transfer Sw Viv. E11*F068A (T) 43S-7A Transfer Sw Viv. P44-F602A ( (T) 435-4D Transfer Sw Viv. P44-P607A (T) 43S-5D Transfer SW Viv. E11-F016A (T) 43S-9C Transfer Sw Fan 747-C002 (T) 43S-AC Transfer Sw Viv. P44-F606A (T) 43S-3C Transfer Sw Viv. E11*F009 (T) 43S-3A Transfer Sw Fan T41*B018
. . 1 (PB) Suppe Pool to Pump C Viv. E11-F004C (PB) RHR Heat Exch A Byp Viv. E11*F048A (PB) RHR HX A Outlet E11-F048A * *
(PB) SDC Suction to RHR Pump C E11-F006C (PB) RHR Heat Exch A In1 Viv. E11-F047A (PB) RHR SW Control Viv. E11*F068A (PB) EECW Div I HX Inlet Iso P44-F602A (PB) EECW to Drywl Isolation P44-F607A (PB) Conts Spray Otbd Iso V17 E11*F016A (CMC) Drywell Cooling Fan 2 - - (PB) RHR Suction Cooling Inbd Viv. E11-F009 (S) Drywell Cooling Fan 2 (Low, Migh* Speed) (CE) RHR Emergency Equipment Cooler 1 (T) 43S'5A Transfer Switch Viv. E11-F024A (T) 43Sa2A Transfer Switch Viv. E118-F028A (T) 43S-1 AR Transfer Switch Fan T47-C001 (T) 43S-3AR Transfer Switch Viv. E11-F004A (T) k 42S-SDR Transfer Switch Viv. I]-F611 A i 2785 . ff
. l 47.000.83 1 Enclosuro 4 .,- Page Ji of 9 TABLE 3 3.10 (Continued)
(- , APPENDIX R ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS I CONTROL CIRCUITS . SWITCHLOCATIOhi l (PB) Suppr Pool Cooling Test E11*F024A : .,,H21*P626
!(PB) Suppr Chmb Sp Otbd Iso Viv; E11-F028A *
'(CMC ) . Drywell Cooling Fan 1 7-
,, (PB) Suppe Pool to Pump A E11-F004A We ..g_
(S) . Drywell Cooling Fan 1 (Low, High Speed)*"""~~
-3 (PB) RHR Recire. Otbd Bypass E1150-F611A . E "? ~ *
.. . , . .pgy. e -' _ -
(T) 43S-1B Transfer Switch Viv. B31-F031 A .E21-P627 (T) 43S-2B Transfer Switch Viv. E1150-F010 *
'(T) 43S-2C Transfer Switch V1v. E1150-F015A (T) 43S-3A Transfer Switch Viv. E1150-F017A (PB) Recirc Pump A Disch Viv. B31-F031 A (PB) Crosstie Header Viv. E11-F010 -
(PB) RHR to Recire. Inbd Iso Viv; E11-F015A (PB) RHR Recirc Otdb Iso V1v. ~E11-F017A - (T) 43S-4B Transfer Switch V1v. Pati-F616 H21*P628 (S) EECW frce Drywell Inbd Iso P44-F616 * ( (PB) Dedicated Shutdown System H11-P811 URAFT 102785
47.000.83
' Enclosure li Page 5 of 9 TABLE 11 3.10 APPENDIX R ALTERNATIVE SIiUTDOWN INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS i
CHANKEL ' CHANNEL
~ INSTRUMENT CHECK CALIBRATION
.1.
CTG Unit 1 -- Volts
.M , .R
~
. .2. CTG Unit.1 - Frequency M R 3 CTG Unit 1 - Watts M R
- 4. CTG Unit 1 - Vars' M R
- 5. Condensate Storage Tank Level M R
- 6. Standby Feedwater Flow M R
- 7. Reactor Water Level M R
- 8. Reactor Pressure M R
- 9. Torus Water Temperature M R
(, 10. Torus Water Level M R
- 11. Primary Containment Temperature ,M R DRAE1 i
l 102785
, -h F
. p
~
c '
) 47.000.83
't Enclosura 4
., , >> - Page 6 of 9
, , , INSTRUMENTATION
. BASES i 1
~
t' .
* - *' 3/4.3/10 APPENDIX R ALTERNATIVE SMUTDOWN ' INSTRUMENT AND CONTROLS
.g ' .g:,D . *-
The. DPERABILITY of the alternative shutdown system ensures that a fire wiII not preclude achieving safe shutdown. The alternative shutdown system instrumentation, control circuits, poder circuits and transfer switches are -
-independent of areas where a fire could damage systems normally used to shutdown the' reactor. Thus, capability is consistent with General Design Criterion 3 Appendix R to 10 CFR 50.
- (
t DRAF1 ( , 102785 6 s o
47 000'83 Enclo;uro 4
-: Page 7 of 9
~
3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS
, 3/4.7.9 APPENDIX R ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN AUXILIARY SYSTDiS
,, LIMITINO CONDITION FOR OPERATION
~
37.9 1
. ' OPERABLE
.as described below:"The Appendix R Alternative Shutdown aux' 11ary system
_. . a. ~ A Standby Feedwater (SBFW) System consisting of one OPERABLE SBFW
- c. pump and a flow path from the condensate storage tank to the reactor vessel.
- b. An OPERABLE CTG Unit 1 and power traing capable of supplying power to the 64C Bus via its Peaker Bus.
, c. An OPERABLE Drywell Cooling Unit (either B001 or B002) consisting of a fan and cooling coil capable of being fed from EECW system.
- d. The provisions of specification 3.0.4 are not applicable.
APPLICABILITY: OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS 1 and 2 ACTION: ( a. With the SBFW System inoperable, restore the system to OPERABLE status within 7 days or be in at least HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 24 hours.
. b. With an inoperable CTG Unit 1. verify the 120 KV bus is available by performing surveillance 4;8,1.1.1 and -
- 1. Within 24 hours, establish a roving fire watch for all the fire zon'_s where Appendix R Alternative Shutdown is utilized.
- 2. Within 30 days, restore CTG Unit 1 to OPERABLE status or provide an alternative source of power to the Alternate
)
Shutdown bus. l l 3 Within 60 days, restore CTG Unit 1 to OPERABLE status o' be in at least HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 24 hours,
- c. With both drywell cooler units B001 and B002 inoperable, restore at least one to OPERABLE status within 7 days or be in at least HOT SHUTDOWN within the next 12 hours and in COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 24 hours.
l l 102785
)
- ~
47 000'83 Enclosuro 4
, Page 8 or 9 (
PLANT SYSTZM k SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 4.7.9.1 : . The SBFW system shall be demonstrated OPERABIZ at least once ' - - l every 92 days by conducting a flow test. 4. .g,
. s .. , . p ,p ;g; , _ , -
437.9.2
~
The CTG Unit 1 system shall be demonstarted DPERABLE by startinE
~
* ..and supplying load to the Peaken Bus at least once every 31 days. '.
.:.M' &g- 7 ' ~ .
Tither one or the Drywell cooli)ng Units Boot and B002 shall be
~
7 - ..
.4.7.9.3
., , verified to be capable or performing its intended function at least once every 31 days.
c ? I ' t L- DRAFT
~
47.000.'83
- Enclosuro 4 Page 9 of 9
( , PLANT SYSTEMS BASES
.. 1 B3/4.7.9 APPENDIX R ALTERNATIVE SHUTDOWN AUXILIARY SYSTEMS The systems identified in this section are those utilized for Appendix B Alternative Shutdown but not included in other sections of the Technical Specifications. . The action statements assure that the auxiliary systems 4- -will.be OPERABLE or that acceptable alternative means are established to -
ochieve the same objective. ( l l
' 2785
. fjj g
~
~
47.000.83 Attcchm:nt 1 Page 1 of 1'
. . )
THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION i
, , M&TE LOG SHEET AND TEST PERSONNEL LOG
'. M&TE LOG SHEET (Rhforhoe' Step 4.14) 37- - -
..Becal **?'4F M&TE.-ES, ect.
Equipment Description l Ranee I ' Due Date j' Tdentification No. ] Verified by/Date __ . . + . . . - TEST PERSONNEL LOG (Reference Step 4.15) NAME (PRINT) SIGNATURE INITIALS DATE G 1 081685
., ai7.000;83 Attechment 2 Page 1 cf 1
( THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION COMMUNICATION AND TRANSDUCER CABLES -
'(Steps 7.1.2.1.bCOMMUNICATION CABLES-7.1.2.1.e, 7.1.2.2.b T.1.2.2.e)
READING TESTED PER CABLE FUNCTION (dba)
') . MIE003:1(X) Verified by/Lt -
, Path 1 227687% K (Fermi 1) Trans & Rec /
. &2276814K (Fermi 2) ,' /
227687-OK (Fermi 1) Trans & PH / ,
&2276814K (Fermi 2) /
Path 2 227688-0K (Fermi 1) Trans & Rec /
&237682-OK (Fermi 2) / ,
4 (, 227688-OK (Fermi 1) Trans & P11 /
\. &2276824K (Fermi 2) -
/
TRANSDUCER CABLES (Step 7.1.3.1) U1-H2 Freque icy Telemetering / , U1-E2 Voltage Telemetering ,
/
U1-W2 Watt Telemetering ,
/
U1aV2 Var TelemeterinE / 081685
47.000.83 Attechment 3 Page 1 of 3 L TH1stD REPOTE SHITTDOWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY
, CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION
, INTERCONNECTINO CABLE CHECKLIST
- FERMI 1 (Ref. Steh 7.1.4)
, CABLE]
]- 7 N %~~ TESTED PER ICE::
9
~
SCHEME l FUNCTION' ' REMARKS l VERIFIED BY/015
- C1 -
. CTV 11*1 * *A" Control Cut ? . EDP 1701, {tems 14, 38, /
Control- Off* supervisory.' 4 39. 40 - -
, & Status Contr01' Transfer-
'.4..
3L,C2 CTer11-1 *Ba Control Cut'. EDP 1701, Items 14, 38 . / Control- OffnSupervisory 40, 41 - -
. & Status Control Transfer -
3L-C3 CTG,11-1 "C" Control Cut EDP 1701, Items 14, 38.. / Control- Off-Supervisory 41, 44 - -
& Status Control Transfer -
3L-C4 CTO-11-1 Supervisory EDP 1701, Items 14, 38, / Control- Control Transfer 39, 44 - -
& Status
.. 3 lac 5 CTG-11-1 Supervisory EDP 1701, Items 14, 3B, /
( Control- Control Transfer 40. 43 - -
~ & Status 3L-C6 ' CTG-11-1 Supervisory EDP 1701, Items 14. 38, /
Control- Control Transfer h2, h3 - - A Status 3L-C7 CTG 11-1 Breaker EDP 1701, Items 14, 3B / Control- Status & Control - - -
& Status Pos A2 3L-C8 CTG-11-1 Control & Status EDP 1701, Items 14, 38.. /
Control- CTG-1161, Stop 43 , 4 4 - -
& Status Stand by 3L-C9 CTG,11+1 CTO-11*1, Volt Raise EDP 1701, Items 14, 3B /
Control- & Loser; Unit 1 43, 44 - -
& Status Available & Ready t 2 Start
.3L*C10 CTGm11-1 Unit 1 Gov. EDP 1701, Items 14, 3B / .
Control- Lower & Raise' 43, 44 - -
& Status Unit 1 Seq in Progress
( - CBm, DRAF1
., ae e e ew eng & - 4 ,-A..e-em- e2= .%.,
47.000.83
. Atttchment 3 Page 2 cf 3 THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY
( CONTROL TESTIN0 AND CALIBRATION INTERCONNECTING CABLE CHECKLIST - FERMI 1 CABLE l SCHEME l FUNCTION l' REMARKS Verifled By/Date
.3L-C11 CTCr-11 Supervisory EDP 1701, Items 14, 38 -
/~ ;
; -? - Control- Control Transfer 44 - -
& Status
. ,.m . . . - -
-2 3L-C12.. CTO-11-1 Supervisory EDP 1701, Items 14, 38, /'
Centro 1* Control Transfer 44 - -
' ~
& Status -
3L-C13 CTO-11-1 Supervisory EDP 1701, Items 14, 38, / Control- Control Transfer 4k - * *
& Status 3L-S1 overall 3L 120 KV Breakers EDP 1701, Items 14, 38 /
Supervisory Close 44, 6SD721F-1 - 3L-32 overall 3L Undervoltage EDP 1701, Items 14, 38, / Supervisory. Trip armed 44, 6SD721F-25 - 3L-33 overall 3L Shutdown Supervisory EDP 1701, Items 14, 38, / Supervisory Control Active 44, 42 - 3L-S4 overall 3L Shutdo.tn Supervisory EDP 1701, Items 14, 35, / Supervisory Control Active 40, 44 - 3L-S5 overall 3L Supervisory EDP 1701, Items 14, 3B, / Supervisory Control Transfer 44 - - - A-83L overall 3L Supervisory EDP.1701, Items 14, 38, / Supervisory Control Transfer 40, 44 - 791 Undervoltage Undervoltage EDP 1701, Items 12. 38, / Trip Scheme Trip and Close 6SD721F-25, 124 - Pos "D" i
'7 92 DC Power 125 VDC Feed EDP 1701, Items 12, 44, /
RTU Syst. 3L 6SD721F-8 7 93 undervoltage 125 VDC Feed EDP 1701, Items 12, . / Trip Scheme to UV Trip Scheme 6SD721F-8, 25 - A-C3 overall 3L Control & Status EDP 1701, Items 12, 38, / Supervisory Breaker A 43, 44 - B-C3 Overall 3L Control & Status EDP 1701, Items 12, 38, /
- Supervisory Breaker B 43, 44 -
k' 081685 DRAFI
' 47.000.83 Attcchm:nt 3 Pag 2 3 et 3
~
. ~. THIRD REMOTE SHITTDOWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY ( CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION INTERCONNECTING CABLE CHECKLIST - FERMI 1 CABLE l SCHEME l FUNCTION l REMARKS f Verified By/Date C-CJ : Overall 3L Control & Status EDP 1701, Items 12. 38 . / , Supervisory Breaker C ,
- 43. 44 -
D-C3 . overall 3L- Control & Status EDP 1701, Items 12, 38 /
< Supervisory . Breaker D 43. 44 -
A6-C3 Overall 3L Control & Status EDP 1701. Items 12. 38 / Supervisory Breaker A6 - 43. 44 - - A7-C3 overall 3L Control & Status EDP 1701. Items 12, 38 / Supervisory Breaker A7 43. 44 - - BP1/ Overall 3L Status. Bus EDP 1701. Items 12, 38 / 2ES2 Supervisory 1-2 Energized 43. 44 CTG-S18 CTG-11-1 Status CTG-11-1 EDP 1701. Items 12. 42 / Control- 6SD721Fe25
& Status
(, CTO-S19 CTG-11-1 Status CTO-11-1 EDP 1701. Items 12. 42, / Control- 6SD721F-25
& Status -
GD-C2 Overall 3L Control Position GD EDP 1701. Items 12. 38 / Supervisory 44, 6SD721F- 1 GH-C2 Overall 3L Control Position GH EDP 1701. Items 12, 38 / Supervisory 44, 6SD721F-9 - GK-C2 Overall 3L Control Position GK ~EDP 1701. Items 12. 38 _ _ . ,
/
Supervisory 44. 6SD721F-26 GL-C10 CTG-11-1 Control CTG-11-1 EDP 1701, Items 12, 43. / Control- 6SD721 F'22
& Status OH-C2 Overall 3L Control CTO-11-1 EDP 1701. Items 12, 38 Supervisory 44. 6SP721F-22 /
BP101- Overall 3L Bus 101 Status EDP 1701, Items 12, 38 / ES2 - Supervisory -
- 44. 6SD721F-9 BP102- 'Overall 3L Bus 101 Status ~ EDP 1701, Jtems 12. 38 /
ES2 Supervisory - 44, 6SD721F . 081685 DRAFT 9
47.000'83
- Attachment 4 Page 1 of 1 THIRD RE)CTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (c3600)
SUPERVISORY CONTBOL TESTING AND INITIAL CALIBRATION POWER SUPPLTES g 11.b63
~
66 MPS 129DC-1 Power Supplies (Ref. Steps ? 1_5 & 7'.2.t)
'.'t. Pin 2 (OVDC) to Pin 4 (+12 (left) ~VDC) ' . Pin 2 (OVDC) to Pin 9 (m12VDC) '
_ Location (found) (found). (left) MlE No.- Verified by/Date
' ~
Fermi 1 (RTU) Fermi 2 (MTU) " ' /-
, i /
BIKOR 24V DC Power Supplies (Ref. Steps ~7 7.'12 1.56,?..f
& 7.2.t)
Location Pin A (OVDC) to Pin F (+24 VDC) MTE. No. Verified by/DEM Fermi 1 (RTU) Fermi 2 (MTU) '
~/
/
130-24V DC Sorrensen Bench Board Supply '(Ref. Step 7.2.4) Location Output Voltage MTE. No. (. Verified by/Date Fermi II (MTU)
/
O d
)
3 v DRAF1
~ ~
47.000.83 Attcchu nt 5
., Page 1 of 1 THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600)
SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION _, ,66 TLM AMP AMPLIFIERS (Ref. Step 7.1.6.1.c.1 through 5)
- INPUTS
- . .6 .
Verified tq, AmpI1fler ~ . j 0.000 VDC + TmV fl.000 VDC, + 'taV l + 1.000 VDC 21mV l MTE Ko. .l Date Found / 1 Output left ~
', /
~
found 2 Output left
'~ / ~'
/
Found / .. 3 Output Left~ l--. Found /
~~~
Ji Output Left /
?
""" DRAFT
1-47.D00.83 Attcchment 6
.' Page 1 of 3 THIRD REMJTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600)
SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION
~
66 ADC A/D CONVERTER 66 ADC A/D Converter (Balance)
.~ (Ref. Steps "F.?.5.2) -
]",l,62 d ,3) d 7 i hl t2 n!. . )
~ ~
TP . READING Verified by/ A/D Converter T!W (Low) to TP3 (High) MTE No. Date Found / y Left / Found / y Left
/
t 4' 4 081685 t'
- H &,
GV.(C'E.L4) ] Attr_ chm,nt 6 Page 2 cf 3 THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND INITIAL CALIBRATION '( 66 ADC A/D CONVERTER - l li ,' L ' G ' - 66 ADC A/D Converter (Span and Bias) (Ref. Step ?.}.6.?el INPUTS mV + .0005 VDC ...
~ "
AMP / WORD l ~2000( -1024l -51$ -256l -12$ 321 -161 -$ 2l -1I
~
. X/06,07: ,
Y/07.08,09 _
' ~
l 0.0l +11 +21 +4! +$ +1$ +32] +641 +128l +2561 +512 l 410241 +2000 12 FORMULA DECIMAL VALUE = I 2n 0 _ Message Format k Word 06 ' ' X Bit " Bit G Bit F Bit E Bit D Bit C Bit B Bit A 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Word 07 l X l X l X l OVER. l SIGN l1024 1 512 1 256 l Word 07 Y l 4 l 2 l~ 1 l X l X l X l X l X l Word 08 l 1024 1 512 l 256 l 128 l 64 l 32 l 16 l 8 l Word 09 l X l .X l X l X l X l X l0VER.l SIGN l Analog Channel Code
' Word 09 X X 8 l 4 l 2 1 1 l X l X l 1.. ,_l l l
( 082885 DRAFT 9
**e*=sg+m p e4 e. D ees -
%+ m- -
( me.# .-
-~. 47.000.83 Attechesnt 6 i Page 3 ef 3 l . ~.
THIRD RE!OTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (c3600) l I SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND INITIAL CALIBRATION l 66 ADC A/D CONVERTER Transfer Ratio for A/D i
. Inv - Ict)
( (MSB)
. Sign , . Display Value
.. ;.,, Counts
. 1 A/D Out ] Volts In l Bit- l Test Module output (LSB) .
- f. '2000 et. 2.000v 1/0 "1 1'1 1 '1 0 1 0 0 0 t '
1024 ct. 210 - 1024 1024mv 1/0 1' 0 'O 'O O O O O O O O ' 512 ct. 29 - 512 512mv 1/0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 256 ct. 28 - 256 256mv 1/0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 128 ct. 27 - 128 128mv 1/0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 611 ct. 26 - 64 64mv 1/0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 et. 25 32 32mv 1/0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 16 et. 24 - 16 16mv 1/0 0 0 0 00 0 1 0 0 0 0 ( 8 ct. 23 8 8mv 1/0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 4 ct. 22 =4 4mv ~1/0 0 0 0 0~0 0 0 0 1 0 0 2 ct. 21 -2 2mv 1/0 0 .0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 ct. 20 1 1mv 1/0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 _ 0 ct. Omv 1/O- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I i k 082885 BRAi1 ,
47.000.83
~ Attachment 7 Page 1 of 1 THIRD REtOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600)
SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND INITIAL CALIBRATION .. ( SCALING RESISTOR CALIBRATION (Ref. JStep 7.1.6.4) Thtanb Scaling Reading Message
; Wheel,, Scallag Resistor .CTP . Input Across .,C orr e-66 Seg Switch Card > (Course / Nianber Resistor lation Verirled By/
Chrnnel Number Location Fine) "turrent (+)/(-)/ (ma)
- Volts (/) Date 1 0 06,07 D21 R1/R17 2-1-1/2 1.000 /
~
1 06,07 D21 R2/R18 2ald4/5 1.666 / 2 06,07 D21 R3/R19 2-1*7/8 Not Used / 3 06,07 D21 R4/R20 2al-10/11 Not Used / 4 06,07 D21 RS/R21 2-1-13/14 Not Used /
~
5 06,07 D21 R6/R22 2M1-16/17 Not Used / 6 06,07 D21 R7/R23 2-1-19/20 Not Used / 7 06,07 D21 R8/R24 2*1-22/23 Not Used / "" l 8 06,07 D21 R9/R25 2a2a1/2 Not Used / 06,07 10 9 06,07 D21 D21 R10/R26 R11/R27 2-2-4/5 2-2*7/8 Not Used Not Used
/- _[
/ '
11 06,07 D21 n12/R28 2-2-10/11 Not Used /
~
12 06,07 D21 fii3/R29 2-2'13/14 Not Used / 13 06,07 D21 R14/R30 2-2a16/17 Not Used / 14 06,07 D21 R15/R31 2-2-19/20 Not Used /
'5 06,07 D21 R16/R32 2-1e22/23 Not Used /
O 07,08,09 D27 R1/R17 2-3-1/2 1.000 / 1 07,08,09 D27 R2/R18 2-3-4/5 ;694 / 2 07,08,09 D27 R3/R19 2-3'7/8 Not Used / 3 07,08,09 D27 R4/R20 2-3-10/11 Not Used / 4 07,08,09 D27 RS/R21 2-3-13/14 Not Used / 5 07,08,09 D27 R6/R22 2-3-16/17 Not Used / 6 07,08,09 D27 R7/R23 2-3-19/20 Not Used / 7 07,08,09 D27 R8/R24 2-3-22/23 Not Used / 8 07,08,09 D27 R9/R25 2-4-1/2 Not Used / 9 07,08,09 D27 R10/R26 2-4-4/5 Not Used / 10 07,08,09 D27 R11/R27 2-4-7/8 Not Used / 11 07,08,09 D27 R12/R28 2-4.-10/11 Not Used / 12 07,08,09 D27 R13/R29 2-4-13/14 Not Used / 13 07,08,09 D27 R14/R30 2-4-16/17 Not Used / 14 07,08,09 D27 R15/R31 2-4a19/20 Not Used / 15 07,08,09 D27 R16/R32 2-4*22/23 Not Used / [
47.000.83 Attcchment 8 Page 1 cf 1 THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600)
. SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION STATUS INPUT CHECKS (Reference Step 7.1.7)
Message
" . c. . - RTU +. Cori elation Position' ' Equipment Identification Word / Bit CTP Verified by/Date -
i Control Transfered . 00/A 3-1-1/2 ,
/
Under Voltage Trip Armed - . 00/B , 3-1~3/4 /
.. CTO-11 Unit 1 Standby
.' 00/C 3-1_-5/6' .
/
/
- CTG-11 Unit 1 Stop . 00/D . 3-1~7/COMM.
CTG-11 Unit 1 Avail /Rdy to Start - 00/E 3-1*9/COMM / CTG-11 TJnit 1 Sequence in Progress 00/F- 3-1-11/COMN / Bus 1*2 Bus Energized 00/G 3-1-13/14 / Bus 11 Bus Energized 00/H 3-1-15/16 / Bus 101 Bus Energized 01/A 3-2-1/2- / Bus 102 Bus Energized 01/B 3-2-3/4 / A2 Breaker Status 01/C 3-2-5/COMM / A6 Breaker Status 01/D 3-2-7/8 ,
/
A7 Breaker Status 01/E 3-2-9/10 / B6 Breaker Status 01/F ~ 3-2-11/12 / A Breaker Status 01/G 3-2-13/14 / B - Breaker Status 01/H 3-2-15/16 / C Breaker Status 02/A 3-3-1/2- / D Breaker Status 02/B 3-3-3/4 / (, GH SB 101-102 Status 02/C 3-3-5/6 / CD Custer Line Status 02/D 3-3-7/8 / GK Luzon Line Status 02/E 3-3-9/10 / GM Brownstown Line Status 02/F 3-3-11/12 / 120 kV Breakers Closed 02/G 3-3-13/14 / Spare 02/H 3-3-15/16 Spare 03/A 3-4-1/2-Spare 03/B 3-4-3/4 Spare 03/C 3-4-5/6 Spare 03/D 3-4-7/8 Spare 03/E 3-4'9/10 Spare 03/F 3-4'11/12 Spare 03/G 3-4-13/14 Spare 03/H 3-4-15/16 Spare 04/A 4-1-1/2-Spare 04/B 4-1-3/4 Spare 04/C 4-1-5/6 Spare 04/D 4-197/8 Spare 04/E 4-1-9/10 Spare ' 04/F 4-1-11/12 Spare 04/G 4-1~13/14 ; Spare 04/H 4-1-15/16 l 9 091785 DR E1
- , ~ - . . . - -. . . - ,
47.000.83 Attcchm:nt 9 Page 1 cf 1 THIRD REETIE SHUTDOWN PANEL i (3600) - SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION CONTROL INPUT CHECK 5 (Ref. Step 7 313) Thumb Point -
, ,c Wheel Code Message '.
Control Switch - ' Function-d JWord (Binary) Correlates Verified by/ Data ' Control' Transfer Control transfer 00 00001 / Unit 1 Stop/ Standby ^' Start /Stop . - 00 00010 / l Unit 1 Voltage Lower / Raise ' Lower / Raise s..rgf ;.f 00i f 40011- / I Unit 1 Governor Lower / Raise 00 . . 00100
.v - . # Lower /Balse"'^ ~ / i A2 '- . ,'- . Trip /Close ;
~-
100 00101 / ; A6 Trip /Close ' '
, 00 -00110 / !
A7 - Trip /Close : 00 00111 /
~
A Trip /Close 00 01001 / B Tr:p/Close 00 01010 '
* /
Trip /Close C 00 01011 D Trip /Close 00
/
_] 01100 e _ / GH Trip /Close 00 01101 / i CD Trip 00 01110 / , GK Trip 00 01111 OM Trip 00 010000
/
_I
/ ,j l
l t' 091785
07.000.83
-. . Att0chment 10 Page 1 cf 1-THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL ' ; (C3600)
- SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION 66 DAC D/A CONVERTER CALIBRATION 66 DAC D/A Converter - Balance f-
.~;;_
.. (Reference Step 7 3 31.a) . ...
t Card Location VOLTAGE C
, Function DOP7 DIO CD-AN CD TPI to TP4 TPI to TP3 Verified by/Date' -
, CTO-11-1 Volts. X1 B29-327 Found .
.f... . ,
, '.q, .g- l Left /
CTG-1.1-1 Watts X2 B32-B30 Found . v _. . ---. Left / Spare X3 C3-C1 Found . 1- -- l Left. '
/
CTO-11-1 Frequency Y1 D15-D13 Found Left / CIG-11-1 Vars Y2 D13-Dil Found - Left / Spare Y3 D21-D19 Found ' --
' ' )
Left' / , MTE No I 66 DAC D/A Converters (Span and Blas) i (.. (Reference Step 7 3 31.b) - l 1.0ma DC -1.0ma DC j
' Function DA/PT Master CTP Remote CTP Input Input l Veriff r d by/Dats CTO-11-1 Volts X) 1-9-1/2 2-1-1/2 Found i Left / ,'
CTG-11-1 Watts X2 1-9-3/4 2-1r4/5 Found I j Left ~
/ !
l Spire X3 1- 9 -57 6
.2-1-7/8 Found '
j l Left' /.
- CTG-11-1 Frequency Y1 1-11-1/2 2-3-1/2 Found .:
Left / CTG-11-1 vars Y2 1-11-3/4 2-3-4/5 Found l l Left / \ Spare Y3 1-11-5/6 2-3-7/8 Found , J Left / - MTE No 091785 DRAFI 1 L* ' : -_ - .
t 47.000.83 AttcchmInt 11
. . , Page 1 of 2
- k THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600)
SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION _ . 66.DAC D/A MESSAGE CORRELATION )dd(Ref. W' Step F3-3,I C,N DC4 utput Inputs at Remote CTP. Amps 7 unction D/A PT Master CTP Remote CTP in sa e 1.000. .51P * .256 .12E CTO'11-1 Volts X1. 1m961/2 2nle1/2 Found * * *
. Left CTG =11-1 Watts X2 1'-9-3/4 2-Im4/5 Found
. .- - g,gg i Spare X3 1-9-5/6 2*1*7/8 Found '
Left CTG *11-1 Frequency Y1 1-11el/2 2a341/2 Found Left CTG-11*1 Vars Y2 1-11-3/4 2-3-4/5 Found Left Spare Y3 1-11-5/6 2-3-7/8 Found Left Inputs at Remote CTP. Amps Function - .064 .032 .016 * .008 .004 .002 ' .001 .0005 000 + .0005 (..iCTG . CTG-11*1 11-1 Watts Volta Spare
~
CTG-11 1*1 Frequency
- CTG-11-1 Vars lpare ,
i e
..I. ,
DRAF1
47.000.83 Attachm:nt 11 Page 2 of 2 - k THIRD RE!OTE SHUTDGWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION i
?
. 66 DAC D/A MESSAGE CORRELATION
=
Function ,.
+.001 +.002 +.004 +.008 +.016~ +.032 +.064 +.128 +.256 +.512 +1.000 CTG-1151 Volts -
r - - - CTG-11*1 Watts Spare __ CTG-11-1 Fregnency i CTG,11-1 Vars Spare M & TE Nos. , Performed By: Name (Print) Signature Date 082885
47.000.83 Attcchment 12 Page 1 of 1 - THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (. (C3600) SUPERVISORY CONTROL
- TESTING AND CALIBRATION PANEL METERS .
. (Reference Step 7 3.3 2) ':
, Panti Meter Equip-ment Identificatfor Measured Va.'v_e Panel' Meter Reading Message Correlates . ., i CTGn11-1 Voltage - . -
.. . 8 CTG-11c1 Current -
.. . j CTG-11-1 Watts
- ~
CTO-11-1 Vars ' 1 HTE No. . Performed By: -
/
- 5 q nL t..e<
US m.e (frtrt - ( 4
?
091785 DRAFT
47.000.83 Atttchment 13 P2ge 1 of 1* THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL ( (C3600) TESTING AND INITIAL CALIBRATION STATUS OUTPUT CHECKS (Ref. Step 7 3 3 3) Point Bemote Master Proper Status . Word 2nput . Output Light . Message VerifiedBy.J Equipraent . BIT ~ CTP * ' CTP Indications ' Correlation Date Indication w ;b (X) k V' (X) I Crntrol TrAsterred 00/A 3-1-1/2 1-1-3 i Und:r Voltage Trip Armed 00/B 3-1-3/4 1-1-5 I-CTG-11-1 Start - 00/C 3-1-5/6 1-1-7 . ~ CTG-11-1 Stop 00/D 3-1-7/8 1-1-9 i CTG-11-1 Avall/Rdy to Start 00/E 3-1-9/10 1-1-11 , CTG-11-1 Seq _in Progress 00/F 3-1-11 /12 1-1-13 i Bus-1-2' Bus Energized 00/G 3-1-13/14 1-1-15 i Bus 11 Bus Energized 00/H 3-1-15/16 1-1-17 t Bus 101 Bus Energized 01/A 3-2-1/2' 1-2-3 - Bu7102 Bus Energized 01/B 3-2-3/4 1-2-5 ' A2 Breaker Status 01/C 3-2-5/6 1-2-7 - A6 Breaker Status 01/D 3-2-7/8 1-2-9 I A7 Breaker Status 01/E 3-2-9/10 1-2-11 B6 Breaker Status 01/F 3-2-1/12 1-2-13 A Breaker Status 01/G 3-2-13/14 1-2-15 B Breaker Status 01/H 3-2-15/16 1-2-17 C Breaker Status 02/A 3-3-1/2 - 1-3-3 D Breaker Status 02/B 3-3-3/4 1-3-5 i r'"-S.B 101-102 Status 02/C 3-3-5/6 1-3-7 g
- Custer'Line Status 02/D 3-3-7/8 1-3-9 i GK Luzon Line Status 02/E 3-3-9/10 1-3-11 i GM Brownstown Line Status 02/F 3-3-11/12 1-3-13 i 120kV Breakers closed 02/G 3-3-13/14 1-3-15 !
( 091785 DRA.,.FT . 7
47.000.83 Attcchm:nt 14 .. Page 1 of 3-( THIRD REM 3TE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION KUP,- AND AUXILIARY RELAY CHECKLIST (Reference Step 77 .1.4) _, , , , Tested (MIE001d. Relay ,* -
' ~
Schemed (MIE002; Ident. Function Remarks Location Verified by/; Control Transrer ' EDP 1701 Items 14,'38,40 CT(3L) PNL,15
/~
w n . ri- c.;s CT(A).,. Control Transfer EDP 1701 Items 14.38,39 PNL,9 / - CT(B) Control Transfer EDP 70 Items 4,38.40 PNL,16 / CT(C) Control Transfer EDP 1701 Items 14,38,41 PNL,17
/
3L1 Control Transfer EDP 1701 Items 14.38,43 PNL,18 / Undervoltage Trip - - - ARM Scheme ARM EDP 1701 Items 12,38 PNL,2 / 3L2 Control Transfer EDP 1701 Items 14,38,44 PNL,15
/.
3L3 Control Transfer EDP 70 Items 4,38,44 PNL, 5 '/ (';'.,4 Control Transfer EDP 1701 Items 14.38,44 PNL,15
/
CTG-11*1 - - - - 3L5 Control Stop EDP 1701 Items 14,37,38,43 PNL,18 / CTG-11*1 - - - 3L6 Control Start EDP 1701 Items 14,37,38,43 PL ,18 / CTGa11a1 Control - - - - 3L7 Block U.1 Stop EDP 1701 Items 14,37,38,43 ' 'PNL,18 /, CTO 11~1 Control - - - RESCO Block A2 SYNC EDP 1701 Items 14,38 CTG-11 Cont. Ctr. / CTG-11-1 Control - - 3L8 voltage Raise / Lower EDP 1701 Items 14,37,38,43 ' PNL,18 / 1 CTG-11*1 Control - - -
, l 3L9 voltage Raise / Lower EDP 1701 Items 14,37,38,43 PNL,18 /_ l 091785 s , ,
s -- - -- -- - - - - - , ,y -a
i
=.
~
47.000'.83 Attachment 14 ) Page 2 of 3- l { THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600) ! SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION , , l
,. . KUP, KUL AND AUXILIARY RELAY CHECKLIST (Reference Step 7.1.4)
~ . . Tested (MIE;..
Relay '?O - Schemed it'.IE0'. Ident. Function Remarks
~
Location Verified t:. _- 'CTGa11-1 Control . ;., -
~~ ~ ~ ' ~'
Covernor Entse/ ' ~ ' Q[S 3L10 Lower . EDP 1701 Items 14,37,38,43 '
- PNL,18 CTO-11-1 Control Governor Raise / - -
3L11 Lower EDP 1701 Items 14,37,38,43 PNL,18 ,q CTGr11*1 Control - - - - Breaker A2 Open/ - 3L12 CIose EDP 1701 Items 14,37,38,43 I PNL,18 ' CTGr11m1 Control - - - - l 3L13 Breaker A2 Open EDP 1701 Items 14.37,38,43 PNL,18 ' Undervoltage Trip - - - - Trip Scheme EDP 1701 Items 12.37.38 27X2 Abnormal 6E721 F-27 - PNL,2 Undervoltage Trip EDP 1701 Items 12,38, 1AU94 Pos. GD 6E721Fn61
- PNL,6 i Undervoltage Trip EDP 1701 Items 12.38, 2AU94 Pos. GK 6E721 F-61
- PNL,3 Undervoltage Trip EDP 1701 Items 12.38, - . _
3AU94 Pos. GM 6E721 F-61 PNL,1 Undervoltage Trip EDP 1701 Items 12,38, - 4AU94 Pos. A 6SD721F'117 - POS,A Undervoltage Trip EDP 1701 Items 12,38, SAU94 Pos. D 6I721F-2572-5
- Pos,D Undervoltage Trip EDP 1701 Items 12,38, 6AU94 Pos. A7_ 6SD721 F'40 -
POS,A7 ,_ Vndervoltage Trip EDP 1701 Items 12,38, 7AU94 Pos. B6 6SD721 F+114 - POS.B6 Undervoltage Trip RE - - 4 52GX-1 AUTO RECLOSE EDP 1701 Items 12,38,43 PNL,18 4 ( 03 >8, DRAFI
}'(, '
47.000.83 Attcchment 14
\ Page 3 of 3-THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600)
SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION
, , KUP, KUL AND AUXILIARY RELAY CHECKLIST (Reference Step 7;1.4)
. Tested (MIE001EI R: lay ,
Schemed (MIEOGI-Ident. ~~ Function Remarks ' Location , Verified by/- Undervoltage Trip EDP 1701 Items 12,38. Test (Reclosing Inter- ' 8AU62- lock) TDPU per MIE0020 (MIE0018
- N/A) PNL,18 I /
Undervoltage Trip - - (Reclosing Intern 2TB69 lock) POS CD EDP 1701 Items 12,38 PNL,6 '
/
Undervoltage Trip - (Reclosing Inter-2BU69 Pos GK EDP 1701 Items 12,38 PNL,3 / Undervoltage Trip - (Reclosing Inter-2BV69 lock) EDP 1701 Items 12.78 PNL,1 / Undervoltage Trip - - - 27X1 (Trip Indication) EDP 1701 Items 12,39 /
~
4 .. s - m
- 6
@6e
.e 9-L 091785 DIU FT
+ , ;- -
47.006.83
;- Att:chment 15 P;ge 1 of 1-
._ TESTING DISCREPANCY LOG SHEET (Reference Step 4.17)
AFFECTED PRdBLEM DESCRIPTION / INITIAL & DATE RESOLUTION /lNITIAL & DATf STEPS b
^
g, , e a ( 0 091785 DRAFT
47.000.83
-l Attrchment 16 Page 1 cf 6*
THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL ( C3600 SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION , INDEPENDENT VERIFICATION OF POST TEST CONDITIONS . Det,e ' Start T,ime
- 1. At H21-P623. verify the follow!ng:
~
'1.1 The Supv. Control Transf'd indication is cleared.
Verified by/Date 1.2 The UV Trip Aroed indication is cleared. Verified by/Date 13 Verify the following indications:
- 1. UNIT 1 AVAILABLE AND READY TO START Verified by/Date
- 2. BUS 1-2 ENERGIZED Verified by/Date 3 BUS 1 ENERGIZED Verified by/Date
- 4. 3 3101 ENER3IZED Verified by/Date
- 5. BUS 102 ENERGIZED l
Verified by/Date i l l DRAFT
' 47.000.83 Attcchment 16 P;ge 2 cf 6'
( , INDEPENDENT VERIFICATION OF POST TEST CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
- 6. Breaker A2 OPEN ,
Verified by/Date t
- 7. . Breaker A6 DPEN
'~
Verified by/Date
- 8. Breaker B5 OPEN Verified by/Date
- 9. Breaker A CLOSED
~
Verified by/Date
- 10. Breaker B OPEN Verified by/Date
- 11. Breaker C OPEN Yerified by/Date
- 12. Breaker D CLOSED
~ Verifled by/Date 13 Breaker GH CLOSED Verified by/Date
,1 .. DRAF1 6
' 47.000.83 f, ' s.
Attcchment 16
- Page 3 et 6-
) <
\
3
. 'INDEPENDENT
_ VERIFICATION OF POST TEST ?.ONDITIONS (Con
~
t
.14.: Breaker GD CLOSED .
~
Verified by/Date f , s g
; 15. ' areaker GK CLOSED i 2
Verified by/Date I.
)
- 16. Breaker GM CLOSED Verified by/Date L
- 17. 120 XV LINE CLOSED Verified by/Das j
- 2. At CDP H11-P811 verify the following:
i 2.1 The Arming Ring on the Supv. Control Transfer switch is in the s
- Disarmed position. -
1 Verified by/Date
/
.2.2 The following alarms are clear:
1. DEDICATED SHUTDOW SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVATED (Alarm 11D49, -
* ' Seq. Rec. 001C36). $
Verified by/Date
- 2. DEDICATED SHUTDOW SUPV. CONTR01. TNOVbLE (Ala m 11D53. Seq.
Rec.'002C36). w I ~Verif'.ed by/Date s d -' , ( ' ' 091785
. 47.000.83 Atttchment 16 P2ge 4 cf 6-f
' INDEPENDENT VERIFICATION OF POST TEST CONDITIONS (Cont'd) 3 120Kv UNDER VOLTAGE SCHEME ABNORMAL (Alarm 11D53. 364. Rec.
003C36). -
= Verified by/Date
. ._. , 4. DEDICATED SHUTDOWN TRANSF. P.B. . ARMED (Alarm 11D61. Seq.
' Rec. 004C36). -- -
Verified by/Date 2 3 ' verify the following indications:
- 1. UNIT 1 AVAILABLE AND READY TO START Verjfied by/Date
- 2. BUS 1-2 ENERGIZED Verified by/Date 3 BUS 11 ENERGIZED Verif2ed by/Date
- 4. BUS 101 ENERCIZED Verified by/Date
- 5. BUS 102 ENERGIZED Verified by/Date
- 6. Breaker A2 OPEN Verified by/Date 091785
47.000.83 Att chment 16 Paga 5 ct 6' I. ( INDEPENDENT VERIFICATION OF POST TEST CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
- 7. Breaker A6 OPEN I
~
.; Verified by/Date
- 8. Breaker B6 OPEN Verified by/Date
- 9. Breaker A CLOSED Verified by/Date
- 10. Breaker B OPEN Verified by/Date
- 11. Breaker C OPEN Verified by/Date
- 12. Breaker D CLOSED Verified by/Date 13 Breaker GH CLOSED 9
Verified by/Date
- 14. Breaker GD CLOSED Verified by/Date e
i ORAF1 1
l
- 47.000.83 Atttchm:nt 16 P2ge 6 of 6-INDEPENDENT VERIFICATION OF POST TEST CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
- 15. Breaker GK CLOSED n' Verified by/Date
. 3'6. Breaker CH CLOSED -
Verified by/Date
- 17. 120 KV LINE CLOSED Verified by/Date Finish Time Date Performed by: '
Na e iprtnt) 51gnature int tlais Date ( 091785 QRAF1
1 1 47.000.83 Attacha:nt 17 P0ge 1 cf 1-
\ - -
\
l g THIRD REf0TE SHUTDOWN PANEL C3600 SUPERVISORY CONTRSL TESTING AND ) CALIBRATION (Reference Step 7.',.2.1 . . . .
\
7 A '\t -
. l UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP SCHEME CUTOFF SWITCH CHECKLIST '
Cutoff Sw > Location > Function -
> Verified Open > -
(Relay d) ) > . . . > 'Oefue Ot ,a > Verified Closed
~
- 7
> 7. 4.1. 2.a1 ) > 7.4.1.2.a4)
> (Initial / Data) > (Initial /Date) -
ARM C/D ~PNL.2 ARM STRING (N/A) Cutoff / ,,
/
(1AU 94) PE.6 Trip and L.D. GD / / (2AU 94) PE.3 Trip and L.o. GK / / (3AU 94) PNL.1 Trip and L.O. GM / / (4AU 94) Pos A Trip Pos A / / (5AU 94) Pos D Trip Pos D / / (6AU 94) Pos A7 Trip Pos A7 / / (7AU 94) Pos B6 Trip Pos B6 / / e (9AU 69) Pos A6 Close Pos A6 / / (10AU 69) Pos A2 Close Pos A2 / ,
/
. me e -e 4
0 e 1 1 091785
. DRAF1
47.000.83 Attachment 18
- Page 1 of 1-(
~
THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION 2921 SCS CONTROL CUTOFF SWITCH CHECKLIST (SECTION 7.5) Cutoff > Function > Location > . Opened (Raf. Step ) . Closed (Ref. Step l
- Switch >
e ). ,.:.: .;dispgdy7.5.1.4)W(JfW.:'g:- 7.5.2.16) i it' i>. .. .. a 4 V N Initial /Dat '5 - Initial /Date
. .. ..w .q
,A6 .A6 Open . . . Poe A6 .% g.h.. ' ~w .M'l-7M. by.
M. ~
/
- .--: 'A6 Clooe -
. / a rEE~ ~ '
/
.. . ' foe AS . ~ .?. 'r41.
.caC.;q,.,+-
z.
" :-?- i'W' * --
, , ~. w % ..;
,-~" A7 17 open ' .Poe A71.y;.g. .f[p3.,. -7 -
"a Lis .
~
/
A7 close Poe 17 . ..,.. : - o. j; -
./
/
B6 D6 Open Pos B6 / / B6 Close Pos B6 ,,
/ /
A A Open Pos A / / A Close Pos A /
/ -
B B 0pn Pm 3 / /
. 3 Close Pos B ,
/ /
C C Open Pos C / /
~
C Close Pos C ,
/
~
/
D D Open Pos D / / D Close Pos D / / CD GD Open PNL #6 (EF1) / / CD Close PNL #6 (EF1) / / CH Gi Open PE #5 (EF1) / / Gi Close - PE #5 (EF1) "~ /
~'
/
9 Of Open PE #1 (EF1) . / /
.D,*.c.1
.Gi Close '?E #1.(EF1) ].,
/
^
/
9-GK GK Open PNL #2 (EF1) / / GK Close PNL #2 (EF1) , ' ~ / ,{ / 1 091785 DRAF1 s +.
L, . 47.000.83 l 5 Attcchm:nt 19 i Page 1 cf 1- I g . . [- THIRD REK)TE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600) SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND ) CALIBRATION UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP SCHEME CUTOFF SWITCH CHECKLIST - U.Y.'TkST
- , Cutoff SW) Location) Function > Verified Open, > -Verified Closed, ,
(Relay f)> . > -
) Step 7.0.2 *
? > > > (Initial /Dath> .r Step 7.6.13 (Initial /Date)
.1AU 94; - PML.6 Tr.ip and 1.0. TGD , :7 Li.'- ,47. gs%*$
9 :;-
. g.c .
/ T.a T ' 7. /
'-~
bq v/h.. 2AU 94 FNL.3 Trlp and L.O. GK f,,f' ..,.,.,
, ,p/
- m'o. ': , gj.R.
/ - -
.- SAU 94 :PNL.1 Trip and 1.0. 91 / /
4AU 94 Pos A Trip Pos A / / SAU 94 Pos D Trip Pos D , ,
/ /
6AU 94 Pos A7 Trip Pos A7 / / 7AU 94 Pos B6 Trip Pos B6 / / 9AU 69 Pos A6 Close / / 10AU 69 Pos A2 Close / / (~. t p e
=s;7sw
c* 47.000'83 Atttchm:nt 20
~ P0g) 1 et 1 THIRD REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL PANEL METER CHECK
~
PANEL METERS CHECK -
. Reference Step 7.2 3 t . ;e
~ '
- 4. : Y Milliamp Inputs >
> P:Kl Meter Equir >
> .> >r , > . .a .> . c . > > . > > > vertiled byh
> ment Identification > 1.1001,003 .750 .250 0.00& *.250 .500 .750 -1.003 Date >
>Actuab * -s X X X *X > >
) CTO-11e1
**^*' Voltage ' > > X X X X > >
,> CTG-11-1 Frequency > ActuaD X X X X > >
> > > X X X X > > > CTG-11-1 Watts > ActuaD X X X X > > > > > X X X X > > > CTG-11-1 Vars > ActuaD > >
MTE No. _ Performed By: ( Name (Prtnt) Signature Date e l 1 l S. l 102485 9 DRAFI a , ,.-- --n . -
y 47.000.83
- h. Attcthm:nt 21 g Page 1 cf 1 -
l THIRD REPOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (C3600)
\ . SUPERVISORY CONTROL TESTING AND CALIBRATION 294 SCS CONTROL CUTOFF SWITCH' CHECKLIST I cutoff > Function > Location > Opened (Ref. Step > Closed (Ref. Step
. Switch > > >- .: 7.3.2.1) , e .> .. 7.3.2.6) l
> > . >-- < Initial /Date '.Y*2'- Initial /Date
'. c'.:r4,s..~.w.:.6::a-f & - l
.7. . "1 'M .C. .a
~
M A6 A6 Open Pos A6 '
/
1
,i .,
A6 Close - Pos A6, ,',, , ,.[; ./ .- / 1
. ; g.ws.; V. -ei-.1.
.A7 . A7 Open . Pos A7 '
3- '"a f.T ~
/
A7 Close Pos A7 .' / / B6 B6 Open Pos B6 / / B6 Close Pos B6 / / l A A Open Pos A '
/ /
A Close Pos A / / l 3 B Open Pos B ~
/ / ,
B Close Pos B / / l , I ( C COgn Pm C / / C Close Pos C / / D D OMn Pm D / / , D Close Pos D / / i i GD GD Open PNL #6 (EF1) '
/ ~'
/
GD Close PE #6 (EF1) / / Gi GH Open PNL #5 (EF1) / / Gi Close PE #5 (EF1) ~ _
/ ,
/
Of Qi Open PML #1 (EF1) / / Os Close PE #1 (EF1). ,
/ ,,
/
GK GK Open PNL #2 (EF1) / '
/
GK Close PE #2 (EF1) / / ( ..
' ~
(((Q
g _-. m _.__- ~ _- - 21.. .- . , - ~ - . 1703.02 SR Safety Classification
. FERMI 2 PROCEDURE - ADMINISTRATION TITLE: REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL (3L) H21-P623 POST-MOD TEST PROCEDURE NUMBER: 48.000.05 REVISION: O s
Name of preparer: M. Hobbs Technically reviewed by: Date: Rdviewed/ concurred by: Date: Supy - Operational Assurance
.- Approved by: Date:
Responsible Section Head or CSRO Mernber/ Alt Further Approval Required for Safety-Related or Superintendent-Designated Procedures: Recommended by: Date: OSRO Chaitsan/ Alternate Approved by: Date: Superintendent - Nuclear Production The following approved Procedure Change Requests are incorporated in this
-revision:
This revision l l does l l does not constitute periodic review. DRAF7
48.000.05 R;v. 0 TABLE OF CONIENIS fage 1.0 Purpose...................................... [ I 2.' O Re f e r e nc e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3.0 Req ui re d Equip me nt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4.0 Precautions and Limitations.... ............. 2 5.0 Prerequisites................................ 2 6.0 Procedure.................................... 2 7.0 Acceptance Criteria.......................... Attachments Prerequisites for Component (100785) Ope ration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At tachment 1 As Found Condition of Tested (100785) Comp o ne n t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A t tachme nt 2
,- Remote Shutdown Instrument (100785)
Channel Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . At tachment 3
# Independent Verification Sheet (100785)... . . . Attachment 4
...............................(100785)...... Attachment. 5 LBP/R479/1.0 100785 DRAFT 4
48.000.05 R2v. O P:gs 1 1.0 Scope and Purpose The scope of this procedure encompasses the entire Third Remote Shutdown Panel (3L). The testing will include actual verification of transferring control, of the affected components, from the Control Room to the 3L panel and various local shutdown panels. Each Component will be operated from its respective shutdown panel and a negative check performed. 2.0 R'e ferences 2.1 Use References 2.1.1 Plant Operations Manual (POM) Procedure 23.107.01, Standby Feedwater System 2.2 Source References 4 2.2.1 Fermi 2 Technical Specifications, Sections 3.3.10, 3.7.9 and 4.3.10.1, Tables 3.3.10 and 4.3.10 2.2.2 Plant Operations Manual (POM) 12.000.07, Plant Operations Manual Procedure 2.2.3 POM Procedure 12.000.12, Tagging and Protective Barrier System
' 2.2.4 POM Procedure 12.000.13, Radiation Work Permit 2.2.5 POM Procedure 12.000.15, PN-21 (Work Order) Processing 2.2.6 POM Procedure 12.000.43, Verification of Correct Performances of Operating Activities 2.2.7 POM Procedure 12.000.48, Plant housekeeping 2.2.8 POM Procedure 12.000.80, Conduct of Electrical Field Activities 2.2.9 EDP 1697, Dedicated Shutdown System - Control Panel H21-P623 Fabrication and Installation 2.2.10 EDP 1701, Dedicated Shutdown System - BOP switchgear and MCC Modifications, lighting, communications, ~
Fermi I Relay Room modifications, 120KV switchyard modifications 2.2.11 EDP 1702, Dedicated Shutdown System - Class IE MCC's and 4160V switchgear modifications, instrumentation installation and SRV control modification DRAFT
., - , . - , e ,
48.000.05 Rev. O Paga 2 3.0 Required Equipment Instrument Range Accuracy DVM 0-300V + .5% F. S. . 4.0 -Precautions and Limitations 4.1, It at any time during this test the safety of the plant is
~
affected control of the component is to be transferred back to the Control Room and the test discontinued and the NSS notified. 4.2 Ensure that no other testing or maintenance is in progress that will adversely affect the performance of this test. 4.3 If test results violate Technical Specification limits, notify the NSS immediately. 4.4 Communications will be required between Remote Shutdown Panel 4 H21-P623, various local shutdown panels and the Control Room. 4.5 This test can be performed in part to satisfy individual component testing requirements. 4.6 Af ter completion of this test ensure that an independent verification is performed per Attachment 4. 5.0 Prerequisites 5.1 The NSS has given permission to perform this test. 5.2 Prior to operating the component to-be tested ensure the prerequisites of Attachment I have been read. 5.3 Tne names of all test personnel are to be listed on Attachment 5. 6.0 Procedure 6.1 General Instructions 6.1.1 In order to verify positive and negative component operation checks station an observer at the Control Room control panel and the Remote / Local Shutdown panel. DRAFT
48.000.05 Riv. O Paga 3 i 6.1.2 The intent of this procedure is to verify the capability of:
- 1. Transferring control of affected components, from the Control Room to Remote / Local , Shutdown panels.
s
- 2. Operating affected components from the Remote /
- Local Shutdown panels.
- 3. Transferring control, of affected components, from Remote / Local Shutdown panels to the Control Room.
6.1.3 When operating components the general procedure to be followed is to:
- 1. Determine the as found condition of the component.
- 2. Transfer control of the affected component to the Remote / Local Shutdown panel.
- 3. Cycle the affected component. ((Cycle implies one complete operational cycle from as found to alternate back to as found.) The steps to accomplish this may be performed in either order to accomplish one cycle from the as found
, condition, e 4. Perform negative checks to verify the affected component cannot be controlled from another panel.
- 5. Transfer control of the affected component from the Remote / Local Shutdown panel to the Control Room.
6.1.4 Independent Verification is to be performed at the en! of this test to verify that control of all affected components has been returned to the Control Room an( left in the as found conditio4. 6.1.5 All controls and indications are located on COP panels Hil-P601, Hil-P603, Hil-P808, Hil-P828 and Remote / Local Shutdown panels H21-P100, H21-P623, H21-P624, H21-P625, H21-P626, H21-P627 and H21-P628 unless otherwise noted. 6.2 Verification of Component Control from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624 DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Pcg2 4 NOTE: Control of the components listed below will be i transferred to - he Local Shutdown panel.
- 1. Feed to RER Pump C
- 2. Normal Feed to Bus from SS64
~
- 3. Feed from EDG #12
- 4. Feed to 72C Bus
- 5. Maintenance T6 65T
- 6. Core Spray Pump C Prerequisites to operation for the above components are listed on Attachment 1.
6.2.1 Perform the following for the Feed to RHR Pump'C:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
,- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of RHR Pump C on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of RHR Pump C from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624 by placing I transfer switch S43-C5 in the LOCAL position.
/.
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for RHR Pump C in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date l DRAFT l
.__.--4 .. _ . _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ . . _ __ .._._m . - -
48.000.05 Rev. O P ga 5
- 6. Verify that RHR Pump C operates in response to CNC switch " RESIDUAL HEAT REMOVAL PUMP C", located on panel H21-P624. Cycle the pump as necessary.
- a. ON . /
Verified By/Date
- b. OFF /
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that RHR Pump C does not respond to the CHC switch on panel H11-P601 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date . 8. Transfer control of RHR Pump C from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch S43-05 in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for RHR Pump C in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that RHR Pump C operates in response to its CMC switch on CDP panel H11-P601 in the Control Room. Cycle the pump as necessary.
- a. ON / l Verified By/Date )
- b. OFF /
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that RHR Pump C does not respond to its CNC switch on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that RHR Pump C is lef t in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Pag 2 6 6.2.2 Perform the following for the Feed to Bus from SS64:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found conditions of 4160V C6 breaker on Attachment 2.
/
Verified Sy/Date
- 4. Transfer control of 4160V breaker C6 from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624 by placing transfer switch S43-C6 in the IDCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date s '
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for 4160V breaker C6 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that 4160V breaker C6 operates in response l to CMC switch "4160V POS C6 INCOMING BREAKER l CONIROL", located on panel H21-P624. Operate the l breaker as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date i 1 URAF1 l
. --.. s~. ~ a..-.- . . .. . . . ~ . . ~ .. -. .
48.000.05 Rev. O Paga 7
- 7. Verify that 4160V breaker C6 does not respond to the CNC switch on panel H11-P601 in the Control Room.
Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of 4160V breaker C6' from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624 to the control Room by placing transfer switch S43-C6 in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for 4160V breaker.C6 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that 4160V breaker C6 operates in response to its CMC switch on CDP panel H11-P601 in the Control Room. Cycle the pump as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
,- Verified By/Date v b. CLO SE . /
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that 4160V breaker C6 does not respond to its CMC switch on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that 4160V breaker C6 is lef t 'in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/ ,
Verified By/Date ! 6.2.3 Perform the following for the Feed from EDG #12:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been l met. !
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Paga 8
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary l for plant operations.
/
Veri,fied By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of 4160V breaker C8 on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of 4160V breaker C8 from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624 by placing transfer switch S43-C8 in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for 4160V breaker C8 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
, 6. Verify that 4160V breaker C8 operates in response to CMC switch "4160V DIESAL GEN BUS # 12EB BREAKER CONTROL", located on panel H21-P624. Operate the breaker as necessary,
- s. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that 4160V breaker C8 does not respond to the CMC switch on panel H11-P601 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of 4160V breaker C8 f rom Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch S43-C8 in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/ Data DRAfl
48.000.05 Rev. O Pigs 9
- 9. Verify there is indication for 4160V breaker C8 in the Control Room.
/
Veri,fied By/Date
- 10. Verify that 4160 breaker C8 operates in response to its CMC switch on COP panel H11-P601 in the Control Room. Cycle the pump as necessary.
~
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that 4160V breaker C8 does not respond to its CMC awitch on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624.
/
Verified By/Date
- 19. . Verify that 4160 breaker C8 is lef t in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
,- Verified By/Date e '
6.2.4 Perform the followit.,3 for the Feed to 72C Bus:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of 4160V breaker C11 on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Pcg2 10
- 4. Transfer control of 4160V breaker C11 from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624 by placing transfer switch S43-C11 in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for 4160 V breaker C11 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that 4160V breaker C11 operates in responee to CMC switch "ESS BUS 72C TRAliSF R1400S023A PRItiARY CONIROL", located on panel H21-P624 as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that 4160V breaker C11 does not respond to
- the CMC switch on panel H11-P601 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of 4160V breaker C11 from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch S43-C11 in the CONIROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for 4160V breaker C11 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that 4160V breaker C11 operates in response to its CM: switch on COP panel H11-P601 in the Control Room. Cycle the pump as necessary.
DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Pega 11
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Veri,fied By/Date
- 11. Verify that 4160V breaker C11 does not respond to its CMC switch on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that 4160V breaker C11 is left in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.2.5 Perform the following for the 6ST Maintenance Tie:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
,- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of 4160V breaker C9 on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. With the Control Power Cutof f Switch, on Local shutdown Panel H21-P624, in the ON position verify that the green indication light on 4160V
, switchgear position C9 and the CNC switch in the Control Room is on.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify voltage is present when measured at terminal AJ10 with respect with AJ3.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Paga 12
- 6. With the Control Power Cutoff Switch, on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624, in the OFF position verify that the green indication light on 4160V switchgear pos91on C9 and the CIC switch in the Control Room is off. -
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify voltage is not present when measured at terminal AJ10 with respect to AJ3.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Verify that 4160V breaker C9 is left in the ar.
found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. *4 . 6 Perform the following for Core Spray Pump C:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
, /
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date _
- 3. Record the as foand condition of 4160V breaker C10 on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. With the Control Power Cutoff Switch, on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624, in the ON position verify that the green indication light on 4160V switchgear position C10 and the C)C switch in the Control Room is on. ,
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Pag 2 13 5.. Verify voltage is present when measured at terminal AJ10 with respect to AJ3.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. With the Control Power Cutoff Switch, on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624, in the OFF position verify that the green indication light on 4160V switchgear position C10 and the CNC switch in the ' !
Control Room is off.
/
Verified By/Date j' 7. Verify voltage is not present when measured at terminal AJ10 with respect to AJ3.
/
c' Verified By/Date
- 8. Verify that 4160 breaker C10 is left in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.3 ' Verification of Component Control from Local Shutdown Panel
-' H21-P625.
NOTE: Control of the components listed below will be transferred to the Local Shutdown panel.
- 1. - T4100B018 - RHR Emergency Equipment Cooler Fan il
- 2. E1150F009 -- RHR Shutdown Cooling Inboard Isolation Valve
- 3. P4400F606A - EECW From Dry' ell Equipment Stop Valve I
- 4. P4400F607A - EECW To Drywell Equipment Stop Valve
- 5. E1150F003A - RHR Heat Exchanger Shell Side Outlet Valve A
- 6. E1150F004C - RHR Supply From Suppression Pool to Pump 2C
- 7. E1150F006C -' RHR Shutdown Cooling Valve A
- 8. E1150F016A - RHR Outboard Containment Spray Valve B
- 9. E1150F047A - RHR Heat Exchanger Shell Side Inlet Valve A 11RAF1 m +.-yr - . --- w
48.000.05 Rsv. O Pegs 14
- 10. E1150F068A - RHR Service Water Control Valve
- 11. Ell 50F048A - RHR Heat Exchanger Shell Side Bypass Valve A
- 12. P4400F602A - EECW Heat Exchanger Inlet Valve A
- 13. T4700C002 - Drywell Cooling Fan #2 .
Prerequisites to operation for the above components are listed on Attachment 1. 6.3.1 Perform the following for RHR Cooler Fan #1, T41-B018
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of RHR Cooler Fan #1 (T41-B018) on Attachment 2.
,. '/
Verified By/Date s
- 4. Transfer control of RHR Cooler Fan #1 from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-3A in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for RHR Cooling Fan #1 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that RHR Cooler Fan #1 operates in response to CMC switch "RHR EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT COOLER FAN
#1", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the fan as necessary.
DRAF1 l
Rev. O Paga 15
- a. ON /
Verified By/Date
- b. OFF /
Verified By/Da6e
- 7. Verify that RHR Cooler Fan #1 does not respond to the CMC switch on panel Hil-P828 in the Control
. Room.
, /
Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of RHR Cooler Fan #1 from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 to the Control Room by placing transfer witch 43A-3A in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for RHR Cooler Fan #1 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that RHR Cooler Fan #1 operates in response
' to its CMC switch on COP panel Hil-P828 in the Control Room. Cycle the fan as necessary.
- a. ON /
Verified By/Date
- b. OFF -/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that RHR Cooler Fan #1 does not respond .o its CMC switch on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that RHR Cooler Fan #1 is lef t in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.3.2 Perform the following for RHR valve El-F009. DRAF1
48.000.05 R:v. O Pags 16
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date , 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations. 2
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve Ell-F009 on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve Ell-F009 from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-3C in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
,- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve Ell-F009 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve Ell-F009 operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "RHR SUCT COOLING INBD VLV F009", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve Ell-F009 does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date DRAfl
48.000.05 R;v. O P:ge 17
- 8. Verify that valve Ell-F009 does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P100.
/
Veri 5ied By/Date Transfer control of valve Ell-F009 from Local
~
9. Shutdown Panel H21-P625 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-3C in the CONTROL ROOM position.
~
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify there is indication for valve Ell-F009 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve Ell-F009 operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on C0P panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
, a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date s
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve Ell-F009 does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date
- 13. Verify that valve Ell-F009 does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P100.
/
Verified By/Date
- 14. Verify that valve Ell-F009 is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFI
i 48.000.05 s Rev. 0 Paga 18-u \l 6.3.3 Perform the following for EECW valve P44-F606A
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
~
l Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the cs found condition of valve P44-F606A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer cor. trol of valve P44-F606A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing' transfer switch 43S-4C in the LOCAL position; x; +, i
/
i Verified By/Date
, g
- 5. Verify there is a loss of, indication for valve P44-F606A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve P44-F606A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "EECW FR0ti DRYWL OUTBD ISO P44-F606A", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OF Ni /
A 'Verif,ted By/Date
's s
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
\
~
\
a k sy ~
~
DRAF1
48.000.05 Rev. O P ga 19-7.- Verify that valve P44-F606A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of valve P44-F606A from Local
- Shutdown Panel H21-P625 to the Control Roon by placing transfer switch 43S-4C in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve P44-F606A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve P44-F606A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on 00P panel H11-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
,- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date s
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve P44-F606A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve P44-F606A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
f Verified By/Date 6.3.4 Perform the following for EECW valve P44-F607A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
, _ _ _ _ _ _ . - - . , _ _ . . - p. . ; _ _ ; .; _ _ _ __ _ .. _
!} 48.000.05 R2v. O P:gs 20 ,
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
. 3. Record the as found condition of valve P44-F607A on Attachment 2.
. . /
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve P44-F607A from the Control Room to Lccal Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-4D in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss,of indication for valve P44-F607A in the Control Room. .
/
Verified By/Date
, 6. Verify that valve P44-F607A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch s "EECW TO DRYWL ISOLATION P44-F607A", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN ,- /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
". 7. Verify that valve P44-F607A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room.
/
i Verified By/Date
< 8. Transfer control of valve P44-F607A from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 to the Control Room by
. placing transfer switch 43C-4D in the CONTROL ROOM
,, position.
/
Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 ; Rev. O l Paga 21 l l l
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve P44-F607A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve P44-F607A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on C0P panel H11-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve P44-F607A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve P44-F607A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.3.5 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F003A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve Ell-F003A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date ORAFI
48.000.05 R:v. O Pags 22
- 4. Transfer control of valve Ell-F003A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-5A in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve Ell-F003A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve Ell-F003A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "RHR HX A OUTLET VLV F003A", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve Ell-F003A does not respond to
.- the open and close pushbutton switches on panel Hil-F601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of valve E11-F003A from Local Shutdown Panel H21-F625 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-5A in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve Ell-F003A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date I DRAFT
. _ _ _ . ~ _ . _ _ _ . _ _ _ . . . , _m . . .~ . ..-.._. _ .~ _,
48.000.05 Rev. O Pzg3 23
- 10. Verify that valve Ell-FOO?A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on COP panel-Hil-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date r
- b. COE /
. . Verified By/Date
, 11. Verify that valve Ell-F003A does not respond to j the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625. 7 Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve Ell-F003A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
E
/
Verified By/Date 6.3.6 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F004C:
,- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been
. met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve Ell-F004C on Attachment 2.
i
/
!' Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve Ell-F004C from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-5B in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 Rev. O Page 24
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve Ell-F004C in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve Ell-F004C operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "SUPPR POOL TO PUNF C VLV F004C", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve Ell-F004C does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date R. Transfer control of valve E11-F004C from Local Shutdown Panel H21-F625 to the Control Room by
, placing transfer switch 43S-5B in the CONIROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve E11-F004C in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve E11-F004C operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on C0P panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary,
- s. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date DRAF1
.Rev. O Piga 25
- 11. Verify that valve E11-F004C does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date i
- 12. Verify that valve E11-F004C is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
l Verified By/Date 6.3.7 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F006C:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By'/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve E11-F006C e '
on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date i
- 4. Transfer control of valve E11-F006C from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-5C in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there ia a loss of indication for valve E11-F006C in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve E11-F006C operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "SDC SUCT TO RHR PUW C VLV F006L", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
48.000.05 Rev. O Peg 2 26
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verigied By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve E11-F006C does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of valve E11-F006C .from Local
' Shutdown Panel H21-F625 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-5C in the CONIROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve E11-F006C in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve E11-F006C operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on COP panel H11-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Veri tied By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve E11-F006C does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve E11-F006C is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS. ,
l
/
Verified By/Date HAFT
48.000.05 R v. O Peg 2 27 6.3.8 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F016A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
~
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve Ell-F016A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve E11-F016A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-5D in the LOCAL position.
/ ,- Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve Ell-F016A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve Ell-F016A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton swite's "CONIM SPRAY OUTBD ISO VLV F016A", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 Rev. O P2ga 28
- 7. Verify that valve E11-F016A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room.
. /
Verified By/Date
-8.. Transfer control of valve E11-F016A from Local Shutdown Panel H21-F625 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-5D in the CONIROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve Ell-F016A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve Ell-F016A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on C0P panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
,- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve E11-F016A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve E11-F016A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.3.9 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F047A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date ORAFl
48.000.05 Rev. O P;32 29
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve E11-F047A on Attachment 2.
/
~
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve Ell-F047A from the
< Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-6A in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve Ell-F047A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
,- 6. Verify that valve E11-F047A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "RHR HEAT EXCH A INL.VLV F047A", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date i'
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve E11-F047A does not respond to the~open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of valve E11-F047A from Local Shutdown Panel H21-F625 to the control Room by
. placing transfer switch 43S-6A in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date ORAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Paga 30
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve Ell-F047A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve Ell-F047A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton
~
switches on C0P panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve Ell-F047A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Sh.stdown Panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve Ell-F047A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
e ' Verified By/Date 6.3.10 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F068A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve E11-F068A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 ) Rev. O Piga 31
- 4. Transfer control of valve Ell-F068A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-6B in the LOCAL position.
/ J Verified By/Date l
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve ;
Ell-F068A in the Control Room.
/
> Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve E11-F068A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "RHR SW CONTROL VLV, VLV F068A", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve Ell-F068A does_not respond to
, - - the open and close pushbutton switches on panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room.
/
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Verify that valve Ell-F068A does not respcind to the open and close pushbutton switches on ? emote Shutdown Panel H21-F100.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Transfer control of valve E11-F068A from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 to the Control Room by I placing transfer switch 43S-6B in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date l ORAFT
48.000.05 ' ' R;v. O f P;gs 32
- 10. Verify there'is indication for valve Ell-F068A in the Control Room.
- 11. Verify that valve Ell-F068A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on COP panel H11-P601, in the Control J Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.-
- a. OPEN / -l Verified By/Date {
- b. CLOSE /
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve Ell-F068A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date
- 13. '
.fy that valve Ell-F068A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P100.
/
Verified By/Date
- 14. Verify that valve Ell-F068A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date . 6.3.11 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F048A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date E DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Pig 2 33
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve Ell-F048A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve Ell-F048A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-6D in the LOCAL
. position.
, / Verified By/Date
, 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve E11-F048A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve Ell-F048A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "RHR HEAT EXCH A BYP VLV F048A", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
- Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve Ell-F048A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Verify that valve Ell-F048A does onot respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown panel H21-P100.
/
Verified By/Date I 1 l l l DRAFT ,
~
n 48.000.05 Rev. O Pag 2 34
- 9. Transfer control of valve E11-F048A from Local Shutdown panel H21-P625 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-6D in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify there is indication for valve E11-F048A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve E11-F048A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on COP panel H11-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date a
- b. CLOSE
/
,- Verified By/Date
-' 12. Verify that valve E11-F048A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date
- 13. Verify that valve E11-F048 does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown panel H21-P100.
/
Verified By/Date
- 14. Verify that valve E11-F048A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.3.12 Perform the following for EECW valve P44-F602A: DRAF1
48.000.05 Rev. O Pega 35
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date Verify the component to be tested is not necessary
~
2. for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve P44-F602A on Attachnent 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve P44-F602A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-7A in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
, 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve P44-F602A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve P44-F602A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "EECW DIV I HX INLET ISO P44-F602A", located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. CPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve P44-F602A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date DHAfl
Rev. O PIga 36
- 8. Transfer control of valve P44-F602A frva Local Shutdown panel H21-P625 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-7A in the CONIROL ROOM position.
~
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verif.y there is indication for valve P44-F602A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve P44-F602A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on C0P panel H11-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary,
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
.. /
Verified By/Date s
- 11. Verify that valve P44-F602A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton swit ,.es on Local Shutdown panel H21-P625.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valvr P44-F602A is in the as found condition or as firected by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.3.13 Perform the following for Drywell Cooling Fan #2, T47-C002.
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date DRAfl - _
48.0?0.05 Rev. O Pega 37 i
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Veri,fied By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of Drywell Cooling Fan #2 (T47-C002) on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of Drywell Cooling Fan #2 from the Control Room to Local Shutdown panel H21-P625 by placing transfer switch 43S-9C in the Local position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for Drywell Cooling Fan #2 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
,- 6. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #2 operates in response to CMC switch "DRYWELL COOLING 2",
located on panel H21-P625. Cycle the fan as necessary.
- a. ON
/
Verified By/Date
- b. OFF
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #2 responds to the High/ Low Speed selector switch, located on panel H21-P625, and that the High/ Low speed indicator lights give proper speed indication. Cycle the fan as necessary.
DRAFT,
48.000.05 Rev. O Pag 2 38
- a. HIGH SPEED
/
Verified By/Date
- b. LOW SPEED
/
- Verified By/Date
^
- 8. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #2 does not respond to the CNC switch on panel H11-P808 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Transfer control of Drywell Cooling Fan #2 from Local Shutdown panel H21-P625 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-9C in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/ '
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify there is indication for Drywell Cooling Fan
, #2 in the Control Room. < /
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #2 operates in response to its CMC switch on CUP panel H11-P808 in the Control Room. Cycle the fan as necessary.
- a. ON
/
Verified By/Date
- b. OFF
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #2 responds to its High/ Low speed selector switch, located on panel H11-P808, in the Control Room. Cycle the fan as nece ssary.
DRAF1
48.000.05 Rev. O Pega 39
- a. HIGH
/
Verified By/Date
'b. LOW
/
Verified By/Date
- 13. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #2 does not respond to the CNC switch on Local Shutdown panel H21-P625. ,
/
Verified By/Date
- 14. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #2 is left in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.4 Verification of Component Control from Local Shutdown panel H21-P626. ,- NOTE: Control of the components listed below will be transferred to the Local Shutdown panel.
- 1. E1150F028A - RHR Containment Spray Chamber Isolation Valve
- 2. E1150F024A - RHR Suppression Pool Containment Spray By-Pass Valve
- 3. T4700C001 - Drywell Cooling Fan #1
- 4. E1150F004A - RHR Suppression Pool to Suction Pump 2A Valve t
- 5. E1150F611A - RHR Recirculation Outboard Bypass Valve i
Prerequisites to operation for the above components are listed on Attachment 1. 6.4.1 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F028A
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date . l l ORAFT I
48.000.05
'Riv. O Pags 40 I
t 2. Verify'the component to be tested.is not necessary , for' plant operations. !
. /
*L Verified By/Date
~
- 3. -Record the as found condition of valve Ell-F028A on Attachment 2.
/
4
- Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve Ell-F028A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown panel H21-P626 by placing transfer switch 43S-2A in the LOCAL position.
^
/ .,
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve Ell-F028A in the Control Room.
/
Verifie d By/Date
,- 6. Verify that valve Ell-F028A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton. switch "SUPPR CHMB SP OUTBD ISO VLV F028A", located on panel H21-P626. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
.I Verify that valve Ell-F028A does not respond to 7.
the open and close pushbutton switches on panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room. ,
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Pag 2 41
- 8. Verify that valve E11-F028A does not respond to
. the.open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown panel H21-P100.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Transfer control of valve E11-F028A from Local Shutdown panel H21-P626 to the Control Roon by
, placing transfer switch 43S-2A in the CONIROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Dat.
- 10. Verify there is indication for valve E11-F028A it the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve E11-F028A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on C0P panel H11-P601, in the Control; Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
, s. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve E11-F028A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown panel H21-P626.
/
Verified By/Date
- 13. Verify that valve E11-F028A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown panel H21-P100.
/
Verified By/Date ORAFI
48.000.05 Rev. O Pcg2 42
- 14. Verify that valve E11-F028A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.4.2 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F024A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified.By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve E11-F024A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
,- 4. Transfer control of valve E11-F024A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown panel H21-P626 by s '
placing transfer switch 43S-5A in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve E11-F024A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve E11-F024A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "SUPPR POOL COOLING / TEST E11-F024A", located on panel H21-P626. Cycle the valve as necessary,
- s. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O P g2 43
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve E11-F024A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Verify that valve E11-F024A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown panel H21-P100.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Transfer control of valve E11-F024A from Local
- Shutdown Panel H21-P626 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-5A in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify there is indication for valve E11-F024A in s '
the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve E11-F024A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on C0P panel H11-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE 1
/ 1 Verified By/Date l
- 12. Verify that valve E11-F024A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown panel H21-P626.
/
Verified By/Date DRAF1
-- _ .-1
48.000.05 l Rev. 0 ) Pzga 44
- 13. Verify that valve E11-F024A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote '
j Shutdown panel H21-P100.
/
Verified By/Date -
- 14. Verify that valve E11-F024A is in the as found i condi. tion or as directed by the NSS.
I l Verified By/Date ! a 6.4.3 Perform the following for Drywell Cooling Fan #1, T47-C001. j
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
,- Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of Drywell Cooling Fan #1 (T47-C001) on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of Drywell Cooling Fan #1 from the Control Room to Local Shutdown panel H21-P626 by placing transfer switch 43S-1AR in the Local position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for Drywell Cooling Fan #1 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date ORAFT
48.000.05 R;v. O Pzg2 45
- 6. Verify that.Drywell Cooling Fan #1 operates in response to CMC switch "DRYWELL C00 LING '1",
located on panel H21-P626. Cycle the fan as necessary.
- a. ON
/
Verified By/Date
~ '
- b. OFF
/
Verified By/Date Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #1 responds to the
~
7. High/ Low Speed selector switch, located on panel H21-P626, and that the High/ Low speed indicator lights give proper speed indication. Cycle the fan as necessary.
- a. HIGH SPEED
/
Verified By/Date
.. b. LOW SPEED
' /
Verified By/Date
- 8. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #1 does noc respond to the CMC switch on panel H11-P808 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Transfer control of Drywell Cooling Fan #1 from Local Shutdown panel H21-P626 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-IAR in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify there is indication for Drywell Cooling Fan
#1 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 _s c Rev. O P g2 46 g.
- 11. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #1 operetes in response to its CMC switch on C0P panel H11-P808 in the Control Room. Cycle the fan as necessary.
9 ~
- a. ON N. ,
/
Verified By/Date
- b. OFF
/ ,
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #1 responda to its High/ Low speed selector switch, located on panel H11-P808, in the Control Room. Cycle the fan as necessary.
- a. HIGH s /
Verified By/Date
- b. LOW
, /
Verified By/Date
- 13. Verify that Drywel3. 'dooling Fin'#1 does not respond to the CtC switch o'n Local Shutdoun Panel H21-P626.
b '1 Verified By/Date
- 16. Verify that Drywell Cooling Fan #1 is left in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 1 6.4.4 Perform the following for. RHR valve E11-F004A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
\ /
Q Verified By/Date 90 AFT m
48.000.05 Rev. O Pigs 47
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve E11-F004A on Attachment 2.
l Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve E11-F004A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown panel H21-P626 by placing transfer switch 43S-3AR in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve E11-F004A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
, 6. Verify that valve E11-F004A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch / "SUPPR POOL TO PUMP A VLV F004A", located on panel H 21-P 626. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLJSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve E11-F004A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFl
., - . - , . . - - - , . . - - - . . . - - - - ~ , . . . -
48.000.05 Ray. 0 Page 48 '> 1
- ?
- 8. Verify that valve E11-F004A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote '
Shutdown panel H21-P100. . .
. / '[
Verified By/Date f
- 9. Transfer control of valve E11-F004A from Local ..
Shutdown panel H21-P626 to the Control Room by ". h- placing transfer switch 43S-3AR in the CONTROL ie ROOH position.
/
Verified By/Date i F
- 10. Verify there is indication for valve E11-F004A in ./
the Control Room. i 4
/ L.s Verified By/Date s E /,;
- 11. Verify that valve E11-F004A operates in response M i to the respective open and close pushbutton 'i l switches on COP panel H11-P601, in the Control
- Room. Cycle the valve as necessary. *
,- a. OPEN L_ # [
Verified By/Date S 70
- b. CLOSE l
.S Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve E11-F004A does not respond to Q
_ the open and closa pushbutton switches on Local c Shutdown panel H21-P626. (fl $
/ .Id Verified By/Date j
- 13. Verify that valve E11-F004A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown panel H21-P100.
I'[i 4
.p
/ 2 Verified By/Date
- i a 3 m
f n i _ URAFI ,1 4.
-. . . . . t
48.000.05 Rev. O Peg 2 49
- 14. Verify that valve E11-F004A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.4.5 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F611A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been
. . met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve E11-F611A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve E11-F611A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown panel H21-P626 by placing transfer switch 43S-5DR in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve l
E11-F611A in the Control Room. ! / Verified By/Date i ' 6. Verify that valve E11-F611A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch l "RHR RECIRC OTBD BYPASS E1150-F611A", located on , l ' panel H21-P626. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date DRAfl
Rev. O Paga 50
- b. CLOSE Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve E11-F611A does not r'espond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of valve E11-F611A from Local Shutdown panel H21-P626 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-5DR in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve E11-F611A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
, 10. Verify that valve E11-F611A operates in response to the respective open sad close pushbutton v '
switches on COP panel H11-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve E11-F611A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown panel H21-PG26.
/
V6rified By/Date QRAf1
48.000.05 R .v . O Pago 51
- 12. Verify that valve Ell-F611A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.5 Verification of Component Control from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627 NCTIE: Control of the components listed below will be transferred to the Local Shutdown Panel.
- 1. 53105F031A - Recirc Pump A Discharge Valve A
- 2. E1150F010 - RHR Crossheader Shutdown Valve
- 3. E1150F015A - RHR Inspection Valve A
- 4. Ell 50F017A - RHR Outboard Recirc Isolation Pump A Prerequisites to operation for the above components are listed on Attachment 1.
6.5.1 Perform the following for valve B31-F031A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been
,- met.
< l Verified By/Date ,
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve B31-F031A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified by/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve B31-F031A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627 by placing transfer switch 43S-1B in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date l l QRAfl
r ., . _ 48.000.05 Rev. O Peg 2 52
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve B31-F031A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve B31-F031A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton Ewitch "RECIRC PUMP A DISCH VLV F031A", located on panel H21-P627. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve B31-F031A does not respond .to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P603, in the Control Room.
/
,- Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of valve B31-F031A from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 435-1B in the CONIROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve B31-F031A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve B31-F031A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on COP H11-P603, in the Control Room.
Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date l I
%9tS%%)
Rev. O P:ga 53
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve B31-F031A does not r'espond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627.
/
- Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve B31-F031A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.5.2 Perform the following for RHR valve E11-F010:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
,, 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve E11-F010 on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve E11-F010 from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627 by placing transfer switch 43S-2B in the LOCAL l position.
/
Verified By/Date l DRAF1
48.000.05 R:;v. O i P:gs 54 l 1 {
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve i Ell-F010 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve Ell-F010 operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch
" CROSSTIE HEADER VLV F010", located on panel H21-P627. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve Ell-F010 does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel Hll-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
# 8. Transfer control of valve Ell-F010 from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-2B in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve Ell-F010 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve Ell-F010 operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on C0P Hil-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT .
48.000.05 Rsv. O Psga 55
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve Ell-F010 does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve Ell-F010 is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.5.3 Perform the following for RHR valve Ell-F015A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met. -
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve Ell-F015A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve Ell-F015A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627 by placing transfer switch 43S-2C in the LOCAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve
. Ell-F015A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date l DRAFT
48.000.05 R;v. O Pega 56
- 6. Verify that valve Ell-F015A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "RHR TO RECIRC INBD ISO VLV F015A", located on panel H21-P627. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve Ell-F015A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Verify that valve Ell-F015A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Lemote Shutdown Panel H21-P100.
,. /
Verified By/Date
- 9. Transfer control of valve Ell-F015A from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-2C in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify there is indication for valve Ell-F015A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve Ell-F015A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on COP Hil-P601, in the Control Room.
Cycle the valve as necessary. DRAF1
48.000.05 Rev. O Pega 57 1
- a. OPEN
/ I Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve E11-F015A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627.
/
Verified By/Date
- 13. Verify that valve E11-F015A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P100.
/
Verified By/Date
- 14. Verify that valve E11-F015A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
.- j
' Verified By/Date 6.5.4 Perform the following for KHR valve E11-F017A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve E11-F017A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 R v. O Pags 58
- 4. Transfer control of valve Ell-F017A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627 by placing transfer switch 43S-3A in the LOCAL position.
/
- Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve Ell-F017A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve Ell-F017A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "RHR TO OUTBD ISO VLV F017A", located on panel H21-P627. Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
. / Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
, /
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve Ell-F017A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Verify that valve Ell-F017A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-PIOO.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Transfer control of valve Ell-F017A from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-3A in the CONTROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 Rav. O Psga 59
- 10. Verify there is indication for valve E11-F017A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve E11-F017A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches on COP H11-P601, in the Control Room.
Cycle the valve as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve E11-F017A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local
- Shutdown Panel H21-P627.
/
.- Verified By/Date
# 13. Verify that valve E11-F017A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P100.
/
Verified By/Date
- 14. Verify that valve E11-F017A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.6 Verification of Component Control from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P628 NOTE: Control of the components listed below will be f transferred to the Local Shutdown Panel. l
- 1. P4400F616 - EECW Return from Isolation Valve V8-3890 i
l 11RAn l
48.000.05 Riv. O Pege 60 l Prerequisites to operation for the above component is listed on Attachment 1.
.6.6.1 Perform the following for EECW valve P44-F616A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testin have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve P44-F616A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Transfer control of valve P44-F616A from the Control Room to Local Shutdown Panel H21-P628 by placing transfer switch 43S-4B in the LOCAL
.- position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve P44-F616A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve P44-F616A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "EECW FROM DRYWL INBD ISO P44-F616A", located on panel H21-P628. Cycle the valve as necessary,
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date BRM1 . . t
48.000.05 Rxv. O P2ge 61
- 7. Verify that valve P44-F616A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Transfer control of valve P44-F616A from Local Shutdown Panel H21-P628 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch 43S-4B in the CONTROL ROOM
~
position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve P44-F616A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve P44-F616A operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switches.on C0P panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room. Cycle the valve as necessary.
-- a. OPEN s j Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve P44-F616A does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P628.
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Verify that valve P44-F616A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date DRAE1 0 =- = s_,-
48.000.05 Rev. O Pzga 62 6.7 Verification of Control of the Standby Feedwater System and 64V, 65W 4160V Breakers 'from Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623. NOTE: Co7 trol of the Standby Feedwater System (SEFW) will be transferred to Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623. The system components that are affected are lis'ted below.
- 1. N2103F002 - SBFW Flow Control Valve
- 2. N2103F003 - SBFW Flow Control Valve
- 3. N2103F001 - SBFW Isolation Valve
- 4. N2103C001 - SBFW Pump A
- 5. N2103C002 - SBFW Pump B
- 6. 64V, Pos V1 4160V Breaker
- 7. 64V, Pos V3 4160V Breaker
- 8. 65W, Pos W5 4160V Breaker Prerequisites to operation for the above components are listed on Attachment 1.
- 6.7.1 Transfer control of SBFW and 64V, 65W 4160V Breakers from the Control Room to Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623
# by placing the "EF2 SYSTEM TRANSFER SWITCH" transfer switch, located on panel H21-P623, to the REMOTE position.
/
Verified By/Date 6.7.2 Perform the following for SBFW valve N2103F002:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is r.ot necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
. DRAF1
48.000.05 Rev. O Pega 63
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve N2103F002 on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve N2103F002 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that valve N2103F002 operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "SBFW FLOW CONTROL, N21-F002", located on panel H21-P623. Cycle the valve as necessary. Leave valve N2103F002 in the closed position.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/ .- Verified By/Date # Valve N2103h002 lef t in closed position.
c.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve N2103F002 does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601 .n the Control Room.
l Verified By/Date 6.7.3 Perform the following for SBFW valve N2103F003:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O pig 2 64
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve N2103F003 on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve N2103F003.in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that valve N2103F003 operates in response to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "SBFW FLOW CONTROL, N21-F003", located on panel H21-P623. Cycle the valve as necessary. Leave valve N2103F003 in the closed position.
- a. OPEN
.- /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- c. Valve N2103N003 lef t in closed position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve N2103F003 does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date 6.7.4 Perform the following for SBFW valve N2103F001:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT . . .. _ l
48.000.05 I Rev. O P2gs 65 i l {
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary l for plant operations. l
/
Veri'fied By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of valve N2103F001 on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve N2103F001 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that valve N2103F001 operates in response !
to the respective open and close pushbutton switch "SBfW ISLATION VALVE, N21-F001", located on panel H21-P623. Cycle the valve as necessary. Leave valve N2103F001 in the closed n,sition.
- a. OPEN
,. /
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- c. Valve N2103N001 lef t in closed position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that valve N2103F001 does not respond to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 Rev. O Paga 66 6.7.5 Perform the following for SBFW Pump A:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
! Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of pump A on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Verify there is a loss of indication for pump A in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that pump A operates in response to CMC
- switch "SBFW PUMP A BKR CONTROL" located on panel 4 ,
H21-P623. Cycle the pump as necessary.
- a. ON
/
Verified By/Date
- b. OFF
. /
Verifiad By/Date
- 6. Verify that SBFW Pump A does not respond to the CMC switch on panel Hil-P601 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve N2103F001 auto opens and closes when SBFW Pump A is started.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date 1 a 1 URAfl . r-W *
- 48.000.05 Rev. O Pzga 67
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date 6.7.6 Perform the following for SBFW Pump B:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.-
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of pump B on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Verify there is a loss of indication for pump B in the Control Room.
/
# Verified By/Date -
- 5. Verify that pump B operates in response to CMC switch "SBFW PUMP B BKR CONTROL" located on panel H21-P623. Cycle the pump as necessary,
- a. ON
/
Verified By/Date
- b. OFF
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that SBFW Pump B does not respond to the CHC switch on panel H11-P601 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date 0RAB !
48.000.05 R;v. O Pigs 68
- 7. Verif y that valve N2103F001 auto opens and closes when SBFW Pump B is started.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date 6.7.7 Perform the following for 4160V, 64V Position VI, breaker:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
.- Verified By/Date
' 3. Record the as found condition of the component to be tested on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Verify there is a loss of indication for 4160V breaker 64V, pos VI, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that 4160V breaker 64V pos VI operates in response to CMC switch "4160V POS V1 BKR CONIROL",
located on panel H21-P623. Operate the breaker as necessary.
- a. OPEN
~
/
Verified By/Date BRAfl
48.000.05 Rev. O Pega 69
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that 4160V breaker 64V pos VI does not respond to the CMC switch on panel H11-P809 in the Control Room.
~
/
Verified By/Date 6.7.8 Perform the following for 4160V, 64V Position V3, breaker: i 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of the component to
' be tested on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Verify there is a loss of indication for 4160V breaker 64V, pos V3, in the Cont.rol Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that 4160V breaker 64V pos V3 operates in response to CNC switch "4160V POS V3 BKR CONTROL",
located on panel H21-P623. Operate the breaker as necessary.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 Rev. O Pcg2 70 l l
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date 1
- 6. Verify that 4160V breaker 64V pos V3 does not respond to the CHC switch on panel H11-P809 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date 6.7.9 Perform the following for 4160V, 65W Position W3, breaker:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Record the as found condition of the component to
- be tested on Attachment 2.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Verify there is a loss of indicatisn for 4160V breaker 65W, pos W5, in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that 4160V breaker 65W pos W5 operates in response to CMC switch "4160V POS W5 BKR CONTROL",
located on panel H21-P623. Operate the breaker as necessary,
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Da2e DRAFT j
48.000.05 RLv. O P:ga 71
- 6. Verify that 4160V breaker 65W pos W5 does not respond to the CMC switch on panel H11-P809 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date 6.7.10 Transfer control of SBFW from panel H21-P623 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch "EF2 System Transfer" to the CONTROL DOOM position.
/
Verified By/Date 6.7.11 Perform the following for SBFW valve N2103F002:
- 1. The prarequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify there is indication for valve N2103F002 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Verify that valve N2103F002 operates in response to the open and close pushbetton switches, located on panel H11-P601, in the Ocntrol Room. Cycle valve as necessary. Leave valve in the closed position,
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- c. Valve N2103N002 left in closed position
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
48.000.05 Rsv. O Pags 72
- 4. Verify that valve N2103F002 does not respond to the open and close switches on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623.
. /
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that valve N2103F002 is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.7.12 Perform the following for SBFW valve N2103F003:
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify there is indication for valve N2103F003 in the Control Room.
/
Ve.rified By/Date
- 3. Verify that valve N2103F003 operates in response
- to the open and close pushbutton switches, located on panel Hil-P601, in the Control Room. t, ale valve as necessary. Leave valve in the closed position.
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- c. Valve N2103N003 left in closed position
/
Verified By/Date I I i DRAFT l
48.000.05 Rsv. O Page 73
- 4. Verify that valve N2103F003 does not respond to the open and close switches on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623.
. j Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that valve N2103F003 is in the as found condi~ tion or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date 6.7.13 Perform the following for SBFW valve N2103F001: NOTE: If a Level 8 condition exists to operate valve N2103F001 the OPEN pushbutton switch must be depressed and held down until the valve is fully open. When the OPEN pushbutton switch is released the valve will automatically close.
- 1. The prerequisites for compcnent testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify there is indication for the valve N2103F001 in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Verify that valve N2103F001 operates in response to the open and close pushbutton switches, located on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room, Cycle valve as necessary. Leave valve in the closed position,
- a. OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE
/
Verified By/Date
- c. Valve N2103H001 left in closed position
/
Verified By/Date i l DRAFT ,
48.000.05 s R2v. 0 Pags 74 s' '_
- 4. Verify that valve N2103F001 does not respond to the open and close switches on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-E623.
. /
'- Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that valve N2103F001 is in the as found condition ~or,as directed by the NSS.
/
~
Verified By/Date 6.7.14 Perform the following for SBFW Pump A, N2103C001: NOTE: With the test mode select switch in TEST, valve N2103F001, Injection Isolation Valve, cannot be opened to inject into the reactor vessel, if, required.
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
s
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify there is indication for SBFW Pump A in the
,- Control Room.
I Verified By/Date
- 3. Place the test mode selector switch for SBFW Pump A on Panel Hll-P601, in the Control Room, in the TEST position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Start the Auxiliary Oil Pump for SBFW Pump A and then place in the AUTO position.
/
Verifica By/Date
- 5. Verify that Pump A operates in response to the CMC i switch located on Panel Hil-P601. Cycle the pump as necessary.
DRAFT
48.000.05 R:v. O Prga 75 l i
- e. ON I
/
Verified By/Date )
- b. OFF l
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that Pump A does not respond to the CMC switch on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623.
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Place the test mode select switch for SBFW Pump A, on panel Hil-P601, in the NORMAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Verify that SBFW Pump A is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date
' 6.7.15 Perform the following for SBFW Pump B, N2103C002:
NOTE: With the test mode select switch in TEST, valve N2103F001, Injection Isolation Valve, cannot be opened to inject into the reactor vessel, if required.
- 1. The prerequisites for component testing have been met.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify there is indication for SBFW Pump B in the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. Place the test mode select switch for SBFW Pump B on panel Hil-P601, in the control Room, in the TEST position.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFI
48.000.05 Rev. O Pcg3 76
- 4. Start the Auxiliary Oil Pump for SBFW Pump B and then place in the AUTO position.
f / Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify that Pump B operates in response to the CMC switch located on panel H11-P601. Cycle the pump as necessary.
- a. ON
/
Verified By/Date l
- b. OFF {
l I
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify that Pump B does not respond to the CMC switch on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623. )
/
Verified By/Date
,- 7. Place the test mode select switch for SBFW Pump B, on panel H11-P601, in the ICRMAL position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Verify that SBFW Pump B is in the as found condition or as directed by the NSS.
/
Verified By/Date i s 6.8 Verification of Instrumentation on Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623 NOTE: The Remote Shutdown Panel, H21-P623, instruments, listed below, will be compared with the Control Room indicator. i
. 1. SBFW flow
- 2. Reactor pressure DRAF1
48.000.05-Rev. O Pega 77
- 3. Reactor level
- 4. Torus temperature
~
- 5. CST level
- 6. Torus level
- 7. Primary containment temperature 6.8.1 Record the indicated valves of the instruments on the Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623 on Attachment 3.
/
Verified By/Date 6.8.2 Record the indicated valves of the Control Room instruments on Attachment 3.
/
Verified By/Date 6.8.3 Verify the Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623 instruments are within 10% of the Control Room indicators.
/ ,- Verified By/Date # 6.6 Verification of Control of Safety Relief Valve B2104F0136G from Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623 NOTE: Control of Safety Relief Valve (SRV) B21204F013G will be transferred to Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623.
Prerequisites to operation of valve B2104F013G is listed on Attachment 1. 6.9.1 Perform the iollowing SRV valve B21C4F013G:
- 1. The prerequisites for testing valve B2104F013G have been met.
l Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the component to be tested is not necessary for plant operations.
/
Verified By/Date HAEi
48.000.05 Rev. O Pega 78 l
- 3. Transfer control of SRV valve B2104F013G from the Control Room to Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623 by i placing the "EF2 SYSTEM TRANSFER SWITCH" transfer switch, located on panel H21-P623, to the REMOTE position. - !
/ ,
Verified By/Date
- 4. Verify there is a loss of indication for valve f B2104F013G in the Control Room.
l / ! ' Verified By/Date
- 5. Hook up a voltimeter between terminals GG-29 & {
GG-30 in panel B21-P401. . i
/ i Verified By/Date {
- 6. Verify that valve B2104F013G would operate in !
response to the open and close pushbutton switch "SRV LINE B B21-F013G", located on panel H21-P623, j by determining if voltage is or is not present across terminals GG-29 and GG-30, in panel B21-P401, when the open and close switches are l
, , operated. Operate the switches as necessary.
- a. OPEN-VOLTAGE PRESENI
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE-VOLTAGE NOT PRESENI
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify that valve B2104F013G would not operate in response to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H11-P601, in the Control Room, by determining that voltage is not present across terminals CG-29 and GG-30 in panel b21-P401, when the open and close switches are opertted. l
/
. Verified By/Date a
DRAFT
a 48.000.05 Rev. 0 P:ga 79
- 8. Transfer control of SRV valve B2104F013G from Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623 to the Control Room by placing transfer switch "EF2 SYSTEM TRANSFER" to the CONIROL ROOM position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 9. Verify there is indication for valve B2104F013G in
. the Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. Verify that valve B2104F013G would operate in response to the open and close pashbutton switch on panel H21-P601, in the Control Room, by determining if voltage is or is not present across terminals GG-29 and GG-30 in panel B21-P401 when the open and close switches are operated.
- a. OPEN-VOLTAGE PRESENI
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CLOSE-VOLTAGE NOT PRESENT
' j Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify that valve B2104F013G would not operate in response to the open and close pushbutton switches on panel H21-P623 by determining that voltage is not present across terminals GG-29 and GG-30 in panel B21-P401, when the open and close switches are operated.
/
Verified By/Date 6.10 Restoration of Division 1 power from the 3L Panel 6.10.1 Special prerequisites for this system
- 1. The plant must be in Condition 4 COLD SHUIDOWN.
/
Verified By/Date DRAFT
- e -* ,
48.000.05 l Rev. 0 l' P:gs 80
- 2. Obtain permission of the Control Room NSS and NSO l to de-energize the Fermi 1 120 KV mat and restore -
h power to Division 1 using CTG-11. Unit 1.
- /
Verified By/Date
- 3. In preparation for this test the following action must be completed before starting (Reference Drawing 6SD721-2500-1).
- a. The following busses are being fed from SS
#69 transformer.
- 1) Bus 66H-CWP HSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 2) Bus 69J-CWP HSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 3) Bus 68K-GSWP HSE
- /
Verified By/Date
- 4) Bus 69K-GSWP HSE
/
Verified By/Date
- 5) Bus 69t!-CWP HSE
/
Verifierl By/Date
- b. The TSC (tCC 72G-W) is transferred to the 72 W bus.
/
Verified By/Date
- c. Disable the Division 1 Emergency Diesel Generators (EDG) by placing them in the -
Maintenance Pull Out position. DRAF1
- ,,,m,,
u**-7** % v- t-~ -e- e , ,
48.000.05 Rev. O Piga 81
- 1) EDG #11
/
Verified By/Date
- 2) EDG #12
/
Verified By/Date
- d. Verify that the following breakers are open.
- 1) V1, 3us 64V-Radwaste
/
Verified By/Date
- 2) C6, Bus 64C-Reactor building
/
Verified By/Date
- 3) 64T, Maintenance Tie Breaker
/
Verified By/Date
- 4) B6, Bus 64B Reactor Building
/
Verified By/Date
- 5) A9, Bus 64A Radwaste
/
Verified By/Date
- e. The AIB, TAC, G to C and Construction Feeds must be isolated from the Farmi 1 mat.
00 mms / Verified By/Date
- 4. Obtain permission of the System Supervisor to de-energize the Fermi l' mat (0 pen 120 KV breakers GM, GK, GD and Gil) and power SS #64 from CTG-11, Unit 1.
Verified By/Date ORAU v i ,
~y a .+*
48.000.05 R;v. O Page 82
- 5. Three Operators, and one Electrical Test Technician are available for this test.
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. As a precautionary measure a Relay Division Technician trained on the C3600 system and a Peaker Group Repairman or a technician are available to assist as required.
/
Verified By/Date
- 7. Station the Electrical Test Technician and the Relay Division Technician in the Fermi 1 relay room and establish communication with the Fermi 2 Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 8. Station an operator at Fermi 1 and establish communication with the Fermi 2 Control Room.
/
- Verified By/Date
- 9. To verify that CTG-11 Unit 1 is available for starting check the following.
- a. The "43" switch at the peaker is in the REMOTEpositionandA2breakerisra[kedin.
/
Verified By/Date
- b. The control selector switch in the Fermi 1 Control Room is in the Fermi 2 position.
/
Verified By/Date l
- c. The CTG-11 EF2 C0fiTROL DEACTIVATED alarm l (11D70) is c' ear in the Fermi 2 Control Room.
l
/
Verified By/Date DRAf1
{ 48.000.05 Rev. O Pags 83
- d. The DEDICATED SHUT DOWN SUPV. CONTROL TROUBLE alarm (002C36) is clear at the Fermi 2 Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date
- 10. At the Remote Shutdowa Panel verify the following initial status indications;
- a. UNIT 1 h READY TO START
/
Verified By/Date
- b. BUS 1-2 ENERGIZED'
/
Verified By/Date
- c. BUS 11 ENERGIZED
/
Verified By/Date
- d. BUS 101 ENERGIZED
/ # Verified By/Date
- e. BUS 102 ENERGIZED
/
- Verified By/Date
- f. Breaker A2 OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- g. Breaker A6 OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- h. Breaker B6 OPEN
/
Verified By/Date DRAFI
l 48.000.05 R;v. O Paga 84 l I
- 1. Breaker A CLOSED
/
Verified By/Date J. Breaker B OPEN 1
/
Verified By/Date
- k. Breaker C OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- 1. Breaker D CLOSED
/
Verified By/Date
- m. Breaker GH CLOSED L_
/
Verified By/Date
- n. Breaker GD CLOSED
/
Verified By/Date
- o. Breaker GK CLOSED
/ -
Verified By/Date
- p. Breaker GM CLOSED
/
Verified By/Date
- q. 120 KV LINE CLOSED
/
Verified By/Date 6.10.2 Simulate a loss of offsite power and Demonstrate Concrol of the 120 KV Mat and CTG-11 Unit 1 per the following steps. DRAFT L'_* v . .
48.000.05 Rev. O PJga 85
- 1. At the Fermi 1 relay room have the test technician lift X phase potential lead from termination, Number 7 of relay 27-101P which is mounted in Panel (%, the 27-101P-102P indicating light on the same panel should go out. -
/
Verified By/Date
. 2. At the Fermi 2 Control' Room verify that the 120 KV UNDER VOLTAGE SCHEME ABNORMAL (alarm 11D57, Seq.
Rec 003C36) alarm is received.
/
Verified By/Date
- 3. At ?.he Fermi 2 control room, turn the locking ring of the Dedicated Shutdown System transfer pushbutton topfhe ARMED position and verify that the DEDICATED SHUIDOWN TRANSF. R.B. AR'ED alarm 11D61 and Seq. Rec. Pt. 004C36 are received.
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Depress th( TRANSF pushbutton and verify that the following indictions are initiated:
- a. At the Fermi 2 Control Room
- 1) The DEDICATED SHUT DOWN CONTROL ACTIVATED alarm 11D49 and Seq. Rec.
001C36 indications are initiated.
/
Verified By/Date a
- 2) The Sequence in Progress indigtions is on for CTG 11-Unit 1.
/
Verified By/Date { h llsO
- 5. ~he Fermi-2 operatorgI should leave the control room and proceed immediately to the Third Remote Shutdown Panel H21-P623 then establish communications with the Fermi 2 Control Room.
/
Verified By/Date i DRAFT : I
- q.+
48.000.05 RIv. O P2gs 86
- 6. At the Dedicated Shut Down Panel H21-P623 verify the following:
- a. The UV Trip Armed indication is initiated.
/
Verified By/Date
- b. The Supv. Control Transferred indication is initiated.
/
Verified By/Date
- c. The CTG 11-Unit 1, G? Control switchindicato/sSeq.inprogress.
. / Verified By/Date
- 7. The Operator at H21-P623 should use the Gov dor and voltage controls to adjust CTG 11-Unit I to 59.9-60 HZ and 119 to 120 Volts, this should be maintained manually at this level as required.
/
-' Verified By/Date
*' Wait until the Sequence in Progress lights go out 8.
on H21-P623 and Hil-P811, confirm that the Sequence Complete light is on at Hil-P811 then, inform the test tech at Fermi I to proceed with Step 6.10.2.9.
/
Verified By/Date NOTE: The next step will trip the 120 KV Mat, all incoming line breakers will open, this will result in the loss of AC Power O at Fermi 1 momentarily, then A2 will close and restore power.
- 9. At the Fermi 1 relay room, Panel 2 lift the X phase wire from the #7 terminal of the 27-102 P relay, the relay should drop out and the AU light extinguish.
/
Verified By/Date DRAB e
48.000.05 Rev. O P g2 87
- 10. Verify the following has occurred by verifying the following indications at H11-P811 and H21-P623, place a check next to the appropriate spot,
- s. The GD 120 KV Breaker indicates open H21-P623 H11-P811
/
- Verified By/Date
- b. The GM Breaker indicates open H21-P623 Hil-P811
/
Verified By/Date l
- c. The GK Breaker indicates open H21-P623 H11-P811
/
Verified By/Date
- d. The A breaker indicates open H21-P623 Hil-P811
/
Verified By/Date
- e. The D breaker indicates open H21-P623 Hil-P811
/
Verified By/Date
- f. The,A7 breaker indicates open H11-P623 H11-P811
/
Verified By/Date
- g. The B6 breaker indicates open H21-P623 Hil-P811
/
Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 R;v. O Pzg2 88 *
- h. The A2 breaker indicates closed H21-P623 Hil-P811
/
Verified By/Date
- i. The A6 breaker indicates closed H21-P623 Hil-P811
/
Verified By/Date
- 11. Verify at Hil-811 that SS f64 transformer is at normal voltage (indicated at 115 to 120 volts)
/
Verified By/Date
- 12. Have the test tech _tyician at Fermi 1 reconnect the X phase wires rem 3hed from terminal #7 of relays 27-10lP and 27-102P at relay panel and verify that the relays pick up.
- a. 27-10lP restored to normal and picked up.
/
-' Verified By/Date
- b. 27-102P restored to normal and picked up.
/
Verified By/Date
- 13. Verify that the 27-10'P-102P light is on at Fermi 1 Relay Room panel Ni aber 1.
/
Verified By/Date 14 . Depress the AU String Reset at Fermi 1 panel 2 and verify that the U String Monitor light comes on.
/
Verified By/Date l DRAFT
NU99 Rev. O Psgs 89
- 15. Verify the following indicators at H21-P623.
- a. BUS 1-2 ENERGIZED
/
Veri,fied By/Date
- b. BUS 11 ENERGIZED
/
Verified By/Date
- c. BUS 101 ENERGIZED
/ ,
Verified By/Date
- d. bOS 102 ENERG1 ZED
/
Verified By/Date
- 16. From H21-P623 open breaker A6.
/
Verified By/Date
- 17. From H21-P623 close the A breaker.
Verified By/Date
- 18. From H21-P623 close the "D" breaker.
/
' Verified By/Date i
- 19. Verify that SS #64 transformer .s energized.
hCfh s' f'll~ fhbf 7 Verified By/Date
- 20. Have the Fermi 1 operator contact the System Supervisor and obtain permission to sync into the grid.
/
Verified By/Date l l i j 1 DRAFT
48.000.05 R,v. O Piga 90
- 21. From the Fermi 1 Control Room sync to the grid and close d breaker.
b Veri'fied 'By/ Date
/
- 22. From the Fermi 1 Control Room close the following breakers, notify the System Supervisor.
- a. p Breaker
/
Verified By/Date
- b. GK Breaker
/
Verified By/Date
- 23. From the H21-P623 panel open the following breakers, obtain permission of System Supervisor.
/
Verified By/Date
- a. Breaker
/
Verified By/Date
- b. CD Breaker
/
Verified By/Date
- 24. From the Fermi 1 Control Room close the folioving breakers, obtain permission of the System Supervisor.
- e. GM Breaker
/
Verified By/Date
- b. GD Breaker
/
Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 l Rev. O Pcgo 91 j l
- 25. From the H21-P623 panel open the ( breaker, obtain permission of the System Supbrvisor.
/
Verified By/Date
- 26. From the Fermi 1 Control Room close breaker Gk obtain permission of the System Supervisor.
/
Verified By/Date
- 27. From the H21-P623 panel open the Qi breaker, obtain permission of the System Supervisor.
/
Verified By/Date
- 28. From the H21-P623 panel close the Qi breaker, obtain permission of the System Supervisor.
/
Verified By/Date
- 29. Obtain peruission of the System Supervisor tG -[e p open breaker A2 from H21-P623.
/
Verified By/Date
- 30. Obtain permission of the System Supervisor to stop CTG-11, Unit 1 then stop CTG-11 Unit 1 from H21-P623.
/
Verified By/Date
- 31. Once the peaker is shutdown, verify that Breaker Pos A2 indicates open at the Control Room and H21-P623.
/
Verified By/Date
- 32. Af ter the peaker has coasted down the CTG-11, Unit 1 READY TO START light should illuminate in the Control Room and at H21-P623.
/
Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 Rtv. O Psgs 92
- 33. At H21-P623 turn the EF-1 SUPV. CONTROL switch to the Control Room position.
/
Verified By/Date
- 34. Verify that the UV TRIP ARMED and the SUPV. CONT.
TRANSFERRED lights are extinguished at H21-P623. I Verified By/Date
- 35. At the Fermi 2 Control Room, verify that the DEDICATED SHUT DOWN SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVATED (Alarm 11D49 Seq. Rec. 0001C36) alarm can be cleared.
/
Verified By/Date
- 36. At the Fermi 2 Control Room turn the Arming rirg of the SUPERVISORY CONTROL TRANSFER pushbuttca to the DISARMED position and verify that the DEDICATED SHUTDOWN TRANSF. P. B. ARMED (A'. arm llD61, Seq. Rec. 004C36) alarm can be cleared.
/ - Virified By/Date NOTE: The Peaker should be allowed to cool at least 30 minutes before attempting to restart.
- 37. At the Remote Shu:.down Panel turn the EFI SUPV CONTROL switch to the LOCAL position and verify the following local indications:
- a. The SUPV CONT. TRANSF light is on.
/
Verified By/Date
- b. The UV TRIP ARMED light is on.
/
Verified By/Date
- 38. At the Fermi 2 Control Room verify that the DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVATED (Alarm llD49, Seq. Rec. 001C36) alarm is initiated.
/
- Verified By/Date DRAFT .
48.000.05 Rev. O Pzga 93
- 39. At H21-P623 turn the CIG-11, Unit I control switch to start and verify that the READY TO START light is extinguished and the SEQ IN PROG light is initiated. ,
/
Verified By/Date
- 40. At th'e Fermi 2 Control Room verify that the CTG-11 Unit 1 READY TO START light is extinguished and the SEQ. IN PROGRESS light is initiated.
/
Verified By/Date
- 41. Obtain permission of the System Supervisor then open the following breakers from H21-P623.
- a. Breaker GM OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. Breaker GK OPEN
- /
Verified By/Date
- c. Breaker GH OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- 42. Verify the following breakers are open.
- a. Breaker A6 OPEN
/
Verified By/Date
- b. Breaker A7 OPEN i
/
Verified By/Date
- c. Breaker B6 OPEN
/
Verified By/Date l l DRAF1
48.000.05 J Rev. O P ga 94
- 43. Obtain permission of the System Supervisor then close breaker A7 from H21-P623.
/
Verified By/Date {
- 44. Aft sufficient run time shutdown the unit by
~ turning the CTG-ll Unit I control switch on H21-P623 to the stop position.
/
~
Verified By/Date 45. Afterthepeakerhascoasteddown,[thefollowing indications should be receivad. ver {gM
- a. At H21-P623
- 1) The A2 breaker should indicate OPEN.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2) The CTG-ll, Unit I control switch should indicate READY TO START.
.- /
Verified By/Date
- b. At the Fermi 2 Control Room (COP Hil-P811)
- 1) The CTG-ll, Unit 1 output breaker should indicate open.
/
Verified By/Date
- 2) The CTG-ll, Unit 1 should indicated READY TO START.
/
Veritied Jy/Date
- 46. From H11-P811 verify the controls are disabled by trying to operate them.
- a. Breaker GM OPEN/CLOSE Verified By/Date l
l DRAfl
3 48.000.05 l Rev. 0 Pagn 95 l
- b. Breaker GK OPEN/CLOSE l
l Verified By/Date
- c. Breaker GD OPEN/CLOSE Verified By/Date
- d. Breaker Q1 OPEN/CLOSE Verified By/Date
- e. Breaker A6 OPEN/CLOSE Verified By/Date
- f. Breaker A7 OPEN/CLOSE Verified By/Date
- g. Breaker B6 OPEN/CLOSE Verified dy/Date
- h. Breaker A OPEN/CLOSE Verified By/Date
- 1. Breaker B OPEN/CLOSE Verified By/Date J. Breaker C OPEN/CLOSE Verified By/Date
- k. - Breaker D OPEN/CLOSE Verified By/Date DRAF1
48.000.05 Rev. O Peg 2 96
- 47. At' H21-P623 turn the Supervisory Control Transfer
. switch to the CONI. ROOM position and verify the following' indications.
- a. At H21-P623 the UV TRIP ARMED and the SUPV.
CONI. TRANSF'D lights are extinguished at H21-P623.
- /
Verified By/Date
- b. At the Fermi 2 Control Room the DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV. CONTROL ACTIVATED (Alarm 11D49, Seq. Rec. 001C36) alarm can be cleared.
/
Verified By/Date
- 48. Obtain permission of the Sys em Supervisor and close the following breakers.
- a. Breaker GM CLOSED
/
Verified By/Date
- b. Breaker GK CLOSED
/
Verified By/Date
- c. Breaker GH CLOSED Verified By/Date l
l URATI
48.000.05 Attrchment 1 Page 1 of 3 PREREQUISITES FOR COMPONENT OPERATION
~
- 1. Prior to transferring control of the component to be tested ensure that the component can be operated f rom the Control Room.
.2. The prerequisites for operating the E11 valves (listed below) is for the E1100 system to be in a shutdown condition.
E11-F009 E11-F068A E11-F003A E11-F048A E11-F016A E11-F004A E11-F047A E11-F010
- 3. Valve E11-F004C, Prior to operating valve E11-F004C ensure valve E11-F006C is closed.
- 4. Valve E11-F006C, Prior to operating valve E11-F006C ensure valve E11-F004C is closed.
- 5. Valve E11-F028A, Prior to operating valve E11-F028A ensure valve E11-F024A is closed.
,6. Valve E11-F024A, Prior to operating valve E11-F024A ensure valve E11-F028A is closed.
- 7. Valve E11-F015A, Prior to operating valve E11-F015A ensure valves E11-F017A and E11-F611A are closed.
- 8. Valve E11-F017A, Prior to operating valve E11-F017A ensure valve E11-F015A is closed.
- 9. Valve E17-F611A, Prior to operating valve E11-F611A ensure valve E11-F015A is closed.
- 10. Valve B31-F031A, Prior to operating valve B31-F031A ensure the followings
- a. Recire. Pump A is off.
- b. Valve B31-F023A is open.
- 11. Drywell Cooling Fan #1, Prior to operating Drywell Cooling Fan #1 the T47(OC001 temperature in the drywell must be less than 135'F.
- 12. Drywell Cooling Fan #2, Prior to operating Dryvell Cooling Fan #2 the T4700C002 temperature in the drywell must be less than 135'F.
100785 1 DRAF1 -
48.000.05 Attachment 1 Pega 2 cf 3
- 13. RHR Equipment Cooler Fan #1, Prior to operating RHR Equipment Cooler T4100S018 Fan il the Division I RHR System is in a shutdown condition.
- 14. SRV B21-F013G, Prior to operating SRV B21-F013G ensure reactor pressure is less than 75 PSI.
- 15. Prior to operating SBFW e~nsure the system is in the standby position per - P rocedure 23.107.01.
- 16. Prior to operating SBFW Pumps A and B ensure the following:
- a. SBFW valves N2103F002 & N2103F003 are closed.
- b. Ensure P11-F610, CRD, MPCI and RCIC Return to CRT Isolation Valve, or P11-F606, CRD, HPCI and RCIC Return to CST Isolation Valve, are open for return path to the storage tanks. (Located on H11-P805).
- 17. There are no prerequisites for operating the P44 valves listed below.
However the NSS is to be notified that flow will be interrupted momentarily. P44-F606A P44-F602A P44-F607A P44-F616
*' 18. Bus 64C, Position C5, Prior to operating Position C5 ensure the breaker is in the test position and Division I.
of RHR is in a shutdown condition. Also ensure all interlocks are identified and the affect on other plant components is understood.
- 19. Bus 64C, Position C6, Prior to operating Position C6 ensure the breaker is in the test position and EDG #12 be on the bus and loaded. Also ensure all inter-locks are identified and the affect on other plant components is understood.
- 20. Bus 64C, Position C8, Prior to operating Position C8 ensure the breaker is in the test position and EDG #12 is in maintenance lockout. Also ensure all inter-locks are identified and the affect on other plant components is understood.
- 21. Bus 64C, Position Cll, Prior to operating Position C11 ensure the breaker is in the test position and RHR Pump C is in shutdown condition. Also ensure all interlocks are identified and the affect on other plant components is understood.
100785
%MT
48.000.05 Attachment 1 Page 3 of 3
- 22. Bus 64C, Position 9C, Prior to operating Position C9 ensure the breaker is in the test position. Also ensure all intetlocks are identified ar.d the affect on other plant components is understoot
- 23. Bus 64C, Position C10, Prior to operating position C10 ensure the breaker is in the test positio.iend Division I of Core Spray is in a shutdown u ndition. Also ensure all interlocks are identified and the affect on other plant compone.its is understood.
- 24. Prior to operating the 4160V breakers below ensure the breaker is in the test position.
Bus 64V Positions VI and V3 Bus 65W Position W5 t 100785 0RAF1 l
48.000.05 Attachment 2 P:g2 1 cf 2 AS FOUND CONDITION OF TESTED COMPONENIS CONDITION VERIFIED BY COMPONENT (ON/0FF, OPEN/CLOSE) (INITIALS /DATE) RHR Pump C 4160V C6, Breaker 4160V C8 Breaker 4160V C11 Breaker 4160V C9 Breaker Core Spray Pump C RHR Cooler Fan #1 Valve E11-FC09 Valve P44-F606A Valve P44-F607A Valve E11-F003A Valve E11-F004C Valve E11-F006C Valve E11-F016A Valve E11-F047A Valve E11-F068A Valve E11-F048A Valve P44-F602A Drywell Cooling Fan #2 Valve E11-F028A Valve E11-F024A Drywell Cooling Fan #1 _ Valve E11-F004A 100785 DRAfl
l I 48.000.05 ! Attachment 2 Page 2 of 2 i CONDITION VERIFIED BY COMPONENT (ON/0FF, OPEN/CLOSE) (INITIALS /DATE) Valve E11-F611A , Valve B31-F031A Valve E11-F010 Valve E11-F015A Valve E11-F017A Valve P44-F616A Valve N210?F002 Valve N2103F003 Valve N2103F001 SBFW Putop A SBFW Pump B 4160V'V1 Breaker _, 4160V V2 Breaker 4160V W5 Breaker 100785 DRAFI
48.000.05 Attcchment 3 Pig 2 1 cf 1 REMOTE SHUTDOWN INSTRUMENI CHANNEL CHECKS PERCENT INITIAL / l INSTRUMENT LOCATION VALUE DIFFERENCE DATE
.SBFW FLOW H21-P623 Hil-P602 l
H21-P623 l REACTOR PRESSURE H11-P603 ( l REACTOR LEVEL H21-P623 ! Hil-P602 f i l TORUS TEMPERATURE H21-P623 Hil-P603 PT. 11 & 12 i CST LEVEL H21-P623 Hil-P805 (Red Pen) TORUS LEVEL H21-P623 Hil-P601 PRI CONI TEMPERATURE H21-P623 Hil-P602 _ PT. 3 100785
. s
48.C00.05 , Atttchment 4 I P ga 1 cf 4 { ( INDEPENDENI VERIFICATION SHEET
- 1. Verify the transfer control switch on Remote Shutdown Pandl H21-P623 l is in the CONTROL ROOM position. {
- a. EF2, SYSTEM TRANSFER
/
Verified By/Date
- 2. Verify the following alarms are clear.
- a. DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV CONIROL ACTIVATED
. 1
/
Verified By/Date
- b. 120 KV UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME ABNORMAL
/
Verified By/Date I
- c. DEDICATED SHUTDOWN SUPV CONIROL TROUBLE
/
Verified By/Date
- d. DEDICATED SHUTDOWN TRANSF PB ARMED l
/
Verified By/Date l
- 3. Verify the transfer control and power cutoff switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P624 are in the CONIROL ROOM position.
- a. 4160V POS C9 TIE BREAKER CONIROL
/
l Verified By/Date
- b. 4160V POS C10 CORE SPRAY PUtf C CONTROL {
I I
/
Verified By/Date
- c. 4160V POS C5 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL I
, / Verified By/Date i 100785 , DRAfl l 1
48.000.05 Attcchment 4 Page 2 of 4
- d. 4160V POS C6 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL
/
Verified By/Date
- e. 4160V POS C8 CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL
/
Verified By/Date
- f. 4160V POS Cll CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL
/
Verified By/Date
- 4. Verify the transfer control switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P625 are in the CONTROL ROOM position. .
- a. 435-5B TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F004C
/
Verified By/Date
- b. 43S-6D TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F048A
.- p
- Verified By/Date
- c. 43S-SA TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F003A
/
Verified By/Date
- d. 43S-5C TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F006C
/
Verified By/Date
- c. 43S-6A TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F047A
/
Verified By/Date
- f. 43S-6B TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F068A
/
Verified By/Date
- g. 43S-7A TRANSFER SW VLV P44-F602A
/
Verified By/Date 100785
n . 48.000.05 Attechment 4 Paga 3 ef 4
- h. 43S-4D TRANSFER SW VLV P44-F607A 1
/
Verified By/Date
- 1. 43S-5D TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F016A l l
/ l Verified By/Date j I
- j. 43S-9C TRANSFER SW FAN T47-C002 j t
/
Verified By/Date , I
- k. 43S-4C TRANSFER SW VLV P44-F606A
/ I Verified By/Date f I
- 1. 43S-3C TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F009 l
/
Verified By/Date lii. 43S-3A TRANSFER SW FAN T41-B018
.s
' \
Verified By/Date
- 5. Verify the transfer control switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P626 i are in the CONTROL ROOM position. .
- a. 43S-5A TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F024A !
/ l Verified By/Date I
- b. 43S-2A TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F028A l f
/ l Verified By/Date l
- c. 43S-1AR TRANSFER SW FAN T47-C001
/
Verified By/Date
- d. 43S-3AR TRANSFER SW VLV Ell-F004A {
/
Verified By/Date ,
48.000.05 Attcchment 4 Page 4 of 4
- e. 43S-5AR TRANSFER SW VLV E11-F611A
/
Verified By/Date
- 6. Verify -the transfer control switches on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P627
. are in the CONIROL ROOM position.
- a. 435-1B TRANSFER SW VLV B31-F031A
/
Verified By/Date
- b. 43S-2B TRANSFER SW VLV E11-F010
/
Verified By/Date
- c. 43S-2C TRANSFER SW VLV E11-F015A
/
Verified By/Date
- d. 43S-3A TRANSFER SW VLV E11-F017A
,- /
Verified By/Date
- 7. Verify the transfer control switch on Local Shutdown Panel H21-P628 is in the CONTROL ROOM position.
- a. 43S-4B TRANSFER SW VLV P44-F616 i
/ '
Verified By/Date ! Time /Date Independent Verification started Printed name of person performing Independent Verification 1 Signature l l 100785 DRAF1
48.000.05 Att chment 5 Paga 1 cf 1 i Date Completed Printed Names of Test Personnel Initials Signatures l I i Inform the NSS that this test is complete.
/ l Verified By/Date 9
DRAF1
\
. _}}